2018 18BAFIA-126-AC 124 SPIDER ©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group Third Edition Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING The antenna cable should be as short as practical and FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this only fully shielded coaxial cable. available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained person- nel. The following must be observed during installation. Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design normal may require special precautions. alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body ence between the communications equipment and the portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. vehicle’s electronic systems. This connection should not be fused. WARNING! Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped. Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC DEAR CUSTOMER Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing a Fiat 124 Spider. We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your vehicle and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your vehicle. You are advised to take the time to read these publications carefully before taking to the road for the first time, to become familiar with the controls and above all with those concerning brakes, steering and transmission; at the same time, you can understand the vehicle behavior on different road surfaces. This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle over time. After reading it, you are advised to keep the Owner’s Manual inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains in the vehicle should it be sold. In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that FCA offers to its customers, and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at FCA. Enjoy reading. Happy motoring! Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all models of the vehicle; please consider only the information relevant to your vehicle’s trim level, engine and model. All data contained in this publication are purely indicative. FCA can modify the vehicle model described in this publication at any time, for technical or commercial purposes. For further information, contact your authorized dealer. Read This Carefully REFUELING Only refuel with unleaded gasoline with a recommended rating of 91 octane. A rating less than 87 octane is not acceptable. Do not use gasoline containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and handling issues, as well as damage fundamental components of the fuel supply system.

STARTING THE ENGINE

If equipped with a manual transmission: Be sure that the parking brake is engaged; place the gear selector in NEUTRAL, fully depress the clutch pedal without pressing the accelerator, and then push the ignition button. The engine will start as soon as the ignition is pushed. If equipped with an automatic transmission: Be sure that the parking brake is engaged and that the gear selector is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), depress the brake pedal, and then push the ignition button. The engine will start as soon as the ignition is pushed.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The vehicle is equipped with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

Contact your authorized dealer if you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery) after buying the vehicle. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the vehicle is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs are unchanged over time. How To Use This Manual ESSENTIAL INFORMATION Each time directions (left/right or forward/backwards) are listed, they are determined by facing forward from the rear of the vehicle or as from the point of view of being seated inside the car. Special cases not complying with this rule will be properly specified in the text. The figures in the Owner’s Manual are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. In addition, the Owner’s Manual has been conceived considering vehicles with steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position of some controls or elements is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure. To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner’s Manual. Chapters can be rapidly identified by graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A key showing the order of the chapter and the corresponding tab symbols appears on another page. SYMBOLS While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. There are also CAUTIONS that must be carefully followed prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. Therefore, all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: Personal Safety

Vehicle Safety Vehicle Modifications / Alterations

Warning!

Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could be fatally injured.

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER If after buying the vehicle, you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that burden the electrical supply, contact your authorized dealer, whose personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required , or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery. Note: Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. INSTALLING ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC DEVICES The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PHONES Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate aerial is mounted externally. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of EC-approved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS, LTE), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer. The use of these devices inside the vehicle (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the vehicle safety in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Advanced Keyless Entry System may occur. CELL PHONE WARNING Note: Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles in your country. Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical devices while the vehicle is moving and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving. This page is intentionally left blank GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX This page is intentionally left blank GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

FRONT VIEW

01020304-000-100 Front View 1 — Engine Compartment 3 — Doors 5 — Exterior Lights 2 — Windshield Wiper Blades 4 — Wheels And Tires

9 REAR VIEW

01020304-001-100 Rear View Rear View

1 — Outside Mirrors 3 — Antenna 5 — Exterior Lights 2 — Convertible Top (Soft Top) 4 — Trunk Lid 6 — Fuel Door

10 INSTRUMENT PANEL

02010200-129-555 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel

1 — Turn Signal/High Beams Lever 4 — Hazard Warning Lights Button 7 — Driver Air Bag 2 — Instrument Cluster 5 — Passenger Air Bag 8 — Control Buttons 3 — Windshield Wiper And Washers 6 — Ignition Switch

11 INTERIOR OVERVIEW

01020304-002-100 Interior Overview INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1 — Steering Wheel 4 — Climate Control System 7 — Radio Control 2 — Rearview Mirror 5 — Transmission Gear Selector 8 — Seats 3 — Radio Systems 6 — Parking Brake

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS ...... 14 IGNITION SWITCH ...... 20 ADVANCED KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 21 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 23 DOORS...... 26 SEATS...... 32 NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 34 STEERING WHEEL ...... 35 MIRRORS ...... 35 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 38 WINDSHIELD WIPERS / WASHER .43 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ....45 POWER WINDOWS ...... 56 HOMELINK — IF EQUIPPED .....58 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 61 TRUNKLID...... 66 TRUNK EMERGENCY RELEASE . . .68 HOOD ...... 69 CONVERTIBLE TOP (SOFT TOP) . .70 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ....74 ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION SYSTEMS...... 74

13 KEYS To use the Emergency Key, push the Do not leave children or animals inside mechanical latch on the back side of Key Fob parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior the key fob and pull out the emergency heat build-up may cause serious injury or A code number is stamped on the plate key. death. and attached to the key fob. Detach Note: this plate and store it in a safe place Key Fob Functions (not in the vehicle) if you need to make Always keep a spare key fob if one replace the Emergency Key. is lost. If a key fob is lost, see an With A Vehicle Security Alarm Also, write down the code number and authorized dealer as soon as possible. System keep it in a separate safe and The driver must carry the key fob to The hazard warning lights will flash convenient place. Do not keep it in the ensure the Keyless Entry System when the vehicle security alarm system vehicle. functions properly. is armed or disarmed. If your key fob is lost, contact an With Advanced Keyless Function authorized dealer. A beep will sound when the doors, Note: Your key fob configuration may Warning! trunk lid, and fuel filler door are locked vary with equipped features. Please see or unlocked using the key fob. The the example shown below: beep volume can be adjusted or turned Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the off. automatic transmission into PARK or the Use the following procedure to change manual transmission into FIRST gear or the beep setting: REVERSE, apply the parking brake, then turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. and close the doors and the trunk lid. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. 2. Open the driver's door. Allowing children to be in a vehicle 3. Within 30 seconds of opening the unattended is dangerous for a number of driver's door, push and hold the lock reasons. A child or others could be button on the key fob for five seconds. 04010177-361-002 seriously or fatally injured. Children should Key Fob be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. 1 — Emergency Key 2 — Key Fob Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to 3 — Key Code Number Plate children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 14 Note: Key Fob Buttons Closing the driver’s door. The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler Lock Button Opening the trunk lid. door will lock, and the beep will To lock the doors, trunk lid, and fuel Not operating the key fob for ten activate at the current volume (if the filler door, push the lock button on the seconds. beep is currently set to not activate, it key fob. The hazard warning lights will will not activate). flash once and a beep will sound. Pushing any button except the unlock button on the key fob. The setting changes when the lock Unlock Button button on the key fob is pushed, and To unlock the doors and trunk lid, push Pushing a request switch on the the beep will activate at the set volume the unlock button on the key fob, and exterior door handle. (if the beep sound has been set to not the hazard warning lights will flash Trunk Button activate, it will not activate). twice. To open the trunk lid, push and hold the Complete changing the setting by doing The system can be set to unlock both trunk button until the trunk lid opens. doors. Use the following procedure to the following: Panic Button change the setting: Placing the ignition in ACC or ON To turn the Panic Alarm on or off, push position. 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position and hold the Panic button on the key and close the doors and trunk lid. Closing the driver's door. fob and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights will turn on, the 2. Open the driver's door. Opening the trunk lid. park lights will flash, the horn will pulse Not operating the key fob for ten 3. Within 30 seconds of opening the on and off, and the turn signal lights will seconds. driver's door, push and hold the unlock flash. button on the key fob for five seconds. Note: The panic button will work if the Pushing any button, except the lock doors or trunk are opened or closed. button on the key fob. Note: The sound of the doors locking/unlocking can be heard. After Turning On The Alarm Pushing a request switch on the this, the system will change the setting Pushing the panic button for one exterior door handle. when the unlock button is pushed (the second or more will trigger the alarm for Note: Refer to “Lock/Unlock With sound of the doors locking/unlocking about two minutes and thirty seconds, Advanced Keyless Entry Function — If can be heard). and the following will occur: Equipped” in “Doors” for further The setting change can be completed The horn sounds intermittently. information. by doing any one of the following: The hazard warning lights flash. The operation indicator light flashes Placing the ignition in the ACC or ON when the buttons are pushed. position.

15 Turning Off The Alarm Note: The engine may not start if the The system's operational range is The alarm will stop by pushing any key fob is placed in or around the reduced. button on the key fob. following areas: Note: Replacing the battery at an Operational Range Around The Instrument Panel authorized dealer is recommended to prevent damage to the key fob. If The system operates only when the In The Storage Compartments replacing the battery by yourself, follow driver is in the vehicle or within Key Suspend Function the instruction below. operational range, and the key fob is Replacing The Key Fob Battery being carried. If a key fob is left in the vehicle, key fob Proceed as follows: Starting The Engine functions are temporarily suspended to Starting the engine may be possible prevent unlawful use of the vehicle. 1. Push the mechanical release button even if the key fob is outside the vehicle To restore the functions, push the and remove the emergency key. and close to a door or window. Always unlock button on the functions- start the engine from the driver's seat. suspended key fob. If the vehicle is started, and the key fob Key Fob Battery is not in the vehicle, the vehicle will not Replacement restart after it is shut off. The ignition is placed in the OFF position. If key fob does not work, and the indicator lights do not flash, the battery Key Fob Antenna Location may be low or discharged. Replace with a new battery (CR2025 type) before the key fob GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE becomes unusable. 07031301-361-002 The following conditions indicate that Emergency Key Removed the battery power is low:

Indicator light (green) flashes in 1 — Key Fob Case With Mechanical the instrument cluster for about Release Button 30 seconds after the engine is placed in 2 — Emergency Key the OFF position.

04010202-12R-001 The system does not operate, and 2. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw Key Fob Antenna Location the operation indicator light on the key driver, or the tip of your emergency key into the now exposed slot and carefully 1 — Interior Antenna fob does not flash when the buttons are pushed. pry in the direction of the arrows to 2 — Operational Range open the cover (3) slightly.

16 Note: Be careful not to allow the rubber ring shown in call-out (6) to be scratched or damaged. If the rubber ring comes out, reinstall it before inserting a new battery. Engine Start Function When Key Fob Battery Is Discharged If a key fob has discharged or malfunctioned, start the engine by 07031301-362-002 07031301-364-003 holding the Key Fob over the keyless 3 — Pry Case Left Side Remove Back Cover For Battery ignition START/STOP button. Be careful Replacement 3. Insert a coin, a flat blade screw to not to allow the following. The signal driver, or the tip of your emergency key 3 — Key Fob Case from the key fob will not be received into the side gap and carefully pry in the 5 — Key Fob Battery correctly, and the engine may not start: direction of the arrow to open the cover Contact with metal parts of other key (4). 5. Insert a new battery with the positive fobs or metal objects. pole facing up. Then, cover the battery with the battery cap. Contact from key fobs from other vehicle’s equipped with an immobilizer 6. Close the cover and reinsert the system. Emergency Key. Contact with devices for electronic purchases or security passage touch.

07031301-363-002 4 — Pry Case Right Side 4. Separate the key fob case, then remove the battery.

07031301-367-001 6 — Install New Battery 05010201-KY1-001 No Keys Touching The Key Fob 17 6. Push the keyless ignition operation from the beginning. If it does START/STOP button to start the not illuminate, contact an authorized engine. dealer. To change the ignition position without starting the engine, perform the following operations after the keyless ignition start indicator light (green) turns on: 1. Release the clutch pedal (manual transmission) or brake pedal (automatic 05010201-KY2-001 transmission). No Key Fob Touching The Key Fob 2. Push the keyless ignition If the engine cannot be started due to a START/STOP button to change the discharged key fob battery, the engine 05010201-L12-001 ignition position. The ignition cycles in can be started using the following Discharged Key Fob Battery Start Procedure the order of ACC, ON, and OFF each procedure: time the keyless ignition START/STOP 1. Continue to depress the brake pedal When touching the keyless ignition button is pushed. START/STOP button using the firmly until the engine has completely Note: To change the ignition position started. backside of the key fob, touch the keyless ignition START/STOP button again, perform the operation from the 2. Manual Transmission: Continue to with the key fob buttons facing up. beginning.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE depress the clutch pedal firmly until the The engine cannot be started unless Emergency Operation For Starting engine has completely started. the clutch pedal is fully depressed The Engine 3. Verify that the keyless ignition start (manual transmission) or the brake If the key warning light (red) illuminates, indication light (green) flashes. pedal is fully depressed (automatic or the keyless ignition start indicator transmission). light (amber) flashes, this could indicate 4. Touch the keyless ignition If there is a malfunction with the keyless that the engine may not start using the START/STOP button using the ignition START/STOP button function, usual starting method. Contact an backside of the key fob while the the keyless ignition start indicator light authorized dealer as soon as possible. keyless ignition start indicator light (amber) flashes. In this case, the engine If this occurs, the engine can be (green) flashes. may start. However, contact an force-started. push and hold the 5. Verify that the keyless ignition start authorized dealer as soon as possible. keyless ignition START/STOP button indicator light (green) turns on. If the keyless ignition start indicator light until the engine starts. (green) does not illuminate, perform the

18 Other procedures necessary for starting Key Fob Cautions Expose the key fob to any kind of the engine such as having the key fob magnetic field. Because the key fob uses low-intensity in the vehicle, and depressing the radio waves, it may not function under Place heavy objects on the key fob. clutch pedal (manual transmission) or the following conditions: the brake pedal (automatic Put the key fob in an ultrasonic transmission) are required. The key fob is carried with a cleaner. communication device such as cellular Put any magnetized objects close to phones. Caution! the key fob. The key fob contacts or is covered by a metal object. General Information If your vehicle battery becomes low or The following regulatory statement dead, your key fob will become locked in The key fob is near electronic the ignition. devices such as personal computers. applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: Do not attempt to remove the key fob Non-FCA genuine electronic This device complies with Part 15 of the while in this condition, damage could equipment is installed in the vehicle. FCC Rules and with Industry Canada occur to the key fob or ignition module. Only remove the emergency key for There is equipment which discharges license-exempt RSS standard(s). locking and unlocking the doors. radio waves near the vehicle. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Leave the key fob in the ignition and The key fob may consume battery either: power excessively if it receives 1. This device may not cause harmful Jump Start the vehicle. high-intensity radio waves. Do not place interference. the key fob near electronic devices Charge the battery. such as televisions or personal 2. This device must accept any interference received, including Contact your authorized dealer for computers. interference that may cause undesired assistance on how to remove the key fob To avoid damage to the key fob, DO using the manual override method. operation. NOT: Note: Changes or modifications not Drop the key fob. expressly approved by the party Get the key fob wet. responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the Disassemble the key fob unless equipment. replacing the battery. Expose the key fob to high temperatures such as direct sunlight.

19 IGNITION SWITCH Note: ON Push Button Start The engine starts by pushing the This is the normal running position after Positions keyless ignition START/STOP button the engine is started. while depressing the clutch pedal Note: The indicator light (amber) turns The system operates only when the key (manual transmission) or the brake off (the indicator light amber illuminates fob is within operational range. pedal (automatic transmission). To when the ignition has been placed in When the clutch pedal (manual change the ignition position, push the the ON position and the engine is not transmission) or brake pedal (automatic keyless ignition START/STOP button running). transmission) are not depressed and without depressing the clutch or brake Some indicator lights/warning lights the keyless ignition START/STOP pedal. should be inspected before the engine button is pushed, the ignition cycles in is started. the order of OFF, ACC, and ON. Do not leave the ignition in the ON When the keyless ignition has been Pushing the START/STOP button again position while the engine is not placed in the ON position, the sound of from ON position cycles the ignition to running. The battery could discharged. the fuel pump motor operating near the the OFF position. If the ignition is left in ACC position (for automatic transmission, the gear fuel tank can be heard. This does not selector is in the P position, and the indicate a problem. ignition is in ACC), the ignition cycles to the OFF position automatically after about 25 minutes. Warning! OFF The power supply to electrical devices Never use the PARK position as a GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE turns off, and the keyless ignition start substitute for the parking brake. Always indicator light (amber) also turns off. In apply the parking brake fully when exiting the OFF position, the steering wheel is the vehicle to guard against vehicle locked. movement and possible injury or damage. 05010101-L12-001AB ACC (Accessory) When exiting the vehicle, always make Keyless START/STOP Ignition sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, Button Some electrical accessories will operate remove the key fob from the vehicle, and and the indicator light (amber) lock your vehicle. illuminates. In the ACC position, the steering wheel is unlocked. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. The Keyless Entry System does not Allowing children to be in a vehicle function while the keyless ignition has unattended is dangerous for a number of been placed in the ACC position, and reasons. A child or others could be the doors will not lock/unlock even if seriously or fatally injured. Children should they have been locked manually. 20 Key Fob Left-In-Trunk Warning Beep be warned not to touch the parking brake, ADVANCED brake pedal or the transmission gear KEYLESS ENTRY Key Fob Left-In-Vehicle Warning selector. SYSTEM — IF Beep Do not leave the key fob in or near the EQUIPPED If you have a problem with the key fob, vehicle, (or in a location accessible to Advanced Keyless Entry or the key fob is lost or stolen, contact children), and do not leave the ignition in an authorized dealer as soon as the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could System possible for a replacement and to make operate power windows, other controls, or The Advanced Keyless Entry System is the lost or stolen key fob inoperative. move the vehicle. an enhancement that allows you to Be sure the parking brake is fully lock/unlock the doors, trunk lid, and Note: Changes or modifications not disengaged before driving; failure to do so fuel filler door. approved by the party responsible for can lead to brake failure and a collision. The Advanced Keyless Entry System compliance could void the user's Always fully apply the parking brake allows the driver to start the ignition authority to operate the equipment. when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll with the push of a button as long as the The Advanced Keyless Entry and cause damage or injury. Also be key fob is in the passenger System operational range may vary certain to leave the transmission in PARK. compartment. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to due to local weather conditions. roll and cause damage or injury. If equipped, the vehicle security alarm system may be armed/disarmed with The Advanced Keyless Entry Driving the vehicle with the parking brake the push of the lock/unlock button System is fully operational (door/trunk engaged, or repeated use of the parking located on the key fob. lid/fuel filler door lock/unlock) when the brake to slow the vehicle may cause ignition is placed in the OFF position. System Malfunctions/Warnings serious damage to the brake system. The Advanced Keyless Entry System System malfunctions or warnings are does not operate if the ignition is indicated by the following warning lights placed to any position other than the or beeps (refer to “Getting To Know OFF position. Your Instrument Panel” for further information): If the key fob does not operate when pushing a button, the operational Warning Light (Red) range becomes too small, or the Ignition Not Turned OFF Warning warning light does not illuminate or Beep flash, the battery may be weak or discharged. To install a new battery, Key Fob Removed From Vehicle refer to “Key Fob Battery Warning Beep Replacement.” Request Switch Inoperable Warning Beep 21 Battery life is about one year. Note: The Advanced Keyless Entry Note: When the battery power is low, Replace the battery with a new one if System functions can be deactivated to or in places where there are the Warning light (green) flashes in prevent any possible adverse effect on high-intensity radio waves or noise, the the instrument cluster. Replacing the a user wearing a pacemaker or other operational range may reduce, or the battery about once a year is medical device. If the system is system may not operate. recommended because the deactivated, you will be unable to start Locking/Unlocking The Doors And Warning light may not illuminate or the engine by carrying the key fob. The Trunk Lid flash if the battery is low or discharged. Contact an authorized dealer for details. If the Advanced Keyless Entry Additional key fobs may be System has been deactivated, you can obtained at an authorized dealer. Up to start the engine by following the six key fobs may be used with the procedure indicated when the key fob Advanced Keyless Entry System per battery becomes discharged. vehicle. Bring all key fobs to an authorized dealer when additional keys Operational Range are required. The system operates only when the driver is in or around the vehicle while The Advanced Keyless Entry function the key fob is being carried. allows you to lock/unlock the door,

trunk lid, and fuel filler door, or open the 04020201-12A-003 trunk lid while carrying the key fob. Request Switch Door Functions 1 — Exterior Antenna Warning! 2 — Operational Range GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 3 — Distance (31 inches) Radio waves from the key fob may affect medical devices such as pacemakers: Note: The system may not operate if before using the key fob near people who you are too close to the windows or use medical devices, ask the medical door handles. device manufacturer or your physician if radio waves from the key fob will affect the 04010202-12S-002 device. Advanced Keyless Entry Sensors 1 — Interior Antenna 2 — Operational Range

22 Opening The Trunk Lid General Information VEHICLE SECURITY The following regulatory statement ALARM SYSTEM — IF applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) EQUIPPED devices equipped in this vehicle: Modifications And This device complies with Part 15 of the Add-On Equipment FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). FCA cannot guarantee the immobilizer Operation is subject to the following and security alarm system operation if two conditions: the system has been modified or if any add-on equipment has been installed. 1. This device may not cause harmful Note: To avoid damage to the vehicle, interference. 04020202-12A-003 do not modify the system or install any Electronic Trunk Release 2. This device must accept any add-on equipment to the immobilizer, interference received, including the security alarm system, or the 1 — Exterior Antenna vehicle. 2 — Operational Range interference that may cause undesired operation. 3 — Distance (31 inches) Immobilizer System Note: Changes or modifications not The immobilizer system allows the expressly approved by the party engine to start only with a recognized responsible for compliance could void key fob. the user’s authority to operate the If someone attempts to start the engine equipment. with an unrecognized key fob, the engine will not start, preventing unlawful vehicle use.

23 If you have a problem with the Always keep a spare key fob in Disarming immobilizer system or the key fob, case one is lost. If a key fob is lost, The system is disarmed when the contact an authorized dealer. contact an authorized dealer as soon ignition is placed in the ON position with To avoid damage to the key fob, do not: as possible. the correct programmed key fob. The warning light illuminates for about Drop the key fob. If you lose a key fob, an authorized dealer will reset the electronic codes of three seconds and then turns off. If the Get the key fob wet. your remaining key fobs and engine does not start with the correct key fob, and the warning light Expose the key fob to any kind of immobilizer system. Bring all the remains illuminated or flashing, try the magnetic field. remaining key fobs to an authorized dealer to reset. Starting the vehicle following: Expose the key fob to high with a key fob that has not been reset Make sure the key fob is within the temperatures such as direct sunlight. is not possible. operational range for signal Note: Operation transmission. Changes or modifications not The engine may not start and Cycle the ignition off, and then restart expressly approved by the party warning light may illuminate or flash the engine. If the engine does not start responsible for compliance could void if the key fob is placed in an area after three or more tries, contact an the user's authority to operate the difficult for the system to detect the authorized dealer. equipment. signal, such as on the instrument panel. Move the key fob to a location within Note: If the engine does not start with the the signal range, place the ignition in If the warning light flashes correct key fob, and the warning the OFF position, and restart the continuously while you are driving, do

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE light keeps illuminating or flashing, the engine. not turn the engine OFF. Contact an system may have a malfunction. authorized dealer and have it checked. Contact an authorized dealer. Note: Signals from a TV, radio station, transceiver, or mobile telephone could If the engine is shut off while the The key fobs carry a unique interfere with your immobilizer system. If warning light is flashing, you will electronic code. For this reason, and to you are using the proper key fob and not be able to restart it. assure your safety, obtaining a the engine fails to start, check the Because the electronic codes are replacement key fob can only be done warning light. reset when the immobilizer system is through your authorized dealer, and will Arming repaired, the keys are needed. Make require some waiting time. The system is armed when the ignition sure to bring all the key fobs to an is cycled from the ON to OFF position. authorized dealer so that they can be The warning light in the instrument programmed. cluster flashes every two seconds until the system is disarmed. 24 Vehicle Security Alarm The trunk lid will not open when the button: To rearm the system, perform System — If Equipped vehicle security alarm system is the arming procedure again: activated. If the security alarm system detects an 1. Unlocking any door. inappropriate entry into the vehicle, or If the battery becomes drained while the intrusion sensor detects movement the vehicle security alarm system is 2. Opening any door. armed, the siren will activate, and the in the vehicle, which could result in the 3. Opening the engine compartment. vehicle or its contents being stolen, the hazard warning lights will flash during alarm alerts the surrounding area by the battery charging or replacement 4. Placing the ignition in the ON sounding the siren/horn and flashing process. position. the hazard warning lights. How To Arm The System When the doors are locked by pushing The system will not function unless it is Close the windows and the the lock button on the key fob, or using properly armed. Follow the arming convertible top. the emergency key, the hazard warning procedure correctly. lights will flash once to indicate that the Place the ignition in the OFF position. Siren/Horn Triggering Conditions vehicle security alarm system is armed. Make sure the engine compartment, The siren/horn sounds intermittently, Note: and the hazard warning lights flash for convertible top, doors, and trunk lid are about 30 seconds when the system is closed. If any door or trunk lid remains closed for 30 seconds, the doors, and triggered by any one of the following: Push the lock button on the key fob trunk lid automatically re-lock, and the or lock the driver's door from the Unlocking a door with an inside vehicle security alarm system arms outside with the emergency key. The door-lock knob. even if a window opens or the hazard warning lights will flash once. convertible top is left down. Forcing open a door, the engine With The Advanced Keyless Entry compartment, or the trunk lid. function: push a request switch. The To reactivate the intrusion sensor, Opening the hood by operating the warning light in the instrument turn off the armed vehicle security hood release handle. panel flashes twice per second for alarm system and then rearm it. 20 seconds. After 20 seconds the The intrusion sensor is operational Placing the ignition in the ON position system is fully armed. without starting the engine. when the vehicle security alarm system The vehicle security alarm system can is armed. To cancel the intrusion With the intrusion sensor: the also be armed by activating the auto sensor, push the intrusion sensor intrusion sensor detects a movement in re-lock function with all the doors, the cancel button each time the vehicle the vehicle. trunk lid and the engine compartment security alarm system is armed. The system will be triggered again (up closed. to ten times) if one of the above The system will disarm if one of the conditions remains. following operations takes place within 20 seconds after pushing the lock 25 To Turn Off An Armed System DOORS An armed system can be turned off Lock/Unlock With using any one of the following methods: Emergency Key Pushing the unlock button on the key The doors, trunk lid, and fuel door lock fob. automatically when the driver's door is Starting the engine with the keyless locked using the emergency key. ignition START/STOP button. Lock With Emergency Key — Insert With The Advanced Keyless Entry key into driver’s door and turn to the left function: pushing a request switch on (toward front of car). the exterior door handles. 04030107-L21-001AB Unlock With Emergency Key — Interior Door Lock Knob Note: When the doors are unlocked by Insert key into driver’s door and turn to pushing the unlock button on the key the right (toward back of car). 1 — Door Lock Knob Position (Red fob, the hazard warning lights will flash Both Doors unlock when the driver's Indicator Not Seen When Locked) twice to indicate that the system is door is unlocked using the emergency 2 — Door Unlock Knob Position (Red turned off. key. Indicator Seen When Unlocked) To Stop The Alarm Turn the emergency key toward the A triggered alarm can be turned off front to lock, toward the back to unlock. Note: The red indication can be seen using any one of the following methods: when the door lock knob is unlocked. Pushing the unlock button on the key Caution! Operation From Outside

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE fob. To lock the passenger door with the door lock knob from the outside, push Starting the engine with the keyless An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for ignition START/STOP button. the door-lock knob to the lock position thieves. Always remove key fob from the and close the door (holding the door With The Advanced Keyless Entry vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. handle in the open position is not function: pushing a request switch on required). the exterior door handles or the electric Note: When locking the door this way, trunk release while the key fob is being Manual Lock/Unlock be careful not to leave the key fob carried. Knob inside the vehicle. The driver's door The hazard warning lights will flash Operation From Inside lock knob cannot be used while the twice. To lock any door from the inside, push driver's door is open. the door lock knob. To unlock, pull it outward. This does not operate the other door locks. 26 Central Lock/Unlock Double Locking System — If Equipped Warning! The doors, trunk lid, and fuel door lock automatically when the lock rocker The double locking system is designed switch is pushed with both doors to prevent someone who has broken For personal security and safety in the closed. into your vehicle from opening the door event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors from the inside. If you have any before you drive as well as when you park Note: and leave the vehicle. problems with the double locking The doors, trunk lid, and the fuel system, contact an authorized dealer. When leaving the vehicle, always remove filler door cannot be locked while any System Activation the key fob from the vehicle and lock your other door is open. vehicle. If equipped with Advanced Proceed as follows: Keyless Entry, always make sure the Thekeyfobmaynotbeabletobe keyless ignition is in “OFF” position, 1. Close both the windows and the detected by the vehicle keyless-go convertible top. remove the key fob from the vehicle and system if it is located next to a mobile lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of phone, laptop or other electronic 2. Place the ignition in the OFF position vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death. device; these devices may block the and take the key fob with you. key fob’s wireless signal and prevent Never leave children alone in a vehicle, the keyless-go system from starting 3. Close both doors and trunk lid. or with access to an unlocked vehicle. the vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle 4. Insert the emergency key in the unattended is dangerous for a number of driver's door, turn the emergency key to reasons. A child or others could be the lock position (counter seriously or fatally injured. Children should clockwise/left), and return it to the be warned not to touch the parking brake, center position. Then turn it to the lock brake pedal or the gear selector. position (counter clockwise/left) again Do not leave the key fob in or near the within three seconds. vehicle, or in a location accessible to 5. The indicator light illuminates for children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Advanced Keyless about three seconds to indicate that the Entry in the ACC or ON/RUN positions. A system has been activated. child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 04030105-12D-002 Central/Power Door Lock Switch Both unlock when the unlock rocker switch is pushed. Note: The doors, trunk lid, and the fuel filler door cannot be locked while any other door is open. 27 Lock/Unlock With To unlock both doors and fuel filler door, Advanced Keyless Entry push the button on the exterior door Function — If Equipped handle twice within three seconds. Two more beeps will sound. The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door can be locked/unlocked by pushing the Front Passenger Door Request request switch on the exterior door Switch: handle while the key fob is being To unlock both doors and fuel filler door, carried. push the buton on the exterior door handle. A beep swill sound twice; the hazard warning lights will flash twice. 04030102-12A-001 Note: Emergency Key Lock Procedure Confirm that both doors, and fuel The system can be activated by filler door are securely locked. pushing the lock button on the key fob twice within three seconds. For the trunk lid, move it without With The Advanced Keyless pushing the electric trunk lid opener to Function: the system can be activated verify that the trunk lid has not been by pushing the request switch on the left open. exterior door handle twice within three 04000098-121-555 Both doors and the fuel filler door seconds. Request Switch On Exterior Door cannot be locked when any door is Note: The system cannot be activated Handle open. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE when any door is open. To Lock It may require a few seconds for the System Deactivation To lock the doors, trunk lid, and fuel doors to unlock after the request Unlock the driver's door or place the filler door, push the button on the switch on the exterior door handle is ignition in the ON position. If the power exterior door handle; the hazard pushed. supply is interrupted (fuse blows or the warning lights will flash once. The key fob may not be able to be battery is disconnected), the system A beep will sound once. can only be deactivated by unlocking a detected by the vehicle keyless-go door with the emergency key. To Unlock system if it is located next to a mobile Driver's door button is located on the phone, laptop or other electronic exterior door handle. device; these devices may block the To unlock the doors, trunk lid, and fuel key fob’s wireless signal and prevent filler door, push the button on the the keyless-go system from starting exterior door handle; the hazard the vehicle. warning lights will flash twice. 28 A beep sound is heard for confirmation Closing the driver's door. The hazard warning lights will flash when the doors, and fuel filler door are once (even if the driver is in the Opening the trunk lid. locked/unlocked using the request operational range, both doors, trunk lid, switch on the exterior door handle. If Not operating the key fob for ten and fuel filler door are locked you prefer, the beep sound can be seconds. automatically after about 30 seconds). turned off. Pushing any button except the lock If you are out of the operational range The volume of the beep sound can also button on the key fob. before the doors and trunk lid are be changed. Use the following closed or another key fob is left in the procedure to change the setting: Pushing a request switch on the vehicle, the auto-lock function will not exterior door handle. work. 1. Place the ignition in the OFF position and close both of the doors and the With Vehicle Security Alarm System Always make sure that both doors and trunk lid. The hazard warning lights flash when trunk lid are closed and locked before the security alarm system is armed or leaving the vehicle. The auto-lock 2. Open the driver's door. disarmed. Refer to “Vehicle Security function does not close the power windows. 3. Within 30 seconds of opening the Alarm System” found in “Getting To driver's door, push and hold the lock Know Your Vehicle” for further Auto Re-Lock Function button on the key fob for five seconds information. After unlocking with the button on the or longer. The doors, and fuel filler door The setting can be changed so that the exterior door handle, the doors and fuel will lock, an audible beep will activate at doors and the fuel filler door are locked filler door will automatically lock if any of the currently set volume (if the beep automatically without pushing the the following operations are not sound is currently set to not activate, it button on the exterior door handle. performed within about 60 seconds. will not activate). The setting changes Refer to “Personalization Features” If your vehicle has a security alarm each time the lock button on the key section in “Getting To Know Your system, the hazard warning lights will fob is pushed and the beep will activate Instrument Panel” for further flash for confirmation. at the set volume (if the beep sound information. The time required for the doors to lock has been set to not activate, it will not Auto-Lock Function automatically can be changed. Refer to activate). A beep is heard when both doors are “Personalization Features” in “Getting 4. The setting change is completed by closed while the key is carried. Both To Know Your Instrument Panel” for doing any one of the following: doors, the trunk lid, and fuel door are further information. locked automatically after about three Opening a door or the trunk lid. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON seconds when the Advanced Keyless position. Entry key fob is out of the operational Placing the ignition in any position range. other than the OFF position.

29 Locking/Unlocking With A Key Fob Auto Lock/Unlock Auto Lock/Unlock Function Setting The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door Function — If Equipped Change Using Door-Lock Switch (With Door-Lock Switch) can be locked/unlocked by operating When the vehicle speed exceeds the keyless entry system key fob. Refer 12 MPH (20 km/h), the doors, and fuel The doors and fuel filler door can be set to “Key Fob Buttons” in “Keys” for filler door lock automatically. to lock or unlock automatically by further information. selecting any one of the functions from When the ignition is placed in the OFF the following table and using the Locking/Unlocking With Door-Lock position, the doors and fuel filler door door-lock switch on the interior door Switch unlock automatically. Both doors and the fuel filler door lock panel. There are only a total of six auto These functions can also be disabled lock/unlock settings available for automatically when the lock side is so that they do not operate. pushed. They unlock when the unlock automatic transmission vehicles, and side is pushed. three for manual transmission vehicles. Be sure to push the unlock side of the To lock the doors and fuel filler door driver's door-lock switch the correct from an open door, push the lock side number of times according to the of the door lock switch and then close selected function number. If the switch the door. is mistakenly pushed seven times on an Note: When locking the doors this automatic transmission vehicle or four way, be careful not to leave the key fob times on a manual transmission, the inside the vehicle. procedure will be cancelled. If this occurs, start the procedure from the beginning. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

30 Function Number Function (*) 1 The auto door-lock function is disabled. The doors and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH 2 (20 km/h) or more. The doors and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH 3 (20 km/h) or more. The doors, trunk lid, and fuel filler door unlock when the ignition is cycled from the ON to OFF position. Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: when the ignition is placed in the ON position, and the 4 gear selector is shifted from park (P) to any other gear position, the doors,and fuel filler door lock automatically. Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: when the ignition is placed in the ON position, and the gear selector is shifted from PARK (P) to any other gear position, the doors and the fuel filler door 5 lock automatically. When the dear selector is shifted to PARK (P) while the ignition is placed in the ON position, the doors and the fuel filler door unlock automatically. Automatic Transmission Vehicles Only: the doors and the fuel filler door lock automatically when the vehicle speed is about 12 MPH (20 km/h) or more. When the gear selector is shifted to 6 PARK (P) while the ignition is placed in the ON position, the doors and the fuel filler door unlock automatically.

(*) For other settings for the auto door 3. Push and hold the lock side of the 5. Three seconds after the function lock function contact an authorized driver's door-lock switch within setting has been changed, a beep dealer. 20 seconds of placing the ignition in the sound will beep in the amount of the Note: Function number three is the ON position, and make sure a beep is selected function number (example: factory setting for your vehicle. heard about eight seconds afterwards. Function number 3 = three beep sounds). Settings Changing 4. Refer to the auto lock/unlock Settings can be changed using the function setting table. Determine the following procedure: function number for the desired setting. Push the unlock side of the driver's 1. Safely park the vehicle. Both doors door-lock switch the same number of must remain closed. times as the selected function number 2. Place the ignition in the ON position. (example: if you select function 2, push the unlock side of the switch only two times). 31 Automatic Transmission Vehicles Door Unlock (Control) System SEATS With Collision Detection — If The doors cannot be locked or Manual Adjustment unlocked while the setting function is Equipped: this system automatically being performed. unlocks the doors, trunk lid, and the Forward / Rearward The procedure can be cancelled by fuel filler door in the event the vehicle is To move the seat forward or rearward, pushing the lock side of the door-lock involved in an accident to allow pull the adjustment bar. Release the bar switch. passengers to get out of the vehicle once the desired position is reached. immediately and prevent being trapped Using body pressure, move forward Note: inside. While the ignition is placed in and rearward on the seat to be sure the ON position and in the event the The vehicle lock-out prevention that the seat adjusters have latched. vehicle receives an impact strong feature prevents you from locking enough to inflate the air bags, both the yourself out of the vehicle. Both doors, doors, the trunk lid, and fuel filler door trunk lid, and the fuel filler door will are automatically unlocked after about automatically unlock if they are locked six seconds have elapsed from the using the power door locks with any time of the accident. The doors, trunk door open. If both the doors are closed lid, and the fuel filler door may not even though the trunk lid is open, both unlock depending on how an impact is the doors and the fuel filler door will applied, the force of the impact, and lock. other conditions of the accident. If door-related systems or the battery is

malfunctioning, the doors, trunk lid, 03010202-12A-003

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE and the fuel filler door will not unlock. Manual Seat Adjustment When opening a door, the power 1 — Adjustment Bar windows open a little automatically. 2 — Height Dial When closing the door, the power 3 — Recline Lever windows close automatically. This is a function for improving the sealing of the window, and it does not mean Height there is a problem. If the vehicle battery To adjust the height for front edge of is disconnected for vehicle the seat bottom, rotate the dial to the maintenance or other reasons, the desired position. power windows will not open or close automatically. If the power windows do not open or close, the automatic open/close mechanism for the windows must be reset. 32 Seat Recline Heated Seats The temperature of the seat warmer cannot be adjusted beyond High, Mid To recline the seatback, lift up the On some models, the front driver and and Low. recline lever and lean back until the passenger seats may be equipped with desired position has been reached, heaters in both the seat cushions and Once a heat setting is selected, then release the lever. Make sure the seatbacks. The controls for the front heat will be felt within two to five lever returns to its original position and heated seats are located on the center minutes. the seatback is locked in place by instrument panel below the climate attempting to push it forward and controls. rearward. The heated seats have three settings: High, Medium, and Low. Push the Warning! switch once to turn the heated seats on High, twice for Medium, and three times for Low. Pushing the switch a fourth Adjusting a seat while driving may be time will turn the heated seat off. dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could Note: cause a collision and serious injury or death. If the ignition is cycled OFF while the seat warmer is operating (High, 03010203-L12-002 Seats should be adjusted before Mid or Low), and then cycled ON Heated Seat Switches fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death again, the seat warmer will could result from a poorly adjusted seat automatically operate at the belt. temperature set before the ignition was cycled OFF. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer Use the seat warmer when the resting against your chest. In a collision engine is running. Leaving the seat you could slide under the seat belt, which warmer on for long periods with the could result in serious injury or death. engine not running could discharge the battery.

33 NON-ADJUSTABLE Driver And Passenger Head Restraints Warning! HEAD RESTRAINTS The non-adjustable head restraints are Your vehicle is equipped with form fitted into the upper structure of non-adjustable head restraints on the Persons who are unable to feel pain to driver's and passenger's seatbacks. the skin because of advanced age, chronic the seatback, and are designed to illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, reduce the risk of injury by restricting The non-adjustable head restraints medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or head movement in the event of a rear consist of a trimmed foam covering other physical condition must exercise impact. The seatback should be over the upper structure of the care when using the seat heater. It may properly adjusted to an upright position seatbacks and are intended to help cause burns even at low temperatures, where the head restraint is positioned protect occupants from neck injury. especially if used for long periods of time. as close as possible to the back of the Adjust the seatbacks to their upright, Do not place anything on the seat or occupant’s head. on-road positions so that the head seatback that insulates against heat, such restraint is positioned as close as as a blanket or cushion. This may cause Warning! possible to the back of the occupant’s the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a head. seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position. Otherwise, the seat Warning! will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched Caution! seatback could cause serious injury. All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Do not use organic solvents to clean the placed in their proper positions in order to seat. It may damage the seat surface and minimize the risk of neck injury in the event the heater. of a crash. Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.

34 STEERING WHEEL MIRRORS Steering Wheel Warning! Outside Mirrors Adjustment Be sure that all inside and outside To change the angle of the steering Do not adjust the steering column while mirrors are adjusted to the desired wheel: driving. Adjusting the steering column while position prior to driving the vehicle. driving or driving with the steering column Mirror Types: 1. With the gear selector in the PARK unlocked could cause the driver to lose position, pull the lock release lever, control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering Flat Type (Driver Side): flat surface located under the steering column, column is locked before driving your mirror. downward. vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Convex Type (Passenger Side): this 2. Tilt the steering wheel to the desired mirror has a slight curve. position. Note: The passenger side convex 3. Push the lock release lever upward outside mirror will give a much wider to lock the steering column. view toward the rear of the vehicle, and especially of the adjacent lane. 4. Attempt to push the steering wheel The perceived distance of objects in the upward and downward to ensure it is outer and inner regions of the wide locked before driving. angle mirror is different.

Warning!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or 04050101-12A-001 distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger Manual Tilt Adjustment side mirror. 1 — Lock Release Lever

35 Inside Day / Night Mirror

Rear View Mirror Adjustment Before driving, adjust the rear view mirror to center on the view through the rear window.

04060102-MAN-002 04060102-36E-666 Mirror Adjustment Lever Automatic Dimming Mirror Buttons 1 — Mirror Adjustment Lever 1—Off A — Day Driving Position 2—On B — Reduced Glare Position 3 — Light Sensor

04060102-ADJ-001 Automatic Dimming Manual Mirror Adjustment Mirror — If Equipped Caution! Note: Before adjusting the manual The automatic dimming mirror mirror, place the mirror in the “day automatically reduces glare of

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE driving position” (see below). headlights from vehicles at the rear To avoid damage to the mirror during Reducing Glare From Headlights when the ignition is cycled ON. cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution 1. Push the lever forward for day Push the off button ( O ) to cancel the onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror driving (A position). automatic dimming function. The clean. indicator light will turn off. 2. Pull the lever rearward to reduce glare of headlights from vehicles at the rear (B position).

36 Push the off button ( O ) to cancel the Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors automatic dimming function. The The ignition must be in the ACC or ON Manually fold the outside mirror indicator light will turn off. position to adjust the outside power rearward until it is flush with the vehicle. To reactivate the automatic dimming mirrors. function, push the on button ( I ). The Rotate the mirror switch to the left(L) indicator light will illuminate. orright(R)toselect which mirror to adjust. Push the mirror control switch in the direction of the desired position.

04060101-12R-001 Outside Folding Mirror

04060102-121-666 Your vehicle may be equipped with a Light/Rain Sensor driver side automatic-dimming mirror. The automatic-dimming door mirror is 2 — Light Sensor linked with the automatic-dimming 04060101-L12-001 rearview mirror inside the vehicle to Power Mirror Switch Note: automatically reduce headlight glare 0 — Center Position from vehicles at the rear. Refer to Do not use glass cleaner or 1 — Left Position “Automatic Dimming Mirror” in this suspend objects on or around the light 2 — Right Position section for further information. sensor. Otherwise, light sensor Note: The passenger door mirror does sensitivity will be affected and may not not have the automatic-dimming operate normally. After adjusting the mirror, lock the feature. The automatic dimming function is control by rotating the switch to the canceled when the ignition is cycled center position to prevent accidental ON and the gear selector is in movements. REVERSE.

37 Heated Mirrors — If EXTERIOR LIGHTS Equipped Headlights These mirrors are heated to melt frost or Rotate the headlight switch to ice. This feature will be activate/deactivate the headlights, other activated whenever exterior lights and dashboard you push the Rear illumination. Window Defrost button. Refer to When the lights are turned on, the “Climate Control System” for further indicator in the instrument cluster information. illuminates.

05030101-132-001 Headlight Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 1 — Headlight Switch 2 — Fog Light Switch

Note: To prevent discharge of the battery, do not leave the lights on while the engine is OFF.

38 Headlight Operation Without Auto-Light Control

Switch Position OFF Daytime Running Lights High Beams

Ignition Position ON ACC Or OFF ON ACC Or OFF ON ACC Or OFF Headlights Off Off Off Off On Off Daytime Running Lights On Off Off Off Off Off Tail Lights / Position Lights / License Plate Lights / Off Off On On On On Instrument Panel (*) Illumination (*) If the driver's door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.

With Auto-Light Control

Daytime Running Switch Position OFF AUTO High Beams Lights

ACC Or ACC Or ACC Or ACC Or Ignition Position ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Headlights Off Off Auto (*) Off Off Off On Off Daytime Running Lights On Off Auto (*) Off Off Off Off Off Tail Lights / Position Lights / License Plate On (**) / Off Off Auto On On On On (****) Lights / Instrument Panel Illumination Off (***) (*) The headlights and other light settings adjust automatically depending on the surrounding brightness detected by the sensor. (**) While the lights are turned on, they will remain on even if the ignition is cycled to a position other than ON. If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off. (***) When the ignition is cycled to a position other than ON, the lights will not turn on even if the headlight switch is turned to AUTO. (****) If the driver’s door is opened, or 30 seconds have elapsed with the lights turned on, the lights turn off.

39 Daytime Running Lights Automatic Lighting the windshield, be sure the wipers are (DRL) turned off completely when the engine When the headlight switch is in the is running. The daytime running lights turn on AUTO position and the ignition is cycled automatically when the vehicle starts ON, the light sensor will detect the Note: moving. surrounding light levels and automatically turns the headlights, other The headlights, other exterior lights They turn off when the parking brake is and dashboard lights may not turn off engaged or the gear selector is shifted exterior lights and dashboard illumination on or off. immediately even if the surrounding to the PARK position (if equipped with area becomes well-lit because the light automatic transmission). Note: Do not shade the light sensor by sensor determines that it is night time if Note: In some markets, the daytime placing a sticker or a label on the the surrounding area is continuously running lights can be deactivated. Refer windshield. Otherwise the light sensor dark for several minutes such as inside to “Settings” in “Multimedia” for more will not operate correctly. long tunnels, traffic jams inside tunnels, information. or in indoor parking lots. In this case, High Beams the lights turn off if the light switch is turned to the OFF position. The headlights can be switched between high and low beams by When the headlight switch is in the pushing the headlight switch lever AUTO position and the ignition is forward for high beams, and pulling the cycled to ACC or OFF, the headlights, lever rearward to return to low beams. other exterior lights and dashboard illumination will turn off. When the headlight high beams are on,

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the high beam indicator is The dashboard lights can be illuminated in the instrument cluster. adjusted by rotating the knob in the 05030101-12A-003 instrument cluster. The day/night mode Flash To Pass Light Sensor can be changed by rotating the knob You can signal another vehicle with your The light sensor also works as a rain until a beep sound is heard. headlights by partially pulling the sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep The sensitivity of the automatic headlight lever toward the steering hands and scrapers clear of the lightsmaybechangedbyan wheel. This will cause the high beam windshield when the wiper lever is in authorized dealer. headlights to turn on until the lever is the AUTO position and the ignition is released. cycled ON, as fingers could be pinched The high beam indicator in the or the wipers and wiper blades instrument cluster illuminates while the damaged when the wipers activate high beams are active. automatically. If you are going to clean

40 Follow Me Home With Auto-Light Control The Follow Me Home Light System When the fog light switch is in the turns on the headlights (low beams) for position and the headlight switch is a period of time after the ignition is in AUTO position, the front fog lights will cycled OFF. stay on. System Activation Turn Signals With the ignition cycled to ACC or OFF, The ignition must be in the ON position pull the headlight control lever rearward to use the turn signals and lane change and the low beam headlights will turn assist. on. 05030101-132-001 Move the signal lever down (for a left The headlights turn off after a period of Headlight Switch turn) or up (for a right turn). The signal time after all doors are closed. will self-cancel after the turn is The time until the headlights turn off 1 — Headlight Switch completed. 2 — Fog Light Switch after all of the doors are closed can be If the indicator light continues to flash changed through the Connect system. after a turn, manually return the lever to The headlights turn off if the lever is The fog light indicator in the its original position. pulled again while the headlights are on, instrument cluster illuminates while the The turn signal indicators (green) or after three minutes of no further front fog lights are on. in the instrument cluster flash action after the first pull of the lever. Deactivation according to the operation of the turn Front Fog Lights Perform one of the following operations signal lever to show which signal is active. The front fog light can be activated to turn off the front fog lights: Note: If an indicator light stays on when the ignition is in the ON position Rotate the fog light switch to the OFF without flashing or if it flashes and the headlights or parking lights are position. abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs on. Turn the headlight switch to the OFF may be burned out. Activation position. Turn the headlight switch to the or position. Cycle the ignition to a position other than ON. Rotate the fog light switch to the position. The fog light indicator in the instrument cluster goes off when the front fog light is turned off.

41 Lane Change Assist Leaving Home Light Headlamp Leveling System System — If Equipped Move the lever halfway toward the direction of the lane change (until the The Leaving Home Light System turns On some models, the angle of the indicator flashes) and hold it there. It will the headlights on when the unlock headlights will be automatically adjusted return to the off position when released. button on the key fob is pushed while when turning on the headlights. away from the vehicle. Three-Flash Turn Signal Adjusting The Headlight After releasing the turn signal lever, the Activation When Abroad turn signal indicator flashes three times. With the ignition cycled to OFF, and the Dipped headlights are adjusted for The operation can be cancelled by headlight switch is in the or position, the headlights will driving in the country where the vehicle moving the lever in the direction was originally purchased. opposite to which it was operated. illuminate when the unlock button on When travelling in countries with The three-flash turn signal function can the key fob is pushed, and the vehicle receives the signal. opposite driving direction, to avoid be turned on or off using the flashing the drivers on the other side of personalization function in the radio. The headlights turn off after 30 seconds. the road, you need to cover areas of Adaptive Front Lighting the headlight. For this operation contact The following lights turn on when the System (AFS) — If an authorized dealer. Leaving Home Light System is Equipped operated: low beams/parking lights/tail This system directs the main headlight lights/license plate lights. beams and adapts it to the driving Operation of the Leaving Home Light conditions around bends and turns, System can be turned on or off through GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE continuously and automatically. the Connect system. The system directs the headlight beam to illuminate the road in the best way, When the lock button on the key fob taking into account the speed of the is pushed, and the vehicle receives the vehicle, the bend or corner angle and signal, the headlights turn off. the speed of steering. When the headlight switch is in a The Adaptive Front Lighting System is position other than or ,the automatically activated when the headlights turn off. vehicle is started.

42 WINDSHIELD OFF: stop the wipers may move automatically in the following cases: WIPERS / WASHER AUTO: auto control operation If the windshield above the rain Windshield Wipers And — or LO: low speed operation Washer sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth. = or HI: high speed operation The windshield wiper/washer lever is If the windshield is struck with a hand located on the right side of the steering Adjusting Rain Sensor Sensitivity or other object from either outside or wheel. The ignition must be cycled ON The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be inside the vehicle. before using these features. adjusted by rotating the switch on the wiper lever. Windshield Wipers From the center position (normal), Warning! Activate the windshield wipers by rotate the switch downward for higher pushing the wiper lever up or down. sensitivity (+) (faster response) or rotate With Intermittent Wiper it upward for less sensitivity (-) (slower Keep hands and scrapers clear of the response). windshield when the wiper lever is in the Set the lever to the intermittent position AUTO position and the ignition is cycled and choose the interval timing by ON, as fingers could be pinched or the rotating the center switch. wipers and wiper blades damaged when Switch positions: the wipers activate automatically. or MIST: operation while pushing the lever upward If you are going to clean the windshield, be sure the wipers are turned off. This OFF: stop is important when clearing ice and --- or INT: intermittent operation snow. Turning the auto-wiper lever from the — or LO: low speed operation OFF to the AUTO position while driving = or HI: high speed operation 05030101-122-001 activates the windshield wipers once, Windshield Wiper Lever after which they operate according to With Auto-Wiper Control 1 — Rain Sensor Adjustment the rainfall amount. When the wiper lever is in the AUTO The auto-wiper control may not operate position, the rain sensor will sense the when the rain sensor temperature is amount of rainfall on the windshield and Note: Do not shade the rain sensor by about 14 °F (–10 °C) or lower, or about turns the wipers on or off automatically placing a sticker or a label on the 185 °F (85 °C) or higher. (off/intermittent/low speed/high speed). windshield. Otherwise the rain sensor If the windshield is coated with water Switch positions: will not operate correctly. repellent, the rain sensor may not be or MIST: operation while When the wiper lever is in the AUTO able to sense the amount of rainfall pulling up lever position and the ignition is cycled ON, 43 correctly and auto-wiper control may automatically stop operation of the If the fluid level is normal and the not operate properly. blades, but only for about five minutes. washer does not work, contact an If dirt or debris (such as ice or debris If this happens, turn off the wiper switch authorized dealer. containing salt water) adheres to the and park off the road and remove the windshield above the rain sensor or if snow and ice. After five minutes, turn the windshield is iced, it could cause on the switch and the blades should the wipers to move automatically. operate normally. If they do not resume However, if the wipers cannot remove functioning, contact an authorized this ice, dirt or debris, the auto-wiper dealer as soon as possible. Pull off to control will stop operation. In this case, the side of the road to a safe location. set the wiper lever to the low speed Wait until the weather clears before position or high speed position for trying to drive with the wipers manual operation, or remove the ice, inoperative. dirt or debris by hand to restore the Windshield Washer auto-wiper operation. 04110109-115-001 Pull the wiper/washer lever rearward Windshield Washer Nozzles If the auto-wiper lever is left in the and hold it to spray washer fluid onto With Headlight Washers AUTO position, the wipers could the windshield. operate automatically from the effect of When the headlights are on, the strong light sources, electromagnetic With the wiper lever in the OFF, headlight washers operate waves, or infrared light because the rain intermittent, or AUTO position, the automatically once every fifth time the sensor uses an optical sensor. wipers will operate continuously until windshield washer operates. the lever is released. It is recommended that the auto-wiper GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE lever be turned to the OFF position other than when driving the vehicle Warning! under rainy conditions. The auto-wiper control functions can be turned off. Sudden loss of visibility through the Because heavy ice and snow can jam windshield could lead to a collision. You the wiper blades, the wiper motor is might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the protected from motor breakdown, windshield during freezing weather, warm overheating and possible fire by a the windshield with defroster before and circuit breaker. This mechanism will during windshield washer use.

44 CLIMATE CONTROL Have the air conditioner checked before the weather gets hot. A lack of SYSTEM Caution! refrigerant may make the air conditioner Operating Tips less efficient. The refrigerant The air conditioning system will only specifications are indicated on a label (A The system uses a coolant that is operate with the engine running. or B depending on the market) compatible with the laws in force in the To prevent the battery from being attached to the inside of the engine countries where the vehicle is sold, R134a or R1234yf (indicated on a specific plate in discharged while the engine is off, do compartment. Check the label before refilling the refrigerant. If the wrong type the engine compartment). The use of other not leave the Blower Control Knob on coolants affects the efficiency and for extended periods of time. of refrigerant is used, it could result in a serious malfunction of the air condition of the system. Also the To improve system efficiency, clear all compressor coolants used must be conditioner. For details, contact an compatible with the indicated coolant. obstructions (leaves, snow and ice) authorized dealer. from the hood and the air inlet in the grille. Vent Operation Use the air conditioning system to Adjusting The Vents defog the windows and dehumidify the air. To adjust the direction of air flow, move the vent adjustment knob. Recirculation mode should be used when driving through tunnels, while in a Note: When using the air conditioner in traffic jam, or when you would like to humid conditions, fog may blow from quickly cool the interior. the vents. This is a result of humid air being suddenly cooled and does not Use the outside air position for indicate a system malfunction. ventilation or windshield defrosting. 06010100121001 Center Vents (Driver) and Side If the vehicle has been parked in direct Label Location sunlight during hot weather, open the Vents windows to let warm air escape, and Center and side vents are located on then run the air conditioning system. the dashboard. To keep the internal parts lubricated Air vent open/close: the air vents can and the system running smoothly, run be fully opened and closed by using the air conditioner about ten minutes at knob1(A=open/B=close). least once a month. Air flow direction adjustment:use knob 1 to adjust the center vents to the desired position.

45 Center Vents (Front Passenger) Center vents are located on the dashboard. Air vent open/close: use the Center Vent tab 1 to open/close the center vents(A=open/B=close). Air flow direction adjustment: use the Center Vent tab 1 to adjust the center vents to the desired position. 06010201-033-001 06010201-121-777 Side Air Vents Operating The Central Air Vent 1 — Center Vent Tab A — Open Position B — Closed Position

06010201-121-001 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Central Air Vent

06010201-033-666 Operating the Side Air Vents 1 — Air Vent Knob A — Open Position B — Closed Position

46 Airflow Mode

06010202-121-002 Airflow Locations 1 — Fixed Upper Air Diffuser 2 — Adjustable Side Air Vents 3 — Adjustable Center Air Vent 4 — Floor Vents

47 Manual Climate Control System With MAX A/C function GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

06010300-122-002 Manual Climate Controls With MAX A/C 1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button 2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button 3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

48 Controls flow from the floor vents is less than Note: that of the position. 1 – Temperature Control Knob Before opening the convertible top, This dial controls the interior 4 – Rear Window Defrost Button make sure the Rear Window Defrost temperature of the vehicle. The Rear Window Defrost Button clears Button is turned off. Otherwise, the Turn it clockwise for hotter fog and frost from the rear window. The heat generated from the defroster temperatures and counterclockwise for ignition must be on to use the defroster. could damage the convertible top and colder temperatures. Push the button to turn on the Rear the internal material. MAX A/C – If Equipped: When the Window Defroster. The Rear Window This defroster is not designed for Mode Selector Knob is set to or , Defroster operates for about melting snow. If there is an the Blower Control Knob is in a position 15 minutes and then turns off accumulation of snow on the rear other than 0, and the temperature automatically. The button LED will window, remove it before using the control knob is in the maximum cold illuminate when the defroster is defroster. position, the Recirculation Button will operating. activate and the A/C will turn on To turn off the Rear Window Defroster automatically. If A/C is not desired, before the end of 15 minutes, push the Mirror Defroster — If Equipped:To press the A/C Button to turn it off. button again. turn on the mirror defroster, turn the ignition ON and push the Rear Window 2 – Blower Control Knob Defroster Button. Caution! The blower has seven speeds. Turn the 5 – Air Recirculation Button knob clockwise to increase blower speed or counterclockwise to decrease Push the Air Recirculation Button to Failure to follow these cautions can cause blower speed. select between outside air and damage to the heating elements: recirculated air positions. 3 – Mode Selector Knob Use care when washing the inside of the Recirculated Air Position: (LED on) Turn the Mode Selector Knob to select rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the Outside air is shut off when this position the air flow mode. window. Use a soft cloth and a mild has been activated. Use this position The mode selector dial can be set at washing solution, wiping parallel to the when going through tunnels, driving in the intermediate positions (●) between heating elements. Labels can be peeled off congested traffic (high engine exhaust each mode. after soaking with warm water. areas), or when quick cooling of the vehicle is desired. Set the knob to an intermediate Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, position if you want to split the air flow or abrasive window cleaners on the interior Outside Air Position: (LED off) between the two modes. surface of the window. Outside air is allowed to enter the For example, when the Mode Selector cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or Keep all objects a safe distance from the windshield defrosting. Knob is at the intermediate position (●) window. between the and positions, air 49 Note: Do not use the Outside Air If the windshield fogs up easily, set the Note: Position in cold or rainy weather is Mode Selector Knob to the position. If the air conditioner is used while dangerous as it will cause the windows If cooler air is desired at face level, set driving up large hills or in heavy traffic, to fog up. Your vision will be hampered, the Mode Selector Knob to the monitor the Engine Coolant which could lead to a serious accident. position and adjust the Temperature Temperature Warning Light to see if it 6 – A/C Button Control Knob to maintain comfort. is illuminated or flashing. The air Push the A/C Button to turn on the air The floor vents will blow warmer air conditioner may cause engine conditioner. while the side air vents will blow cooler overheating in these situations. If the air (except when the temperature The LED on the switch will illuminate warning light is illuminated or flashing, control dial is set at the maximum hot when the Blower Control Knob is in any turn the air conditioning off or cold position). position except the OFF position. immediately. Push the button again to turn off the air Cooling (With Air When maximum cooling is desired, conditioner. Conditioner) set the Temperature Control Knob to Note: The air conditioner may not Proceed as follows: the extreme cold position, push the Air function when the outside temperature Recirculation Button to activate the approaches 32 °F (0 °C). 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the recirculated air position, and then turn position. the fan control dial fully clockwise. Heating 2. Set the Temperature Control Knob If warmer air is desired at floor level, Proceed as follows: to the cold position. set the Mode Selector Knob to the 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the position, and adjust the 3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the Temperature Control Knob to maintain

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE position. desired speed. comfort. 2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to 4. Turn on the air conditioner by The floor vents will blow warmer air the outside air position. pushing the A/C Button. while the side air vents will blow cooler 3. Set the Temperature Control Dial to 5. After cooling begins, adjust the air (except when the temperature the hot position. Blower Control Knob and Temperature control dial is set at the maximum hot or cold position). 4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the Control Knob as needed to maintain desired speed. comfort. 5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn on the air conditioner.

50 Ventilation Dehumidifying (With Air Conditioner) Proceed as follows: Warning! Operate the air conditioner in cool or 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the cold weather to help defog the position. Set the temperature control to the hot or windshield and side windows. warm position when defogging (Front 2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to Defrost position). Using the Front Defrost Proceed as follows: the outside air position. position with the temperature control set to 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the the cold position is dangerous as it will 3. Set the Temperature Control Knob cause the outside of the windshield to fog desired position. to the desired position. up. Your vision will be hampered, which 2. Set the Air Recirculation Knob to the 4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the could lead to a serious accident. outside air position. desired speed. Note: 3. Set the Temperature Control Knob Windshield Defrosting to the desired position. And Defogging For maximum defrosting, turn on the air conditioner, set the Temperature 4. Set the Blower Control Knob to the Proceed as follows: Control Knob to the extreme hot desired speed. 1. Set the Mode Selector Knob to the position, and turn the Blower Control 5. Turn on the air conditioner by Front Defrost position. Knob fully clockwise. pressing the A/C Button. 2. Set the Temperature Control Knob to If warm air is desired from the floor the desired position. Note: One of the functions of the air vents, set the Mode Selector Knob to conditioner is dehumidifying the air. To 3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the the position. use this function, the temperature does desired speed. If equipped with MAX A/C, the not have to be set to cold. Set the 4. If dehumidified heating is desired, Recirculation Button can be set to the Temperature Control Knob to the turn on the air conditioner. Recirculated Air position, when the desired position (hot or cold), and turn Blower Control Knob is ON, and the on the air conditioner to dehumidify the Mode Selector Knob is set to the Front cabin air. Defrost position.

51 Automatic Climate Control System

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 06010900-122-999 Automatic Climate Controls — Type A 1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button 2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button 3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

52 06010900122 Automatic Climate Controls — Type B 1 — Temperature Control Knob 4 — Rear Window Defrost Button 2 — Blower Control Knob 5 — Air Recirculation Button 3 — Mode Selector Knob 6 — A/C Button

53 Controls Note: 1 – Temperature Control Knob With the air flow mode set to the Caution! This knob controls internal temperature position, and the Temperature of the vehicle. Turn it clockwise for Control Knob is set to a medium temperature, the floor vents will blow Failure to follow these cautions can cause hotter temperatures and damage to the heating elements: counterclockwise for colder warmer air, and the center and side air vents will blow cooler air. Before opening the convertible top, temperatures. make sure the Rear Window Defrost 2 – Blower Control Knob When the Blower Control Knob is Button is turned OFF. Otherwise, the heat generated from the defroster could The fan has seven speeds. Turn the on, and the Mode Selector Knob is in the position, the air conditioner is damage the convertible top and the clockwise to increase blower speed or internal material. counterclockwise to decrease blower automatically turned on, and the Air speed/enter Auto mode. Recirculation Button is automatically Use care when washing the inside of the set to the outside air position for rear window. Do not use abrasive window AUTO Position: The blower speed is windshield defrosting. cleaners on the interior surface of the automatically controlled by the system window. Use a soft cloth and a mild based upon the set temperature. 4 – Rear Window Defrost Button washing solution, wiping parallel to the 0 Position: To turn off the system, set The Rear Window Defroster clears fog heating elements. Labels can be peeled off the dial to 0 position. and frost from the rear window. The after soaking with warm water. 3 – Mode Selector Knob ignition must be switched ON to use Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, the defroster. or abrasive window cleaners on the interior Turn the Mode Selector Knob to select surface of the window. the air flow mode. Push the button to turn on the Rear

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Window Defroster. AUTO Position: The air flow Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. automatically adjusts based upon the The Rear Window Defroster operates selected temperature. for about 15 minutes, and then turns off automatically. Note: This defroster is not designed for The button LED will illuminate when the melting snow. If there is an defroster is operating. accumulation of snow on the rear To turn off the Rear Window Defroster window, remove it before using the before the end of 15 minutes, push the defroster. switch again.

54 Mirror Defroster — If Equipped:To Note: The air conditioner may not For an optimal cabin temperature, set turn on the mirror defroster, switch the function when the outside temperature the temperature close to 77º F (25º C). ignition on and push the Rear Window approaches 32 °F(0°C). Adjust to the desired temperature if Defroster Button. necessary. Operation Of Automatic 5 – Air Recirculation Button Air Conditioning Windshield Defrosting And Defogging Press the Air Recirculation Button to Proceed as follows: select between outside air and Set the mode selector knob to the recirculated air positions. 1. Set the mode selector knob to the position and turn the blower control Recirculated Air Position: (LED On) AUTO position. knob to the desired speed. Outside air is shut off when this position 2. Set the Air Recirculation Button to In this position, the outside air position has been activated. Use this position the outside air position (indicator light is automatically selected, and when the when going through tunnels, driving in turned off). blower control knob is on, the air congested traffic (high engine exhaust conditioner automatically turns on. The areas), or when quick cooling of the Note: If the recirculated air position is air conditioner will directly dehumidify vehicle is desired. used for long periods in cold weather or the air to the front windshield and side Outside Air Position: (LED Off) high humidity, the windshield may fog windows. Air flow amount will be Outside air is allowed to enter the up more easily. increased. cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or 3. Set the Blower Control Knob to the Use the temperature control knob to windshield defrosting. AUTO position. increase the air flow temperature and Note: Do not use the Recirculated Air defog the windshield more quickly. Position in cold or rainy weather. Using 4. Push the A/C button to operate the the Recirculated Air Position in cold or air conditioning (indicator light on). rainy weather is dangerous as it will 5. Set the Temperature Control Knob Warning! cause the windows to fog up. Your to the desired position. vision will be hampered, which could lead to a serious accident. 6. To turn off the system, set the Set the temperature control to the hot or blower control knob to the 0 position. warm position when defogging (Front 6 – A/C Button Defrost position). Using the Front Defrost Push the A/C Button to turn on the air Setting the temperature to maximum position with the temperature control set to conditioner. hot or cold will not provide the desired the cold position is dangerous as it will temperature at a faster rate. cause the outside of the windshield to fog The LED on the switch will illuminate When selecting heat, the system will up. Your vision will be hampered, which when the Blower Control Knob is in any could lead to a serious accident. position except the off position. restrict air flow until it has warmed to prevent cold air from blowing out of the Push the button again to turn off the air vents. conditioner. 55 Sunlight/Temperature POWER WINDOWS Sensor Power Window Controls The air conditioning system measures inside and outside temperatures, and sunlight. The ignition must be placed in the ON position for the power windows to It then sets temperatures inside the operate. cabin accordingly. A power window may no longer open/close if you continue to push the switch after opening/closing the power

06010904-121-002 window. Interior Sensor If the power window does not open/close, wait a moment and then 2 — Interior Temperature Sensor operate the switch again. Note: To prevent burning out the fuse Note: Do not obstruct either sensor. and damaging the power window Otherwise, the air-conditioning system system, do not open or close both will not operate properly. windows at once. 06010904333003 The passenger window can be Exterior Sensor operated with each door switch when 1 — Sunlight Sensor the power window lock switch on the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE driver's door is in the unlocked position. Passenger Control Switches The passenger window can also be operated using the master control switches on the driver's door.

56 Auto-Opening Power Windows 5. Pull up the switch to fully close the To fully open the window automatically window and continue holding the push the switch completely down. To switch for about two seconds after the stop the window partway pull or push window fully closed. the switch in the opposite direction and 6. Repeat steps four and five for the then release it. The power window passenger power window while seated cannot be fully closed while the door is in the passenger seat. open. Power Window System Initialization 7. Make sure that the power windows Procedure operate correctly using the door switches. 04070103-LN2-002 If the battery was disconnected during Power Window Switches vehicle maintenance, or for other After the system has been re-initialized, 1 — Driver's Window reasons (such as a switch continues to passenger window can be fully opened 2 — Passenger's Window be operated after the window is automatically using the master control open/closed), the window will not fully switches. If the automatic power open automatically. window operation does not operate Resetting of the automatic function can normally while the doors or convertible be performed using the master control top are opened/closed, reset it using switches or each passenger door the above procedures. switch. Engine-Off Power Window The power window auto function reset Operation procedure can be done on both door The power window can be operated for switches. The power window auto about 40 seconds after the ignition has function will only resume on the power been cycled from ON to the OFF window that has been reset: position with both doors closed. If any door is opened, the power window will 1. Close the doors and the convertible stop operating. top. 04070103-L12-001 For engine-off operation of the power Power Window Switch Function 2. Place the ignition in the ON position. window, the switch must be held up firmly throughout window closure 1 — Closing-Lightly Pull The Switch Up 3. Make sure that the power window because the auto-closing function will 2 — Opening-Lightly Hold The Switch lock switch located on the driver's door be inoperable. Down is not depressed. 4. Push the switch and fully open the window. 57 HOMELINK — IF Warning! EQUIPPED General Information Never leave children unattended in a The HomeLink system replaces up to vehicle, and do not let children play with three hand-held transmitters with a power windows. Do not leave the key fob single built-in component in the in or near the vehicle, or in a location auto-dimming mirror. Pushing the accessible to children, and do not leave the HomeLink button on the auto-dimming ignition of a vehicle equipped with the Keyless Entry System in the ACC or mirror activates garage doors, gates ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly 04070104-L12-001 and other devices surrounding your unattended children, can become Power Window Lockout Switch home. entrapped by the windows while operating 1 — Locked Position Note: HomeLink and HomeLink house the power window switches. Such icon are registered trademarks of 2 — Unlocked Position entrapment may result in serious injury or Gentex Corporation. death. FCC Rules and with Industry Canada Note: When the power window lock license-exempt RSS standard(s). Power Window Lock switch is in the locked position, the light Operation is subject to the following Switch on the passenger power window switch two conditions: This feature prevents the passengers turns off. The light may be difficult to 1. This device may not cause harmful power window from operating. Keep see depending on the surrounding brightness. interference, and

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE this switch in the locked position while children are in the vehicle. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including 1. Locked Position (Button interference that may cause undesired Pushed): only the driver's power operation. window can be operated. Note: Changes or modifications not 2. Unlocked Position (Button Not expressly approved by the party Pushed): both power windows on responsible for compliance could void each door can be operated. the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

58 Proceed as follows: Warning! 1. Verify that there is a remote control transmitter available for the device you would like to program. Vehicle exhaust contains carbon 2. Disconnect the power to the device. monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while Programming The programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas System can cause serious injury or death. Note: When programming a garage Your motorized door or gate will open door opener or a gate, disconnect the and close while you are programming the power to these devices before universal transceiver. Do not program the 04060102-121-999 programming. Continuous operation of HomeLink Buttons transceiver if people, pets or other objects the devices could damage the motor. are in the path of the door or gate. Only 1 — First HomeLink Button use this transceiver with a garage door The HomeLink system provides three 2 — Second HomeLink Button opener that has a “stop and reverse” buttons which can be individually feature as required by Federal safety selected and programmed using the 3 — Third HomeLink Button standards. This includes most garage door transmitters for current, on-market opener models manufactured after 1982. devices as follows: Do not use a garage door opener without 4. After the HomeLink indicator light these safety features. Call toll-free 1. Disconnect power to the device changes from a slow to a rapidly 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at being programmed. blinking light, release both the HomeLink.com for safety information or 2. Position the end of your handheld HomeLink and hand-held transmitter assistance. transmitter one to three inches (2.5 - buttons. 7.5 cm) away from the HomeLink 5. Connect power to the device being Pre-Programming The button you wish to program while programmed. System keeping the indicator light in view. 6. Firmly press and hold the Note: It is recommended that a new 3. Simultaneously press and hold both programmed HomeLink button for five battery be placed in the hand-held the chosen HomeLink and hand-held seconds, and then release it. Perform transmitter of the device being transmitter buttons. Do not release this operation two times to activate the programmed to HomeLink for quicker the buttons until step four has been door or gate. If the door or gate does training and accurate transmission of completed. not activate, press and hold the the radio-frequency signal. just-trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your

59 device should activate when the Note: To program the remaining two accepted by HomeLink (the indicator HomeLink button is pressed and HomeLink buttons, begin with step light will flash slowly and then rapidly). released. one. 2. Proceed with the “Programming” Note: To program the remaining two For questions or comments, please steps to complete. HomeLink buttons, begin with step contact HomeLink at Operating The System one. www.homelink.com or 7. If the indicator light blinks rapidly for 1-800-355-3515. Push the programmed HomeLink button to operate a programmed two seconds and then turns to a Gate Operator/Canadian device. constant light, continue with Programming “Programming” steps (see below) to The code will continue being complete the programming of a rolling Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitted for a maximum of code equipped device (most commonly transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) 20 seconds. a garage door opener). after several seconds of transmission - which may not be long enough for Reprogramming The 8. At the garage door opener receiver System (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate HomeLink to pick up the signal during the “learn” or “smart” button. This can programming. To program a device to HomeLink using usually be found where the hanging Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. a HomeLink button previously trained, antenna wire is attached to the gate operators are designed to follow these steps: motorhead unit. “time-out” in the same manner. 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink 9. Press and release the “learn” or If you live in Canada or you are having button. DO NOT release the button; “smart” button (the name and color of difficulties programming a gate operator 2. The indicator light will begin to flash the button may vary by manufacturer). by using the “Programming” after 20 seconds. Without releasing the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Note: Complete the programming procedures (regardless of where you HomeLink button, proceed with within 30 seconds. live), replace “Programming The “Programming The System” step one. System” step three with the following: 10. Return to the vehicle and firmly Erasing Programmed Note: If programming a garage door press, hold for two seconds and HomeLink Buttons release the programmed HomeLink opener or gate operator, it is advised to button. Repeat the “ press/hold/ unplug the device during the “cycling” To erase the existing programming from release” sequence a second time, and, process to prevent possible all three operating channels, push and depending on the brand of the garage overheating. hold the two outside buttons 1 and door opener (or other rolling code 1. Continue to press and hold the 3 on the auto-dimming mirror until the equipped device), repeat this sequence HomeLink button while you press and HomeLink indicator light begins to flash a third time to complete the release - every two seconds (“cycle”) after approximately ten seconds. programming process. HomeLink your hand-held transmitter until the Verify that the programming has been should now activate your rolling code frequency signal has successfully been erased when you resell the vehicle. equipped device. 60 INTERNAL Insert the emergency key in the lock EQUIPMENT and turn it clockwise to lock, counter clockwise to unlock. Storage Compartments Note: When using the rear console Center Console cup holders, remove any cups before The center console is located between opening the seat side compartment. If the driver’s and passenger’s seats. the seat side compartment is opened with a cup present, the lid will hit the cups and may cause the contents to Warning! spill. 06040706-12A-001 Back Trim Storage Compartment Center Console Lid Keep storage compartments closed when Small items can be stored in the back driving. Driving with the storage Seat Side Compartment trim storage compartment which is compartments open is dangerous. To The seat side compartment is located located behind the seats. reduce the possibility of injury in an between the seats above the accident or a sudden stop, keep the cupholders. storage compartments closed when driving.

Caution!

Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in the storage compartments while parked under the sun. A lighter could explode or the plastic material in eyeglasses could deform and crack from high temperature.

06040717-121-001 Seat Side Compartment 1 — Release Handle 2 — Key Hole

To open, push the release handle down to open the seat side compartment. 06040718-12A-002 Back Trim Storage Compartment 61 To use the back trim storage compartment, slide the seat all the way forward and fold the seat back forward, then open the compartment. When finished, close the compartment and return the seat to its original position and secure it. After returning the seat to its original position, make sure the seat is secured by attempting to lightly move it forward

and rearward. 06040200-12A-002 Overhead Light Switch Caution! 1—On 2 — Door Do not forcefully push objects into the rear 3—Off storage compartment. Otherwise, the box could be damaged. Light switch positions: On : Light is on at all times. Sun Visors 06040100-L12-001AB Door : Light is on when any door is The sun visors are located at the sides Sun Visor open. Light is on or off when the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE of the interior rear view mirror. They can illuminated entry system is on. be adjusted forward toward the Vanity Mirrors windshield, and sideways toward the To access the vanity mirror, fold the sun Off : Light is off at all times. side windows, to block sunlight. visor down and lift the cover toward the seats. Trunk Light The trunk light comes on when the lid is Interior Lights open and turns off when closed. Overhead Light The interior light is located in the headliner in between the sun visors. The interior light can be set to three different positions.

62 The overhead light turns on for about In addition, if the following operations 15 seconds when the ignition is cycled are performed after turning the interior OFF with the overhead light switch in lights off, they will turn on again if: the door position. The ignition is cycled to a position The overhead light turns off immediately other than OFF. in the following cases: A door is opened. The ignition is cycled ON and both doors are closed. A door is unlocked. The driver's door is locked. The operation of the illuminated entry system can be changed through the 06040200-T12-003 Battery Saver Connect system. Trunk Light Location If any door is left open with the Accessory Socket 1 — Trunk Light Switch overhead light switch in the door position or the trunk lid is left open, the The accessory socket is located deep overhead light or trunk light turns off in the back of the footwell on the Note: To prevent the battery from after about 30 minutes to prevent passenger side. being discharged, do not leave the discharge of the battery. trunk open for a long period when the engine is not running. To prevent discharge of the battery, if the interior lights remain on (the interior Illuminated Entry System light switch is in the on position), they The overhead light turns on when any will turn off automatically under the of the following operations occurs with following conditions: the overhead light switch in the door No operations are done for about position and the ignition is OFF: 30 minutes after the ignition is cycled Turns on for about 30 seconds when OFF. the driver's door is unlocked. The button on the key fob is 06040400-L12-002 Turns on for about 15 seconds when pushed, or the request switch located Accessory Socket a door is opened while a key fob is left on the exterior door handle is pushed to in the vehicle and then the door is lock the doors (vehicles with the Only use genuine FCA accessories or closed. advanced keyless function) after the the equivalent requiring no greater than ignition is cycled OFF. 12V (120 W, 10A). Turns on for about five seconds The ignition must be placed in ACC or when a door is opened from the outside ON. with a key fob being carried and then the door is closed. 63 To prevent accessory socket damage Note: To prevent discharging of the or electrical failure, pay attention to the battery, do not use the socket for long following: periods with the engine off or idling. Do not use accessories that require more than 12V (120 W, 10A). Warning! Do not use accessories that are not genuine FCA accessories or the equivalent. To avoid serious injury or death: Only devices designed for use in this Close the cover when the accessory type of outlet should be inserted into any

socket is not in use to prevent foreign 12 Volt outlet. 06040500L21002 objects and liquids from getting into the Do not touch with wet hands. Cupholders accessory socket. Close the lid when not in use and while 1 — Front Cup Holder Correctly insert the plug into the driving the vehicle. 2 — Rear Cup Holder (If Equipped) accessory socket. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause Do not insert the cigarette lighter into an electric shock and failure. the accessory socket. Warning! Noise may occur on the audio Cupholders — If playback depending on the device Equipped connected to the accessory socket. Never use a cup holder to hold hot liquids Cupholders are available and can be while the vehicle is moving. Using a cup GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Depending on the device connected inserted in the center console on the holder to hold hot liquids while the vehicle to the accessory socket, the vehicle's passenger side and the rear area of the is moving is dangerous. If the contents electrical system may be affected, center console. spill, you could be burned. which could cause the warning light to illuminate. Disconnect the connected device and make sure that the problem is resolved. If the problem is resolved, disconnect the device from the socket and switch the ignition off. If the problem is not resolved, contact an authorized dealer.

64 Installing Cupholders Caution! When installing a cupholder, insert it firmly into the installation hole and make sure that it is secured in place. Do not place plastic bottles without caps in the cup holders. Otherwise, the contents may spill while the vehicle is being driven. Do not place excessive weight on the cup holders such as by resting your hands or elbows on them. Otherwise, the cup 06040500-L25-002 holders could be damaged. Correct Cupholder Placement If a passenger is present, install the front The rear cupholder is designed for use cup holder to the rear console. Otherwise, on the rear console and cannot be a knee might hit it and cause the contents to spill. installed to the front side.

Removing Cup Holders Use both hands when removing the cup holder.

06040500-J12AEC2-001 Installing Cupholders 06040500-L26-001 The front cupholder can be removed Incorrect Cupholder Placement and installed to the rear console.

06040500-J12AEC1-001 Removing Cupholders

65 Windblocker TRUNK LID Using The Remote Release Button — If Equipped This windblocker reduces rear wind Opening coming into the cabin when driving with the convertible top down. Warning!

Before opening the trunk lid, remove any snow and ice accumulation on it. Otherwise, the trunk lid could close under the weight of the snow and ice resulting in injury. Be careful when opening/closing the

trunk lid during strong winds. If a strong 04030201-R12-001 gust blows against the trunk lid, it could Interior Trunk Lid Release Button close suddenly resulting in injury. 06041000-12A-003 The remote release button function can Windblocker Fully open the trunk lid and make sure be disabled by locking the doors using that it stays open. If the trunk lid is only the key fob, emergency key, or a opened partially, it could slam shut by vibration or wind gusts resulting in injury. request switch on the exterior door handle to prevent an intruder in the When loading or unloading luggage in vehicle from opening the trunk lid. the trunk, turn off the engine. Otherwise, you could get burned by the heat of the To enable the remote release button GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE exhaust gas. operation, unlock the doors by using the key fob, emergency key, request switch on the exterior door handle, or place the ignition in the ON position. Note: The remote release button cannot be disabled by locking the doors using the door-lock switch/door-lock knob.

66 Using The Electric Trunk Lid The trunk lid can be closed when the Opener doors are locked with the key fob left in With the remote release button, the the vehicle. However, to prevent locking trunk lid can also be opened while the the key fob in the vehicle, the trunk lid key fob is being carried. can be opened by pushing the electric Push the electric trunk lid button and trunk lid opener. If the trunk lid cannot raise the trunk lid when the latch be opened despite doing this releases. procedure, push the electric trunk lid opener to fully open the trunk lid after pushing the trunk lid completely closed. If the vehicle battery is discharged or 08080100-125-002 there is a malfunction in the electrical Remove Windblocker system and the trunk lid cannot be unlocked, the trunk lid can be opened 2. Remove the fasteners on the right by performing the emergency side of the vehicle. procedure. When Trunk Lid Cannot Be Opened

04030201-12A-001 If the battery is discharged, the trunk lid Electric Trunk Release Button cannot be unlocked and opened. Without the remote release button, If the trunk lid cannot be unlocked even unlock the doors and trunk lid, then if the discharged battery situation has push the electric trunk lid opener and been resolved, the electrical system raise it when the latch releases. may have a malfunction.

With The Advanced Keyless Entry Proceed as follows: 08080100-121-004 Function 1. Close the convertible top and Remove Fasteners A locked trunk lid can also be opened remove the windblocker. 3. Partially peel back the cover on the while the key fob is being carried. When right side of the vehicle. opening the trunk lid with the doors locked, it may require a few seconds for the trunk lid latch to release after the electric trunk lid opener is pushed.

67 TRUNK EMERGENCY Trunk Safety Warning RELEASE As a security measure, a emergency Warning! release lever is built into the rear tail panel of the trunk. In the event of an Do not allow children to have access to the adult or child being locked inside the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from trunk, the trunk can be simply opened outside, or through the inside of the by pulling down the lever and open the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when trunk lid. After performing this your vehicle is unattended. Once in the emergency measure, contact an trunk, young children may not be able to 08080100-122-001 authorized dealer as soon as possible. escape, even if they entered through the Cover Removal rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. 4. Turn and loosen the cap screws until the screws start to spin free. Note: Do not pull the screw when pulling the cap. Otherwise, the screw may fall off and become lost. Refer to “Trunk Emergency Release” located in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Closing 08080100-123-004 1. Use both hands to push the trunk lid Trunk Emergency Release down until the lock snaps shut. Do not slam it. 2. Pull up on the trunk lid to check if it is secure.

68 HOOD Opening The Hood To open the hood, proceed as follows: 1. With the vehicle in PARK, pull the release handle located to the left of the steering wheel, below the instrument panel.

07030201-122-001 07030201-123-002 Sliding The Latch Lever To The Inserting Support Rod Into Hole Right 4 — Support Rod Hole 2 — Latch Lever Closing The Hood 3. Pull up the support rod from the clip, To close the hood, proceed as follows: and insert it into the support rod hole indicated by the arrow to hold the hood 1. Check under the hood area to make 07030201-L12-001 open. certain all filler caps are in place and all Releasing The Hood Latch loose items (e.g. tools, oil containers, 1 — Hood Release Handle etc.) have been removed. 2. Lift the hood with one hand, and 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle with the other hand grasp the padded and insert your hand into the hood area on the support rod. opening, then slide the latch lever to the 3. Secure the support rod into the rod right, and lift up the hood. clip. 4. Verify that the support rod is secured in the clip before closing the 07030201-130-888 hood. Support Rod Location 3 — Support Rod

69 5. Lower the hood slowly to a height of CONVERTIBLE TOP about 8 inches (20 cm) above its closed (SOFT TOP) position and then let it drop. Lowering The Convertible Top Warning!

Warning! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is Do not sit on the folded convertible top, in motion and block your vision. Failure to otherwise the convertible top could be 04110102-L36-006 follow this warning could result in serious damaged or you may fall off and be injured. injury or death. Lock Release Latch 1 — Release Latch Closed To lower the convertible top, proceed 2 — Release Latch Open Caution! as follows: 1. Make sure the parking brake is 4. With the lock release latch pushed To prevent possible damage, do not slam applied and the engine is OFF. forward (red indicator visible), pull the the hood to close it. Lower hood to 2. Make sure there are no objects top latch handle rearward to unlock it. approximately 8 inches (20 cm) and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully which have been placed in the area closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle where the convertible top is to be

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE unless hood is fully closed, with both retracted. latches engaged. 3. Push forward on the release latch. There is a red indicator showing that the latch is open.

04110102-L21-001 Pulling The Top Latch Handle Rearward 3 — Latch Release Handle

70 5. Remove the striker from the anchor. 6. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold the convertible top along the front edge and pull it toward the rear of the vehicle. To lower the convertible top from inside the vehicle, use the convertible top handles.

04110102-126-001 Retracted Convertible Top

Warning!

04110102-123-002AB Always keep your hands and fingers Convertible Top Handles away from the fastening mechanisms 6 — Handles when moving the convertible top: it is dangerous to place your hands or fingers near the fastening mechanisms. Your 04110102-L22-002 7. Move the convertible top rearward hands or fingers could be caught and Removing Striker From Anchor while pushing the rear glass lightly with injured by the mechanism. 4 — Striker your hand. Sit in the seat with the seat belt correctly 5 — Anchor fastened when the vehicle is moving: 8. With the back end of the convertible standing in the vehicle, or sitting on the top pushed down, push the front end convertible top storage area or center until a latching sound is heard. Lightly Note: The power windows will go console when the vehicle is moving is a rock the retracted convertible top to down automatically when the dangerous way to ride. During a sudden make sure it is securely locked. maneuver or collision you could be convertible top is opened. If the power seriously injured or even killed. windows do not go down automatically, fully open the windows using the power window switch located on the doors.

71 Raising The Convertible Top To raise the convertible top, proceed as follows: 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied and the engine is OFF. 2. Pull the unlock lever upward to disengage the lock.

04110103-L23-002 Convertible Handle Location 2 — Convertible Top Handles

4. While sitting in a seat, grasp the convertible top handles, and push the convertible top against the windshield. Make sure the striker engages with the anchor, move the top latch slowly, and 04110103-121-004 then push the top latch upward until a 04110103-L24-003 Unlock Lever Location latching sound is heard. Convertible Top Components GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 1 — Unlock Lever 4 — Closing Release Latch 5 — Striker 3. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold 6 — Anchor the convertible top along the front edge and pull it towards the vehicle front. To 5. If the red indicator is visible on the raise the convertible top from inside the lock release button, the convertible top vehicle, use the convertible top is not locked. After locking the handles. convertible top, verify that the red indicator is not visible.

72 The convertible top may be To help prevent theft or vandalism constricted if it is left retracted for a and to ensure that the passenger long period. Therefore, if the top has compartment stays dry, close the become constricted, it may be difficult convertible top securely and lock both to hook the top latch striker to the doors when leaving the vehicle. anchor. The soft top is made of high quality Make sure the convertible top is material and if it is not maintained securely locked by pushing up on it. If correctly, the material could harden, it still sounds loose (rattles) after being becomes stained, or have an uneven locked by the top latch, contact an gloss. 04110103-124-001 authorized dealer. Lowering the convertible top while Lock Release Button it's wet can also cause water to drip 6 — Red Indicator Convertible Top into the cabin. 7 — Release Latch Locked Precautions The power windows go down 8 — Release Latch Unlocked Remove leaves or other debris that automatically in conjunction with the may accumulate on and around the convertible top opening/closing. convertible top. If leaves or other debris However, this is a function for improving block the drain filter, water may enter the operability, and it does not mean Caution! the vehicle. Clean the drain filter at least there is a problem. If the vehicle battery once a year. is disconnected for vehicle maintenance or other reasons, the power windows Driving with the convertible top not fully Before lowering or raising the locked could damage the convertible top. will not go down automatically. If the convertible top, stop in a safe place off power windows do not go down, the of the road and park on a level surface. automatic open/close mechanism for Note: When lowering the convertible top, the windows must be reset. Do not spray water directly near the make sure objects inside the vehicle are The windblocker reduces the amount seam of the window and convertible not blown away by the wind. of wind coming into the cabin from top when flushing away dirt on the soft Secure all loose objects inside before behind when driving with the top with water. Otherwise, water may driving with the convertible top down. convertible top opened. enter the vehicle (refer to “Convertible Top Maintenance” in “Servicing And Before starting the vehicle make sure Maintenance”). the convertible top is correctly locked.

73 ELECTRIC POWER ENVIRONMENT Caution! STEERING PROTECTION Power Steering SYSTEMS Emission Control System Before opening the convertible top, Electric power steering is only operable make sure the rear window defroster when the engine is running. This vehicle is equipped with an switch is turned off. Otherwise the heat If the engine is off or if the power emission control system (the catalytic generated from the window defroster steering system is inoperable, you can converter is part of this system) that could damage the convertible top and the enables the vehicle to comply with internal material. still steer, but it requires more physical effort. existing exhaust emissions requirements. Make sure nothing is on the convertible If the steering feels stiffer than usual top or near the back window when raising during normal driving or the steering Ignoring the following precautions could or lowering the convertible top. Even small vibrates, contact your authorized dealer. cause lead to accumulate on the objects may interfere and cause damage. catalyst inside the converter or cause The warning light notifies the driver the converter to get very hot. Either Do not drive through an automatic car of system abnormalities and operation wash; it may damage the convertible top. condition will damage the converter and conditions. cause poor performance: Do not raise or lower the convertible top Note: Never hold the steering wheel to when the temperature is below 41 °F (5 the extreme left or right for more than USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL. °C); this will damage the convertible top five seconds with the engine running. material. Do not drive your vehicle with any This could damage the power steering sign of engine malfunction. Do not lower the convertible top when system. Do not coast with the ignition OFF.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE it's wet. If the convertible top dries while folded, it will deteriorate and mold. Do not descend steep grades in gear Do not raise or lower the convertible top with the ignition OFF. in a strong wind as it could damage the Do not operate the engine at high convertible top or cause an unexpected accident. idle for more than two minutes. Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by your authorized dealer. Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.

74 Under U.S. federal law, any modification to the original-equipment emission control system before the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some states, such modification made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties. While the engine is off, the sound of a valve opening and closing can be heard at the rear of the vehicle, however this does not indicate an abnormality. The vehicle has a self-checking device and it operates while the engine is off.

Warning!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

75 This page is intentionally left blank

76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS...... 78 MAINTENANCE MONITOR — IF EQUIPPED ...... 84 FUEL ECONOMY MONITOR — IF EQUIPPED ...... 87 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ...... 88 PERSONALIZATION FEATURES . .106 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBDII...... 110 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . .111

77 CONTROL PANEL AND INSTRUMENTS Instrument Cluster

05020100-667-333 Instrument Cluster

1 — Odometer/Trip Computer And Trip Computer Button/Dashboard Illumination 2 — Tachometer 3 — Speedometer GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4 — Automatic Transmission Info Display 5 — Odometer/Trip Computer Info/Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge/Fuel Gauge/Outside Temperature/Cruise Control/Info Switch Display

78 Odometer/Trip Computer Odometer Trip Computer Reset The odometer records the total The trip computer will be erased when: distance the vehicle has been driven. The display mode can be changed from The power supply is interrupted odometer to “Trip computer A” to “Trip Trip Computer (blown fuse or the battery is computer B” and then back to The trip computer can record the total disconnected). odometer by pushing the selector. distance of two trips. One is recorded in The vehicle is driven over The selected mode will be displayed. “Trip A”, and the other is recorded in “Trip B”. 9999.9 miles. For instance, “Trip A” can record the Speedometer distance from the point of origin, and “Trip B” can record the distance from The speedometer indicates the speed where the fuel tank is filled. of the vehicle. When “Trip A” is selected, pushing the Instrument Panel selector again within one second will Illumination change to “Trip B” mode. When “Trip A” When the position lights are turned on is selected, TRIP A will be displayed. with the ignition switched ON, the When “Trip B” is selected, TRIP B will brightness of the instrument panel be displayed. 05020102-121-001 illumination is dimmed. When the Odometer/Trip Reset Button The trip computer records the total position lights are turned on, the distance the vehicle is driven until the warning light in the instrument 1 — Odometer/Trip Reset Button meter is again reset. Return it to “0.0” cluster illuminates (see “Headlights” in by depressing and holding the selector “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” When the ignition is placed in the ACC for one second or more. chapter). Use this meter to measure trip or OFF position, the odometer or trip Brightness Adjustment will not display. Pushing the selector distances and to compute fuel can switch the trip or reset function for consumption. The brightness of the instrument panel and dashboard illuminations can be a ten-minute period in the following Note: Only the trip records tenths of adjusted by rotating the knob: cases: miles (kilometers). After the ignition is cycled to OFF The brightness decreases by rotating from ON. the knob to the left. A beep will be heard when the knob has been rotated After the driver's door is opened. to the maximum dim position.

79 The brightness increases by rotating Trip Computer And Info The distance-to-empty will be the knob to the right. Switch calculated and displayed every second. The following information can be selected by pushing the INFO switch with the ignition in the ON position: Distance-to-empty (approximate distance you can travel on the available fuel). Average fuel economy. Current fuel economy.

Average vehicle speed. 0502011019A019 05020102-121-001 Dimmer Knob If you have any problems with your trip Distance To Empty Display Screen computer, contact an authorized dealer. 1 — Instrument Cluster Illumination Note: Dimmer Knob Even though the distance-to-empty display may indicate a sufficient Canceling Illumination Dimmer amount of remaining driving distance before refueling is required, refuel as With the ignition ON, rotate the knob to soon as possible if the fuel level is very the right until a beep sounds while the low or the low fuel warning light instrument cluster is dimmed. If the illuminates. instrument cluster's visibility is reduced due to glare from surrounding The display may not change unless brightness, cancel the illumination you add more than approximately dimmer. 2.3 gallons (9 liters) of fuel. 0620500-122-001 When the illumination dimmer is Instrument Cluster Display Controls The distance-to-empty is the canceled, the instrument cluster cannot approximate remaining distance the be dimmed even if the position lights Distance-To-Empty Mode

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL vehicle can be driven until all the are turned on. When the illumination This mode displays the approximate graduation marks in the fuel gauge dimmer is canceled, the screen in the distance you can travel on the (indicating the remaining fuel supply) center display switches to constant remaining fuel based on the fuel disappear. display of the daytime screen. economy.

80 If there is no past fuel economy Current Fuel Economy Mode Average Vehicle Speed Mode information such as after first This mode displays the current fuel This mode displays the average vehicle purchasing your vehicle or the economy by calculating the amount of speed by calculating the distance and information is deleted when the battery fuel consumption and the distance the time traveled since connecting the cables are disconnected, the actual traveled. Current fuel economy will be battery or resetting the data. distance-to empty/range may differ calculated and displayed every two Average vehicle speed will be from the amount indicated. seconds. calculated and displayed every Average Fuel Economy Mode When you've slowed to about 3 MPH 10 seconds. To clear the data being (5 km/h) , “- - - mpg” (“- - - L/100 km”) displayed, push the INFO switch for This mode displays the average fuel will be displayed. more than 1.5 seconds. economy by calculating the total fuel consumption and the total traveled distance since purchasing the vehicle, reconnecting the battery after disconnection, or resetting the data. The average fuel economy is calculated and displayed every minute. To clear the data being displayed, push the INFO switch for more than 1.5 seconds. After pushing the INFO switch, “- - - mpg” (“---L/100km”)willbe displayed for about 1 minute before the 05020110199019 0502011020110C fuel economy is recalculated and Current Fuel Economy Display Average Vehicle Speed Display displayed. Screen Screen After pushing the INFO switch, “- - - MPH” (“---km/h”)willbedisplayed for about 1 minute before the vehicle speed is recalculated and displayed.

81 Tachometer Engine Coolant measures. If the vehicle continues to be Temperature Gauge And driven, it could cause damage to the The tachometer shows engine speed in Fuel Gauge engine. thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge The range varies depending on the type The fuel gauge shows approximately of gauge. how much fuel is remaining in the tank when the ignition is in the ON position. We recommend keeping the tank over 1/4 full. E = Empty F = Full If the low fuel warning light illuminates or the fuel level is very low, refuel as soon as possible. Note:

05020103-12A-002 After refueling, it may require some Tachometer time for the indicator to stabilize. In addition, the indicator may deviate 1 — Tachometer Display while driving on a slope or curve since the fuel moves in the tank. The display indicating a quarter or less remaining fuel has more segments 0502010417A007 to show the remaining fuel level in Fuel/Temperature Gauge greater detail. 1 — Engine Coolant Temperature The direction of the arrow on the 2 — Fuel Gauge fuel gauge indicates that the fuel door

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL lid is on the left side of the vehicle. Note: If the high engine coolant temperature warning light (red) turns on, there is a possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and take appropriate 82 Outside Temperature Changing The Temperature Unit Of Cruise Control Set Display The Outside Temperature Display Vehicle Speed Display When the ignition is in the ON position, The outside temperature unit can be The vehicle speed preset using the the outside temperature is displayed. switched between Fahrenheit and cruise control is displayed. Celsius using the following procedure. Vehicles With Fiat Connect 7.0 Settings can be changed through the Connect 7.0 radio screen. Refer to “Personalization Features” in this chapter. Vehicles With Fiat Radio 3.0 Proceed as follows: 1. Push the INFO switch with the ignition in the OFF position and 05020107345034 continue pushing the INFO switch for 0502010819A019 Outside Temperature Screen 5 seconds or longer while placing the Cruise Control Display Screen Display ignition in the ON position. The outside Under the following conditions, the temperature display flashes. outside temperature display may differ 2. Push the INFO switch to change the from the actual outside temperature outside temperature unit. depending on the surroundings and vehicle conditions: 3. Push and hold the INFO switch for Significantly cold or hot 3 seconds or longer while the outside temperatures. temperature display is flashing. The outside temperature display illuminates. Sudden changes in outside Note: When the temperature unit temperature. indicated in the outside temperature The vehicle is parked. display is changed, the temperature unit indicated in the engine coolant The vehicle is driven at low speeds. gauge display changes in conjunction with it.

83 MAINTENANCE Reset Method Oil Life Reset MONITOR — IF Your vehicle is equipped with an engine Vehicles With FIAT Connect EQUIPPED oil change indicator system. The “Oil 7.0 Radio Change Required” message will flash in Proceed as follows: Oil Life Reset the instrument cluster display for Vehicles With Fiat Radio 3.0 approximately ten seconds after a 1. Select the icon on the home “Oil Change” with flexible settings are single chime has sounded to indicate screen to display the “Applications” available. Consult an authorized dealer the next scheduled oil change interval. screen. for details. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the 2. Select “Maintenance” to display the Note: The engine oil flexible engine oil change interval may fluctuate, maintenance list screen. maintenance setting is available (if dependent upon your personal driving equipped). Based on the engine 3. Switch the tab and select the setting style. operating conditions, the on-board item you want to change: “Scheduled,” computer in your vehicle calculates the Unless reset, this message will continue “Tire Rotation,” or “Oil Change.” remaining oil life. When the engine oil to display each time you turn the flexible maintenance setting is selected, ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. the system must be reset whenever To reset the oil change indicator system replacing the engine oil. (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following When the engine oil flexible procedure maintenance setting is selected, the Indicator light will illuminate in the 1. Place the ignition in the ON position. instrument cluster when remaining oil (Do not start the engine.) life becomes less than 300 miles (500 km) or remaining days are less 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal than 15 (whichever comes first). slowly to the floor, three times within ten seconds. 3. Place the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position. Note: If the indicator message GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

84 Oil Life Monitor You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:

Tab Item Explanation Setting Notification can be turned on/off. Displays the time or distance until Time (months) maintenance is due. Select this item to set the maintenance period. “Scheduled Due!” is displayed in red, and the indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster when the Scheduled remaining distance is less than 300 mi Distance (mile or km) (500 km) or the remaining number of days is less than 15 (whichever comes first). Resets the time and distance to the initial values. Once the system turns on, it needs Reset to be reset whenever carrying out maintenance. Setting Notification can be switched on/off. Displays the distance until tire rotation is due. Select this item to set the tire rotation distance. “Tire Rotation Due!” is displayed in Distance (mile or km) red and the wrench indicator light will Tire Rotation illuminate in the instrument cluster when the remaining distance is less than 300 mi (500 km). Resets the remaining distance to the initial Reset value. Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever rotating the tires.

85 Tab Item Explanation Setting Notification can be switched on/off. Displays the distance until an oil change is due. Select this item to set the oil change distance. “Oil Change Due!” is displayed in Distance (mile or km) red, and the indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster when the remaining distance is less than 300 mi (500 km). Resets the remaining distance to the initial Reset value. Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever replacing the engine oil. Oil Change Displays the engine oil life until an oil change is due. “Oil Change Due!” is displayed in red and the indicator light will illuminate in the Oil life (%) instrument cluster when remaining oil life distance is less than 300 mi (500 km), or remaining days are less than 15 (whichever comes first). Resets the remaining oil life to 100%. The Reset system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil. (*) The engine oil flexible maintenance setting is available (only some models). Consult an authorized dealer for details. When the engine oil flexible maintenance setting is selected, you will see the following items in the display. The vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on the engine operating conditions and lets you know when an oil change is due by illuminating the indicator light in the instrument cluster. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

86 FUEL ECONOMY 4. Displays the following setting 3. Calculates the average fuel MONITOR — IF screen: ending display on/off switching economy every minute after vehicle EQUIPPED - On/off switching for function which travel begins, and displays it. synchronizes reset fuel economy data Description to trip meter (Trip A). The “Fuel Consumption” information is displayed by operating each icon in the display. In addition, after completing a trip, the total energy efficiency to date is displayed in the ending display when the ending display is turned on. Proceed as follows: 05240101-36A-004 1. Select the icon on the home Average Fuel Economy Display screen to display the applications 05240100-36A-003 Screen screen. Fuel Economy Display Screen Note: The fuel economy data can be 2. Select the “Fuel Economy Monitor”. Fuel Consumption reset by doing the following operation: Display 3. Operate the Multimedia Control Push the reset switch from the Knob or touch the screen and display Information regarding fuel economy is menu screen. the menu. displayed: When the function, which Note: When the menu is displayed by 1. Displays the fuel economy for the synchronizes the fuel economy monitor touching the screen, the display is past 60 minutes: and the trip meter, is on, reset Trip A of hidden automatically after 6 seconds. the trip meter. Select the icon in the menu and Displays the fuel economy every perform the operation. Each icon minute for the past 1 to 10 minutes. Delete the average fuel economy operates as follows: information displayed in the trip Displays the fuel economy every computer. 1. Hides the menu display. 10 minutes for the past 10 to 60 minutes. After resetting the fuel economy data, 2. Displays the application screen. “-- -” is displayed while the average fuel 2. Displays the average fuel economy economy is calculated. 3. Resets the fuel economy data. over the past five resets and after the current reset.

87 Ending Screen Display WARNING LIGHTS Vehicles With Fiat Connect 7.0 If the ending display on the fuel AND MESSAGES The warning contents can be verified on the audio system. economy monitor is on when the Warning Lights And ignition is cycled from ON position to Messages Proceed as follows: the OFF position, the information 1. If the warning light is turned on, regarding the fuel economy is Note: select icon on the home screen to displayed. The warning light in the instrument display the application screen. panel appears together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic 2. Select “ Warning Guidance”to signal when applicable. These display the current warnings. indications are indicative and 3. Select the applicable warning to precautionary and as such must not be view the warning details. considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained For the following warning/indicator in the Owner’s Manual, which you are lights: advised to read carefully in all cases. Master Warning Light Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure Brake System Warning Light indication. ABS Warning Light Failure indications displayed are Charging System Warning Light divided into two categories: serious and less serious failures. Serious failures are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle". Less serious failures are indicated by a warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. The display cycle of both categories can be interrupted. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL cause of the failure is eliminated.

88 Engine Oil Warning Light Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light Electric Throttle Warning Light KEY Warning Light Cold Start Warning Light LED Headlight KEY Warning Light Check Engine Warning Light BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) OFF Coolant Temperature Warning Light Indicator Light Automatic Transmission Warning TCS/DSC Indicator Light Light DSC OFF Indicator Light Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light Security Indicator Light Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner Indicator Light System Warning Light Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Check Fuel Cap Warning Light Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, Seat Belt Warning Light and turns off a few seconds later or Door Ajar Warning Light when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, Low Washer Fluid Level Warning have the vehicle inspected at an Light authorized dealer. Note: Only for “Brake System Warning Light:” the light turns on continuously when the parking brake is applied.

89 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Parking Brake Warning - Warning Light Inspection/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Parking Brake Warning / Warning Light Inspection The light illuminates when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switched to START or ON. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released. Low Brake Fluid Level Warning If the brake warning light remains illuminated even though the parking brake is released, the brake fluid may be low or there could be a problem with the brake system. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. Note: Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated. Contact an authorized dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous. It indicates that your brakes may not work at all or that they could completely fail at any time. If this light remains illuminated, after checking that the parking brake is fully released, have the brakes inspected immediately. The effectiveness of the braking may diminish so you may need to push the brake pedal more strongly than normal to stop the vehicle. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. EBD (Electronic Brake-Force Distribution) System Warning If the EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution) control unit determines that some components are operating incorrectly, the control unit may illuminate the brake system warning light and the ABS warning light simultaneously. The problem is likely to be the electronic brake force distribution system. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. Note:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated. Contact an authorized dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible. Driving when the brake system warning light and ABS warning light are illuminated simultaneously is dangerous. When both lights are illuminated, the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an emergency stop than under normal circumstances.

90 Warning Light What It Means Alternator Failure If the warning light illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction of the alternator or of the charging system. Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way. Stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an authorized dealer. Note: Do not continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated because the engine could stop unexpectedly. Low Engine Oil Pressure This warning light indicates low engine oil pressure. Note: Do not run the engine if the oil pressure is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine damage. If the light illuminates or the warning indication is displayed while driving: Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way on level ground. Turn off the engine and wait five minutes for the oil to drain back into the sump. Inspect the engine oil level. If it's low, add the appropriate amount of engine oil while being careful not to overfill. Start the engine and check the warning light. Note: Do not run the engine if the oil level is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive engine damage. If the light remains illuminated even though the oil level is normal or after adding oil, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.

Door-Open Warning Light The light turns on if any door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

Warning!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. 91 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light The light flashes when the engine coolant temperature is extremely high, and illuminates when the engine coolant temperature increases further. Handling Procedure Flashing Light: drive slowly to reduce engine load until you can find a safe place to stop the vehicle and wait for the engine to cool down. Illuminated Light: this indicates the possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and stop the engine. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. Note: Do not drive the vehicle with the high engine coolant temperature warning light illuminated. Otherwise, it could result in damage to the engine.

Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly flashes, constantly illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition is placed in the ON position. If any of these occur, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not operate in an accident. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

92 Red Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Key Warning Light — Illuminated If any malfunction occurs in the keyless entry system, it illuminates continuously. Note: If the key warning indicator light illuminates or the push button start indicator light (amber) flashes, the engine may not start. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Key Warning Light — Flashing Advanced Key Fob Malfunction Take the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off. The advanced key fob battery is discharged: replace the key fob battery. The advanced key fob is not within the operation range/is placed in areas inside the cabin where it is difficult for the key to be detected: bring the advanced key fob into the operation range. A key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key fob is in the operation range: take the key fob from another manufacturer similar to the advanced key out of the operation range. Without the ignition switched OFF, the advanced key is taken out of the vehicle, and then all the doors are closed: bring the advanced key fob back into the vehicle.

Vehicle Security Alarm System The warning light switches on to report a failure of the vehicle security alarm system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

93 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means ABS Warning Light If the ABS warning light stays on while you're driving, when the ABS control unit has detected a system malfunction. If this occurs, your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had no ABS. Should this happen contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: When the engine is jump-started to charge the battery, uneven RPM occurs and the ABS warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it is the result of the weak battery and does not indicate an ABS malfunction. Recharge the battery. The brake assist system does not operate while the ABS warning light is illuminated. Malfunction Indicator Light If this light illuminates while driving, the vehicle may have a problem. It is important to note the driving conditions when the light illuminated and contact an authorized dealer. The malfunction indicator light may illuminate in the following cases: The engine's electrical system has a problem. The emission control system has a problem. The fuel tank level is very low or approaching empty. The fuel-filler cap is missing or not tightened securely. If the malfunction indicator light remains on, or it flashes continuously, do not drive at high speeds and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Warning! GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

94 Caution!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Warning Light — If Equipped The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. Note: Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then 95 Warning Light What It Means remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Caution!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light The light illuminates if the electric power steering has a malfunction. If the light illuminates, stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not operate the steering wheel. There is no problem if the light turns off after a while. Contact an authorized dealer if the light illuminates continuously. Note: If the indicator light illuminates, the power steering will not operate normally. If this happens, GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the steering wheel can still be operated, however, the operation may feel heavy compared to normal, or the steering wheel could vibrate when turning. Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or moving extremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective mode which will make the steering feel heavy, but this does not indicate a problem. If this occurs, park the vehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return to normal. 96 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means Automatic Transmission Warning Light — If Equipped The light illuminates when the transmission has a problem. Note: If the automatic transmission warning light illuminates, the transmission has an electrical problem. Continuing to drive your vehicle in this condition could cause damage to your transmission. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Master Warning Light Vehicles Equipped With Fiat Connect 3.0 System The warning light turns on continuously if there is a malfunction in the battery management system or there is a malfunction in the brake switch. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Vehicles Equipped With Fiat Connect 7.0 System The warning light turns on when the system has a malfunction. Operate the center display and verify the content. Cold Start Disable Indicator Light When the ambient temperature is extremely low, the engine may not crank even when the engine starting procedure is performed. At this time, the Cold Start Disable Indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes. However, this does not indicate a problem. Note: Place your vehicle in a warm garage until the temperature has risen to a sufficient level to enable engine starting. Electric Throttle Control Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. 97 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Lights What It Means

Led Headlight Warning Light This light illuminates if there is a malfunction in the LED headlight. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) Off Indicator Light — If Equipped A problem in the system may be indicated under the following conditions: The light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON position. The light remains turned on even if the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) switch is operated. It turns on while driving the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors can detect, the system may pause (the warning light illuminates). However, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Low Fuel Warning Light The light turns on when the remaining fuel is about 2.3 gallons (9.0 liters). The light illumination timing may vary because fuel inside the fuel tank moves around according to the driving conditions and the vehicle posture. Add fuel.

Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light — If Equipped This warning light indicates that little washer fluid remains. Add washer fluid. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Cruise Control Activation — If Equipped The warning light illuminates when the cruise control system is activated.

98 Amber Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

TCS / DSC System Indicator Light The warning light turns on when the in case of intervention of TCS/DSC systems. This means that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.

DSC Off Indicator Light The warning light turns on when the DSC system is deactivated.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light If the check fuel filler cap warning light illuminates while driving, the fuel filler cap may not be installed properly. Stop the engine and reinstall the fuel filler cap.

99 Green Warning Lights

Warning Light What It Means

Left Direction Indicator The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved downwards or, together with the right direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Right Direction Indicator The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control lever is moved upwards or, together with the left direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pushed.

Parking Lights And Normal Beam Headlights The warning light turns on when parking lights or normal beam headlights are turned on.

Cruise Control — If Equipped The warning light turns on when a cruising speed has been set.

Key Indicator Light The warning light turns on when the engine is ready to start. Warning Light Flashing When the keyless START/STOP button is pushed from ON to ACC or OFF position, the warning light may flash for approximately 30 seconds indicating that the remaining battery power of the key is low. Replace with a new battery before the key becomes unusable. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

100 Blue Warning Light

Warning Light What It Means

High Beam Headlights The warning light switches on when the high beam headlights are turned on.

Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light The light illuminates continuously when the engine coolant temperature is low and turns off after the engine is warm. If the low engine coolant temperature indicator light remains illuminated after the engine has been sufficiently warmed up, the temperature sensor could have a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer.

101 Warning Light (Red Color) On Dashboard Trim

Warning Light What It Means Seat Belt Warning Light The seat belt warning light turns on if the driver or passengers seat is occupied and the seat belt is not fastened with the ignition placed in the ON position. If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened (only when the passenger seat is occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 12 MPH (20 km/h), the warning light flashes. After a short time, the LED stops flashing, but remains illuminated. If a seat belt remains unfastened, the LED flashes again for a given period of time. If the driver or passengers seat belt is unfastened after the LED turns on, and the vehicle speed exceeds 12 MPH (20 km/h), the LED flashes again. With Passenger Occupant Classification System: to allow the passenger occupant classification sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. Without Passenger Occupant Classification System: placing heavy items on the passengers seat may cause the passengers seat belt warning function to operate depending on the weight of the item. To allow the passengers seat weight sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on an additional seat cushion on the passengers seat. The sensor may not function properly because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. If a small child is seated on the passengers seat, the warning light may not operate. Fasten the seat belts.

Warning Light (Amber Color) On Instrument Cluster Trim

Warning Light What It Means

Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on,

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL contact an authorized dealer.

102 Message Indicated On Warning Sound Is Display — If Equipped Activated Caution! With Fiat Connect Lights-On Reminder 7.0 System If lights are on and the ignition is placed Do not drive the vehicle with the air If a message is displayed in the center in the ACC position, or the ignition is display, take appropriate action (in a bag/seat belt pretensioner system warning placed in the OFF position, a beep sounding. Driving the vehicle with the calm manner) according to the continuous beep sound will be heard air bag/seat belt pretensioner system displayed message. when the driver's door is opened. warning beep sounding is dangerous. In a If the following messages are displayed collision, the air bags and the seat belt in the center display, a vehicle system Note: pretensioner system will not deploy and may be malfunctioning: When the ignition is placed in the this could result in death or serious injury. ACC position, the “Ignition Not Cycled Contact an authorized dealer as soon as Engine Coolant Temperature possible. High: displays if the engine coolant Off Warning Beep” overrides the temperature has increased excessively. lights-on reminder. Seat Belt Warning Beep A personalized function is available Charging System Malfunction: Except Mexico displays if the charging system has a to change the sound volume for the lights-on reminder. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened malfunction. when the ignition is in the ON position, Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner Temperature Warning:the a beep sound will be heard for about System Warning Beep following message is displayed when six seconds. the temperature around the center If there is a problem with the air If the driver or the passengers seat belt display is high. Lowering the bag/seat belt pretensioner systems and is not fastened and the vehicle is driven temperature of the inside of the vehicle the warning light illumination, a warning at a speed faster than about 12 MPH or the temperature around the center beep sound will be heard for about (20 km/h), a beep sound will be heard display by avoiding direct sunlight is 5 seconds every minute. again for a specified period of time. recommended. The air bag and seat belt pretensioner Until a seat belt is fastened or a given system warning beep sound will Stop the vehicle in a safe place and period of time has elapsed, the beep continue to be heard for approximately contact an authorized dealer. sound will not stop even if the vehicle 35 minutes. Contact an authorized speed falls below 12 MPH (20 km/h). dealer as soon as possible.

103 Note: are closed, and the key fob is removed from the vehicle. To allow the passenger occupant Warning! classification sensor to function This is to notify the driver that the key properly, do not place and sit on an fob has been removed from the vehicle and the ignition has not been placed in additional seat cushion on the Placing heavy items on the front passengers seat. The sensor may not passenger seat may cause the front the OFF position. function properly because the passenger seat belt warning function to Note: Because the key fob uses additional seat cushion could cause operate depending on the weight of the low-intensity radio waves, the item. sensor interference. warning may activate if the key fob If a small child is seated on the To allow the front passenger seat weight is carried together with a metal object passengers seat, the warning beep sensor to function properly, do not place or it is placed in a poor signal reception and sit on an additional seat cushion on area. may not operate. the front passenger seat. The sensor may Mexico not function properly because the Request Switch Inoperable Warning Beep — If Equipped With Advanced If the vehicle speed exceeds about additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference. Keyless Function 12 MPH (20 km/h) with the driver or passengers seat belt unfastened, a When a small child sits on the front If the request switch on the exterior warning beep sounds continuously. If passenger seat, it is possible that the door handle is pushed with a door the seat belt remains unfastened, the warning beep will not operate. open, or the ignition has not been beep sound stops once and then placed in the OFF position, a beep will be heard for about two seconds to continues for about 90 seconds. The Ignition Not Switched OFF indicate that the doors, and trunk lid beep stops after the driver or If the driver's door is opened while the passengers seat belt is fastened. cannot be locked. ignition is placed in the ACC position, a Key Left-In-Trunk Compartment Until a seat belt is fastened or a given continuous beep sound will be heard to period of time has elapsed, the beep Warning Beep — If Equipped With notify the driver that the ignition has not Advanced Keyless Function sound will not stop even if the vehicle been placed in the OFF position. If the key fob is left in the trunk with all speed falls below 12 MPH (20 km/h). Left in this condition, the keyless entry doors locked and the trunk lid closed, a system will not operate, the car cannot beep sound is heard for about ten be locked, and the battery power will seconds to remind the driver the key GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL be depleted. fob has been left in the trunk. Key Removed From Vehicle If this happens, open the trunk lid by Warning Beep pushing the electric trunk lid opener A beep sound will be heard six times and remove the key fob. and the warning light (red) will flash continuously if the ignition has not been placed in the OFF position, all the doors 104 A key fob removed from the trunk may You can change the vehicle speed Reversing: if a moving object such as not function because its functions may setting at which the warning is triggered a vehicle or two-wheeled vehicle have been temporarily suspended. To (see paragraph “Trip Computer” in approaches on the left or right from restore the key fob function, perform “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” behind your vehicle, the Blind Spot the applicable procedure (see chapter). Monitoring (BSM) warning sound is paragraph “Keys” in “Getting to know Tire Inflation Pressure Warning activated. your vehicle” chapter). Beep — If Equipped Electronic Steering Lock Warning Key Left-In-Vehicle Warning Beep Vehicle With Conventional Tires: the Beep (with the advanced keyless function) warning beep sound will be heard for The warning beep operates if the If a key fob is left in the vehicle and all about three seconds when there is any steering wheel is not unlocked after the the doors and the trunk are locked abnormality in tire inflation pressures keyless ignition START/STOP button is using a separate key fob, a beep sound (see “TMPS” in “Safety” chapter). pushed. is heard for about ten seconds to Vehicle With Run-Flat Tires (If Speed Limiter Warning Beep — If remind the driver that the key fob has Equipped): the warning beep sound will Equipped been left in the vehicle. be heard for about three seconds if the If the vehicle speed exceeds the set If this happens, open the door and tire pressures decrease. If the tire speed by about 2 MPH (3 km/h) or remove the key fob. A key fob removed pressure decreases extremely, a beep more, a warning beep operates from the vehicle this way may not sound will be heard for approximately continuously. function because its functions may 30 seconds (see “TMPS” in “Safety” The warning beep operates until the have been temporarily suspended. chapter). vehicle speed decreases to the set Perform the applicable procedure to Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) speed or less. restore the functions of the key fob (see System Warning Beep — If paragraph “Keys” in “Getting To Know Equipped Your Vehicle” chapter). Driving Forward: the warning beep Vehicle Speed Alarm — If Equipped operates when the direction indicator The vehicle speed alarm function is lever is operated to the side where the designed to alarm the driver via a single Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning beep sound and a warning indication in light is illuminated. the instrument cluster that the Note: A personalized function is previously set vehicle speed has been available to change the Blind Spot exceeded. Monitoring (BSM) warning beep sound volume.

105 PERSONALIZATION FEATURES Overview The following Personalization Features can be set or changed by the customer or by an authorized dealer. Personalization Features differ depending on the market and specification. Settings change method 1. Settings can be changed by operating the center display screen A: Refer to the “Settings” paragraph in Fiat Connect 7.0 Supplement for further information. B: Refer to “Fuel Economy Monitor” paragraph in this chapter.

2. Settings can be changed by operating the vehicle switches C: Refer to “Auto Lock/Unlock Function” paragraph in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information. D: Refer to “Key Fob” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information. E: Refer to “Lock/Unlock With Request Switch (With The Advanced Keyless Function)” (Doors) in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.

3. Settings can be changed by an authorized dealer (refer to the following table) X: Refer to your authorized dealer for setting change.

Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 Safety Blind Spot Monitoring

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Warning Beep Volume (*) High High/Low/Off A — X System (if equipped)

106 Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 Vehicle Lock: When Driving/Unlock: In Park/Lock: Out of Lock: When Park Unlock: In Operation condition of Door Locks Driving/Unlock: IGN Park/Lock: Shifting ACX auto lock/unlock function Off Out of Park/ Lock: When Driving Unlock: IGN Off/ Lock: When Driving/Off Keyless 90 seconds/ Time for locking door Entry 30 seconds 60 seconds/30 A—X automatically System seconds 90 seconds/ Time for locking door 30 seconds 60 seconds/30 A—X automatically Advanced seconds Keyless Auto-lock function Entry Off On/Off A — X operation/non operational System Beep volume when Off or Medium High/Medium/Low/Off A D/E X locking/unlocking 60 seconds/ Time until interior lights 15 seconds 30 seconds/15 A—X turn off after closing door Illuminated seconds/7.5 seconds Entry Time until interior lights 60 minutes/ System turn off automatically 30 minutes 30 minutes/10 A—X when any door is not minutes closed completely Auto-Wiper Operational/non- On On/Off (**) A — X Control operational

107 Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 Daytime Operational/non- Running On On/Off — — X operational Lights (DRL) 120 seconds/ Auto Time until headlights turn 90 seconds/ headlight off 30 second A—X off 60 seconds/ (***) 30 seconds/Off (****) High/Med. Auto-Light Timing by which lights Medium High/Medium/Med. A—X Control turn on Low/Low Adaptive Front Operational/non- Lighting On On/Off A — X operational (***) System (AFS) Lights-On Reminder Warning beep volume High High/Low/Off A — X

120 seconds/ Coming Time until headlights turn 90 seconds/60 Home 30 seconds A—X off seconds/30 seconds/ System Off Leaving Operational/Non- Home Light On or Off On/Off A — X operational System GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Turn Signals Beep volume Low High/Low A — X Three-Flash Operational/Non- On or Off On/Off A — X Turn Signal operational

108 Settings Change Method Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings 123 System Language indicated in Depends on market Language English A—X display (****) Temperature unit Temperature °C °F/°C A — X indicated in display Distance unit indicated in Distance mi or km mi/km A — X display Fuel Economy Monitor Ending On/Off Off On/Off B — X Display Fuel Linkage/non-linkage with Economy fuel economy reset and Off On/Off B — X Resetting trip meter reset Procedure (—) Feature setting change not available. (*) Only the volume of the warning beep during Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) operation can be changed. The volume of the warning beep during Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) operation cannot be changed. (**) If the auto-wiper control is set to Off, the wiper lever AUTO position is set to intermittent operation. (***) Though these systems can be turned Off, doing so will defeat the purpose of the system and FCA recommends that these systems remain On. (****) Available only in display from the center display.

109 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Caution! Warning! SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a Prolonged driving with the MIL on could ONLY an authorized service technician sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic cause further damage to the emission should connect equipment to the OBD II system called OBD II. This system control system. It could also affect fuel connection port in order to read the VIN, monitors the performance of the economy and driveability. The vehicle must diagnose, or service your vehicle. emissions, engine, and automatic be serviced before any emissions tests If unauthorized equipment is connected can be performed. transmission control systems. When to the OBD II connection port, such as a these systems are operating properly, If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is driver-behavior tracking device, it may: your vehicle will provide excellent running, severe catalytic converter damage Be possible that vehicle systems, performance and fuel economy, as well and power loss will soon occur. Immediate as engine emissions well within current including safety related systems, could be service is required. impaired or a loss of vehicle control could government regulations. occur that may result in an accident If any of these systems require service, Onboard Diagnostic involving serious injury or death. the OBD II system will turn on the System (OBD II) Access, or allow others to access, Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will Cybersecurity information stored in your vehicle systems, also store diagnostic codes and other including personal information. information to assist your service Your vehicle is required to have an technician in making repairs. Although Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) your vehicle will usually be drivable and and a connection port to allow access For further information, refer to not need towing, see your authorized to information related to the “CyberSecurity” in “Tips, Controls, and dealer for service as soon as possible. performance of your emissions General Information” in your Owner’s controls. Authorized service technicians Manual Radio Supplement. may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

110 EMISSIONS Your vehicle has a simple ignition The MIL will not flash at all and will INSPECTION AND actuated test, which you can use prior remain fully illuminated until you place MAINTENANCE to going to the test station. To check if the ignition in the off position or start PROGRAMS your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, the engine. This means that your you must do the following: vehicle's OBD II system is ready and In some localities, it may be a legal you can proceed to the I/M station. requirement to pass an inspection of 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON If your OBD II system is not ready, you your vehicle's emissions control position, but do not crank or start the should see an authorized dealer or system. Failure to pass could prevent engine. repair facility. If your vehicle was vehicle registration. Note: If you crank or start the engine, recently serviced or had a battery failure For states that require you will have to start this test over. or replacement, you may need to do an Inspection and nothing more than drive your vehicle as Maintenance (I/M), this 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see you normally would in order for your check verifies the OBD II system to update. A recheck “Malfunction Indicator the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal with the above test routine may then Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on indicate that the system is now ready. when the engine is running, and that bulb check. Regardless of whether your vehicle's the OBD II system is ready for testing. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL Normally, the OBD II system will be of two things will happen: is illuminated during normal vehicle ready. The OBD II system may not be operation you should have your vehicle ready if your vehicle was recently The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return to being fully serviced before going to the I/M station. serviced, recently had a dead battery or The I/M station can fail your vehicle a battery replacement. If the OBD II illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means because the MIL is on with the engine system should be determined not ready running. for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the that your vehicle's OBD II system is not test. ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

111 This page is intentionally left blank

112 SAFETY

SAFETY SYSTEMS ...... 114 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .116 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS...... 123 SEAT BELT SYSTEMS ...... 123 CHILD RESTRAINT PRECAUTIONS ...... 129 SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEMSRS—AIRBAG...... 133 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .146 CONSTANT MONITORING ...... 148

113 SAFETY SYSTEMS Note: efficiency beyond that afforded by the Braking distances may be longer on condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or The vehicle has the following safety the traction afforded. systems: loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for example) which usually have a hard The ABS cannot prevent collisions, Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) SAFETY foundation. A vehicle with a normal including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle Traction Contol System (TCS) braking system may require less distance to stop under these too closely, or hydroplaning. Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) conditions because the tires will build The capabilities of an ABS equipped For the operation of the systems, see up a wedge of surface layer when the vehicle must never be exploited in a the following pages. wheels skid. reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of ABS System (Anti-lock The sound of the ABS operating others. Braking System) may be heard when starting the engine The ABS control unit continuously or immediately after starting the vehicle; however, it does not indicate a TCS System (Traction monitors the speed of each wheel. If malfunction. Control System) one wheel is about to lock up, the ABS responds by automatically releasing and reapplying that wheel's brake. The Warning! Warning! driver will feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal and may hear a chattering noise from the brake system. This is The ABS contains sophisticated The capability of the TCS must never be normal ABS system operation. electronic equipment that may be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in Continue to depress the brake pedal susceptible to interference caused by such a way as to compromise personal without pumping the brakes. The improperly installed or high output radio safety and the safety of others. warning light turns on when the system transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock has a malfunction. Refer to “Warning The Traction Control System (TCS) Lights And Messages” in “Getting To braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by enhances traction and safety by Know Your Instrument Panel” for further qualified professionals. controlling engine torque and braking. information. Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will When the TCS detects driving wheel diminish their effectiveness and may lead slippage, it can lower engine torque and to a collision. Pumping makes the operate the brakes to prevent loss of stopping distance longer. Just press firmly traction. This means that on a slick on your brake pedal when you need to surface, the engine adjusts slow down or stop. automatically to provide optimum The ABS cannot prevent the natural power to the drive wheels, limiting laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, wheel spin and loss of traction. nor can it increase braking or steering 114 The indicator light turns on when the DSC System (Dynamic TCS / DSC Indicator Light system has a malfunction. Refer to Stability Control) The indicator light stays on for a few “Warning Lights And Messages” in The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) seconds when the ignition is placed in “Getting To Know Your Instrument automatically controls braking and the ON mode. It also illuminates when Panel” for further information. engine torque in conjunction with the DSC OFF switch is pressed and TCS / DSC Indicator Light systems such as ABS and TCS to help TCS/DSC is switched off. The indicator light stays on for a few control side slip when driving on If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or seconds when the ignition is placed in slippery surfaces, or during sudden or the brake assist system may have a the ON mode. evasive maneuvering, enhancing vehicle malfunction and they may not operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an If the TCS or DSC is operating, the safety. Refer to “ABS System (Antilock authorized dealer. indicator light flashes. Brake System)” and “TCS System (Traction Control System)” in this DSC OFF Indicator Light If the indicator light stays on, the chapter for further information. TCS, DSC or the brake assist system The indicator light stays on for a few may have a malfunction and they may DSC operation is possible at speeds seconds when the ignition is placed in not operate correctly. Contact your greater than 12 mph (20 km/h). the ON mode. It also illuminates when authorized dealer. The indicator light turns on when the the DSC OFF switch is pressed and system has a malfunction. Refer to TCS/DSC is switched off. Note: “Warning Lights And Messages” in If the light remains illuminated and the In addition to the indicator light “Getting To Know Your Instrument TCS/DSC is not switched off, contact flashing, a slight sound will come from Panel” for further information. your authorized dealer. The DSC may the engine. This indicates that the Note: The DSC may not operate have a malfunction. TCS/DSC is operating properly. correctly unless the following are observed: DSC OFF Switch On slippery surfaces, such as fresh Push the switch to turn off the snow, it will be impossible to achieve Use tires of the correct size TCS/DSC. The indicator light in the high rpm when the TCS is on. specified for your vehicle on all four instrument cluster will illuminate. Push wheels. the switch again to turn the TCS/DSC Use tires of the same manufacturer, back on. The indicator light will turn off. brand and tread pattern on all four wheels. Do not mix worn tires. Note: The DSC may not operate correctly when tire chains are used.

115 AUXILIARY DRIVING Warning! SYSTEMS Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) cannot SAFETY prevent the natural laws of physics from The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase system is designed to assist the driver the traction afforded by prevailing road during lane changes by alerting the conditions. DSC cannot prevent accidents, driver to the presence of vehicles including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery approaching from the rear in an adjacent lane. 05060301-12A-001 surfaces, or hydroplaning. DSC also DSC OFF Switch cannot prevent accidents resulting from The system detects vehicles loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate approaching from the rear while Note: driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, traveling in the forward direction at a attentive, and skillful driver can prevent When DSC is on and you attempt speed of 19 mph (30 km/h) or faster, accidents. The capabilities of an DSC and will activate the BSM warning lights to free the vehicle when it is stuck, or equipped vehicle must never be exploited drive it out of freshly fallen snow, the in a reckless or dangerous manner which equipped within the door mirrors. TCS (part of the DSC system) will could jeopardize the user’s safety or the If the turn signal lever is operated to activate. Depressing the accelerator safety of others. signal a lane change in the direction in will not increase engine power and Vehicle modifications, or failure to which the warning light is illuminated, freeing the vehicle may be difficult. properly maintain your vehicle, may the system warns the driver of a vehicle When this happens, turn off the change the handling characteristics of your in the detection area by flashing the TCS/DSC. vehicle, and may negatively affect the warning light and activating an audible performance of the DSC system. Changes alert. If the TCS/DSC is off when the to the steering system, suspension, engine is turned off, it automatically The detection area on this system braking system, tire type and size or wheel covers the driving lanes on both sides activates when the ignition is placed in size may adversely affect DSC the ON mode. performance. Improperly inflated and of the vehicle and from the rear part of unevenly worn tires may also degrade the doors to about 164 ft (50 m) behind DSC performance. Any vehicle the vehicle. modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the DSC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

116 The BSM system will not operate under Note: Under the following conditions, the following conditions: the rear radar sensors cannot detect objects, or it may be difficult to detect The vehicle speed falls below about them: 15 mph (25 km/h) even though the warning light is turned off. A vehicle is in the detection area at the rear in an adjacent driving lane but The gear selector is shifted to it does not approach. The BSM system REVERSE. determines the condition based on In the following cases, the warning light radar detection data. in the instrument cluster illuminates and operation of the BSM system is A vehicle is traveling alongside your deactivated. vehicle at nearly the same speed for an extended period of time. A problem with the system (including the BSM warning lights) is detected. Vehicles approaching in the opposite direction. A large change in position of a rear radar sensor on the vehicle has A vehicle in an adjacent driving lane 1 occurred. is attempting to pass your vehicle. There is a large accumulation of A vehicle is in an adjacent lane on a snow or ice on the rear bumper near a road with extremely wide driving lanes. 0528070012A002 rear radar sensor. Remove any snow, The detection area of the rear radar BSM Detection Areas ice or mud on the rear bumper. sensors is set at the road width of expressways. 1 — Detection Area Driving on snow covered roads for In the following cases, the activation of long periods. the BSM warning lights and the audible Activation / Deactivation The temperature near the rear radar alert may not occur, or they may be The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) sensors becomes extremely hot due to delayed: system will operate when all of the driving for long periods on inclines A vehicle makes a lane change from following conditions are met: during warm weather. a driving lane two lanes over to an The ignition is ON. The battery voltage has decreased. adjacent lane. The BSM switch is pushed and the If the warning light in the instrument Driving on steep inclines. warning light in the instrument cluster is cluster remains illuminated, have the turned off. vehicle inspected at an authorized Crossing the summit of a hill or dealer as soon as possible. mountain pass. The vehicle speed is 19 mph (30km/h)orfaster. 117 The turning radius is small (making a In the following cases, it may be difficult instrument cluster illuminates sharp turn or turning at intersections). to view the illumination/flashing of the momentarily and then turns off after a BSM warning lights equipped on the few seconds. Whenthereisadifferenceinthe door mirrors: height between your driving lane and Forward Driving (BSM System

SAFETY the adjacent lane. Snow or ice is adhering to the door Operation) mirrors. Immediately after pushing the BSM The BSM system detects vehicles switch and the system becomes The door glass is fogged or covered approaching from the rear and turns on operable. in snow, frost or dirt. the warning lights equipped on the door mirrors according to the conditions. If the road width is extremely narrow, The system switches to the Rear Cross Additionally, while a warning light is vehicles two lanes over may be Traffic Alert function when the gear illuminated, if the turn signal lever is detected. The detection area of the rear selector is shifted to the REVERSE operated to signal a turn in the direction radar sensors is set according to the position. in which the warning light is illuminated, road width of expressways. BSM Warning Lights the warning light flashes. The BSM warning lights may turn on in The BSM warning lights are equipped reaction to stationary objects on the Reverse Driving (RCTA System on the left and right door mirrors. road or the roadside such as guardrails, Operation) tunnels, sidewalls, and parked vehicles. The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) A BSM warning light may flash or the system detects vehicles approaching audible alert may be activated several from the left and right of your vehicle times when making a turn at a city and flashes the BSM warning lights. intersection. Function For Canceling Illumination Turn off the BSM system while pulling a Dimmer trailer or while an accessory such as a When the headlight switch is in the bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of or position, the brightness of the vehicle. Otherwise, the radar’s the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) sound system waves will be blocked warning lights is dimmed. If the Blind causing the system to not operate 05280701-12A-001 Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights normally. BSM Warning Light are difficult to see due to glare from The warning lights turn on when a surrounding brightness when traveling vehicle approaching from the rear in an on snow-covered roads or under foggy adjacent lane is detected. conditions, push the dimmer When the ignition is cycled ON, the cancellation button to cancel the malfunction warning light in the dimmer and increase the brightness of Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights when they turn on. 118 Refer to “Getting To Know Your Note: Instrument Panel” for further When the ignition is cycled OFF, the information. condition before the system was BSM Warning Beep turned off is maintained. For example, The BSM audible alert is activated if the ignition is cycled OFF while the simultaneously with the flashing of a BSM and RCTA systems are BSM warning light. operational, the BSM and RCTA systems remain operational the next BSM Switch time the ignition is cycled ON. When the BSM switch is pushed, the BSM and RCTA systems are turned off The BSM and RCTA systems are turned off when the battery is 05281200-03A-001 and the BSM off indicator light in the Rear Cross Traffic Alert instrument cluster turns on. disconnected such as when the battery terminals or fuses have been 1 — Your Vehicle If the switch is pushed again, the BSM removed and reinstalled. To turn the 2 — Approaching Vehicles Left And and RCTA systems become operable BSM and RCTA systems back on, Right and the BSM off indicator light turns off. push the BSM switch. RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) RCTA Operation Function The RCTA system operates when the The RCTA system is designed to assist gear selector is shifted to the REVERSE the driver in checking the area to the position. rear of the vehicle on both sides while If there is the possibility of a collision the vehicle is in REVERSE by alerting with an approaching vehicle, the BSM the driver to the presence of vehicles warning light flashes and the audible approaching the rear of the vehicle. alert is activated simultaneously. The RCTA system detects vehicles With Rear View Camera approaching from the left and right 05280703-12A-001 The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) BSM Switch Location sides of the vehicle while the vehicle is reversing out of a parking space, and warning indication in the rearview notifies the driver of possible danger monitor also synchronizes with the using the BSM warning lights and an Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning audible alert. indicator light on the door mirrors.

119 A large change in the position of a Note: Under the following conditions, rear radar sensor on the vehicle has the rear radar sensors cannot detect occurred. objects or it may be difficult to detect them: There is a large accumulation of

SAFETY snow or ice on the rear bumper near a The vehicle speed while in rear radar sensor. REVERSE is about 6 mph (10 km/h ) or faster. Driving on snow-covered roads for long periods. The rear radar sensor detection area is obstructed by a nearby wall or The temperature near the radar parked vehicle (reverse the vehicle to a sensors becomes extremely hot due to position where the radar sensor driving for long periods on inclines detection area is no longer obstructed). during warm weather. A vehicle is approaching directly to The battery voltage has decreased. the rear of your vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The vehicle is parked on an incline. Immediately after pushing the BSM switch and the system becomes operable.

0528140012A002 RCTA Detection In the following cases, the BSM off indicator light turns on and operation of the system is deactivated. If the BSM off indicator light in the instrument cluster remains illuminated: A problem with the system including the BSM warning lights has occurred. 05281200-03A-003 Sensors Obstructed By Nearby Vehicles

120 In the following cases, it may be difficult 2. This device must accept any to view the illumination/flashing of the interference received, including BSM warning lights equipped on the interference that may cause undesired door mirrors: operation. Snow or ice adheres to the door Note: Changes or modifications not mirrors. expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void The door glass is fogged or covered the user’s authority to operate the in snow, frost or dirt. equipment. Turn off the RCTA system while pulling TPMS (Tire Pressure a trailer or while an accessory such as a Monitoring System) bicycle carrier is installed to the rear of the vehicle. Tire Pressure Monitoring System — Lo/Hi Grade Otherwise, the sound system waves emitted by the radar will be blocked The TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring causing the system to not operate System) monitors the air pressure of all normally. four tires. If the air pressure of one or more tires is General Information too low, the system warns the driver by The following regulatory statement indicating the warning light in the 05281200-03A-004 applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) instrument cluster and operating a Another Vehicle Approaching Directly devices equipped in this vehicle: beep. To The Rear Of Your Vehicle This device complies with Part 15 of the The system monitors the tire pressures FCC Rules and with Industry Canada indirectly using the data sent from the license-exempt RSS standard(s). ABS wheel speed sensors. Operation is subject to the following To allow the system to operate two conditions: correctly, the system needs to be initialized with the specified tire pressure 1. This device may not cause harmful (value on the tire placard label). Follow interference. the procedure and perform the initialization (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization” paragraph). The warning light flashes when the system has a malfunction. 05281200-03A-005 Your Vehicle Parked On An Incline 121 Because this system detects slight Hard steering and rapid 3. Place the ignition in the ON mode. changes in tire conditions, the timing of acceleration/deceleration are repeated the warning may be faster or slower in such as during aggressive driving on a 4. While the vehicle is parked, press the following cases: winding road. and hold the TPMS system set switch and verify that the warning light in

SAFETY The size, manufacturer, or the type of Load on the vehicle is applied to a the instrument cluster flashes twice and tires is different from the specification. tire such as by loading heavy luggage a beep sound is heard once. to one side of the vehicle. The size, manufacturer, or the type of a tire is different from the others, or the System initialization has not been level of tire wear is excessively different implemented with the specified tire between them. pressure. A run-flat tire, snow tire, or tire chains Tire Pressure Monitoring System are used. Initialization An emergency tire is used (the In the following cases, system warning light may flash and then initialization must be performed so that continue illuminating). the system operates normally:

A tire is repaired using the A tire pressure is adjusted. 05120101-12A-001 TPMS Set Switch emergency flat tire repair kit. A tire rotation is performed. A tire or The tire pressure is excessively wheel is replaced. Note: higher than the specified pressure, or The battery is replaced or completely If the system initialization is the tire pressure is suddenly lowered for discharged. performed without adjusting the tire some reason such as a tire burst during pressure, the system cannot detect the driving. The warning light is illuminated. normal tire pressure and it may not The vehicle speed is lower than Initialization Method illuminate the warning light even if a tire pressure is low, or it may illuminate about 9 mph (15 km/h) (including when Proceed as follows: the vehicle is stopped), or the drive the light even if the pressures are period is shorter than five minutes. 1. Park the car in a safe place and normal. firmly apply the parking brake. The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road or a slippery, icy road. 2. Be sure the tires are cool, then adjust the tire pressure of all four (4) tires to the specified pressure indicated on the tire placard label located on the driver's door frame (door open). 122 Adjust the tire pressure on all four OCCUPANT SEAT BELT tires and initialize the system when the RESTRAINT SYSTEMS warning light is turned on. If the SYSTEMS warning light turns on for a reason Buckle up even though you are an other than a flat tire, the tire pressure of The most important safety equipment excellent driver, even on short trips. all four tires may have decreased of the vehicle comprise the following Someone on the road may be a poor naturally. protection systems: driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away The system initialization will not be Seat Belts from home or on your own street. performed if the switch is pressed SBA (Seat Belt Alert) System Research has shown that seat belts while the vehicle is being driven. Head Restraints save lives, and they can reduce the General Information seriousness of injuries in a collision. Child Restraint Systems Some of the worst injuries happen The following regulatory statement Front Air Bags And Side Air Bags when people are thrown from the applies to all radio frequency (RF) vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility devices equipped in this vehicle: Read the information given in the of ejection and the risk of injury caused following pages with the utmost care. This device complies with Part 15 of the by striking the inside of the vehicle. FCC Rules and with Industry Canada It is of fundamental importance that the Everyone in a motor vehicle should be license-exempt RSS standard(s). protection systems are used in the belted at all times. correct way to guarantee the maximum Operation is subject to the following Seat Belt Precautions two conditions: possible safety level for the driver and the passengers. Seat belts help to decrease the (1) This device may not cause harmful possibility of severe injury during interference, and accidents and sudden stops. FCA US (2) This device must accept any LLC recommends that the driver and interference received, including passengers always wear seat belts. interference that may cause undesired Mexico operation. All the seats have lap/shoulder belts. Note: Changes or modifications not These belts have retractors with inertia expressly approved by the party locks that keep them out of the way responsible for compliance could void when not in use. the user’s authority to operate the equipment. The locks allow the belts to remain comfortable on users, but they will lock in position during a collision.

123 Except Mexico Do not allow people to ride in any area All of the seat belt retractors are of your vehicle that is not equipped with designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts seats and seat belts. out of the way when not in use. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

SAFETY The driver's seat belt has no provisions seat and using a seat belt properly. for child-restraint systems and has only Occupants, including the driver, should an emergency locking mode. always wear their seat belts whether or not The driver may wear it comfortably, and an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe it will lock during a collision. injury or death in the event of a crash. However, the passenger's seat Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could lap/shoulder belt retractor operates in 03020100-12A-001 Seat Belt Routing Guide make your injuries in a collision much two modes: emergency locking mode, worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or and for child-restraint systems, you could even slide out of the seat belt. automatic locking mode. If you must Follow these instructions to wear your seat use the passenger seat for a child, slide Warning! belt safely and to keep your passengers the passenger seat as far back as safe, too. possible and make sure any child Relying on the air bags alone could lead Two people should never be belted into restraint system is secured properly. to more severe injuries in a collision. The a single seat belt. People belted together Belt retraction may become difficult if air bags work with your seat belt to can crash into one another in a collision, the belts and seat belt guides are restrain you properly. In some collisions, hurting one another badly. Never use a soiled, so try to keep them clean. Refer the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more to “Lap/Shoulder Belt” in ”Interiors,” wear your seat belt even though you have than one person, no matter what their size. air bags. found in Servicing And Maintenance” A lap belt worn too high can increase for further information. In a collision, you and your passengers the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt can suffer much greater injuries if you are forces won’t be at the strong hip and not properly buckled up. You can strike the pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. interior of your vehicle or other Always wear the lap part of your seat belt passengers, or you can be thrown out of as low as possible and keep it snug. the vehicle. Always be sure you and others A twisted seat belt may not protect you in your vehicle are buckled up properly. properly. In a collision, it could even cut It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, against your body, without twists. If you people riding in these areas are more likely can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, to be seriously injured or killed. take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.

124 A seat belt that is buckled into the A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart 3. Children that are not big enough to wrong buckle will not protect you properly. in a collision and leave you with no wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer The lap portion Die Wartung des protection. Inspect the seat belt system to “Child Restraints” in this section for Fahrzeugs sollte bei einem FIAT- periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or further information) should be secured Vertragshändler durchgeführt werden. Bei loose parts. Damaged parts must be in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear Routine- und kleineren Wartungsarbeiten, replaced immediately. Do not disassemble seat in child restraints or die Sie selbst ausführen möchten, or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt belt-positioning booster seats. Older empfehlen wir, die entsprechende assemblies must be replaced after a children who do not use child restraints Ausrüstung, FIAT-Originalersatzteile sowie collision. or belt-positioning booster seats should alle notwendigen Flüssigkeiten bereitzuhalten. Führen Sie diese Aufgaben ride properly buckled up in the rear seat nicht aus, wenn Sie nicht über die Important Safety of a vehicle with a rear seat. Precautions entsprechende Erfahrung verfügen.could 4. Never allow children to slide the ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle Please pay close attention to the shoulder belt behind them or under your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. information in this section. It tells you their arm. how to use your restraint system A seat belt that is too loose will not properly, to keep you and your 5. You should read the instructions protect you properly. In a sudden stop, passengers as safe as possible. provided with your child restraint to you could move too far forward, increasing make sure that you are using it properly. the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt Here are some simple steps you can snugly. take to minimize the risk of harm from a 6. All occupants should always wear deploying air bag: their lap and shoulder belts properly. A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the 1. Children 12 years old and under 7. The driver and front passenger seats inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, should always ride buckled up in the should be moved back as far as increasing head and neck injury. A seat rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. practical to allow the front air bags belt worn under the arm can cause internal room to inflate. injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not bones. Wear the seat belt over your in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride 8. Do not lean against the door or shoulder so that your strongest bones will in the front passenger seat, move the window. If your vehicle has side air take the force in a collision. seat as far back as possible and use bags, and deployment occurs, the side A shoulder belt placed behind you will the proper child restraint (refer to “Child air bags will inflate forcefully into the not protect you from injury during a Restraints” in this section for further space between occupants and the collision. You are more likely to hit your information). door and occupants could be injured. head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.

125 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle pull the belt strongly one time and needs to be modified to accommodate loosen, then pull it out again slowly. a disabled person, refer to the Seat Belt With Automatic Locking “Customer Assistance” section for Mode customer service contact information. SAFETY When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode until it is switched to automatic Warning! locking mode by pulling it all the way out to its full length. Never place a rear-facing child restraint If the belt feels tight and hinders in front of an air bag. A deploying comfortable movement while the passenger front air bag can cause death vehicle is stopped or in motion, it may or serious injury to a child 12 years or be in the automatic locking mode younger, including a child in a rear-facing because the belt has been pulled too child restraint. far out. 0305123592US Only use a rear-facing child restraint in Seat Belts And Pregnant Women To return the belt to the more the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. comfortable emergency locking mode, Persons with serious medical wait until the vehicle has stopped in a conditions also should wear seat belts. safe, level area, retract the belt fully to Seat Belts And Pregnant Check with your doctor for any special Women convert it back to emergency locking instructions regarding specific medical mode and then extend it around you Pregnant Women And Persons With conditions. again. Serious Medical Conditions Emergency Locking Automatic Locking Mode Pregnant women should always wear Mode Always use the automatic locking mode seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific to keep the child-restraint system from recommendations. When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking shifting to an unsafe position in the The lap belt should be worn SNUGLY mode. event of an accident. AND AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVER To enable seat belt automatic locking THE HIPS. The shoulder belt should be In the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the mode, pull it all the way out and worn across your shoulder properly, but connect it as instructed on the child never across the stomach area. occupant and the retractor will lock in position during a collision. restraint system. It will retract down to the child restraint system and stay If the belt is locked and cannot be locked on it. pulled out, retract the belt once, and then try pulling it out slowly. If this fails,

126 Lap/Shoulder Belts 3 Warning! Fastening The Seat Belt

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying 1 passenger front air bag can cause death 2 or serious injury to a child 12 years or 1 younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. 2 03020201122002 Adjusting The Seat Belt

03020201121001 1 — Position Lap Belt Across Lap Area Warning! Fastening The Seat Belt 2 — Lap Belt Routing 3 — Shoulder Belt Routing 1 — Seat Belt 2 — Seat Belt The seat belt assembly must be Tongue Buckle replaced if the switchable Automatic Unfastening The Seat Belt Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any Depress the button on the seat belt other seat belt function is not working Position the lap belt as low as possible, properly when checked according to the not on the abdominal area 2, then buckle. If the belt does not fully retract, procedures in the Service Manual. adjust the shoulder belt 3 so that it fits pull it out and check for kinks or twists. snugly against your body. Then make sure it remains untwisted as Failure to replace the seat belt assembly it retracts. could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.

127 If the driver or passenger's seat belt is 1 unfastened (only when the passenger seat is occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 12 MPH (20 km/h), the LED flashes. SAFETY After a short time, the LED stops flashing, but remains illuminated. If a seat belt remains unfastened, the 1 LED flashes again for a given period of time. In this case, fasten the seat belt.

03020202UNF001 0302020012A001 Seat Belt Pretensioner Latching/Unlatching The Seat Belt Seat Belt Routing Guides For optimum protection, the driver and 1 — Seat Belt Release Button 1 — Shoulder Belt Routing Guides passenger seat belts are equipped with pretensioner and load limiting systems. Note: Seat Belt Warning For both these systems to work Systems properly you must wear the seat belt If a belt does not fully retract, properly. inspect it for kinks and twists. If it is still If it detects that the occupant seat belt The seat belt pretensioners are not retracting properly, have it is unfastened, the warning light or beep designed to deploy in moderate or inspected: contact an authorized alerts the occupant. severe frontal, near frontal collisions. In dealer. Referto“WarningLightsAnd addition, during a side collision, the Always wear the seat belt with it Messages” in “Getting To Knowing Your pretensioner operates on the side in correctly routed in its guide. Wearing a Instrument Panel” for further which the collision occurs. The seat belt without the seat belt routed in information. pretensioners operate differently its guide is dangerous because the Refer to “Seat Belt Warning Light” in depending on what types of air bags seat belt would not be able to provide “Getting To Knowing Your Instrument are equipped. For details on the seat adequate protection in an accident, Panel” for further information. belt pretensioner operation, refer to the “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria” which could result in serious injury. Driver And Passenger paragraph in this chapter. BeltAlert (If Equipped) Seat Belt Warning Systems The LED on dashboard trim turns on if the driver or passenger's seat is occupied and the seat belt is not fastened with the ignition switched ON. 128 When a collision is detected, the Load Limiter CHILD RESTRAINT pretensioners deploy simultaneously The load limiting system releases belt PRECAUTIONS with the air bags. For deployment webbing in a controlled manner to details, refer to the “SRS Air Bag Child Restraints reduce belt force on the occupant's Deployment Criteria” paragraph in this chest. FCA US LLC strongly urges the use of chapter. child-restraint systems for children small While the most severe load on a seat The seat belt retractors remove slack enough to use them. belt occurs in frontal collisions, the load quickly as the air bags are expanding. limiter has an automatic mechanical Before buying any restraint system, Any time the air bags and seat belt function and can activate in any make sure that it has a label certifying pretensioners have fired they must be accident mode with sufficient occupant that it meets all applicable Safety replaced. movement. Standards. You should also make sure With Passenger Occupant that you can install it in the vehicle Even if the pretensioners have not fired, Classification System where you will use it. the load limiting function must be In addition, the pretensioner system for checked by an authorized dealer. Check your local and state or provincial the passenger, like the front and side laws for specific requirements regarding passenger Air Bag, is designed to only the safety of children riding in your deploy when the passenger occupant vehicle. classification sensor detects a Children 12 years or younger should passenger sitting on the passenger's ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, seat. if available. According to crash Note: statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats These devices are not a substitute rather than in the front. for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be Whatever child-restraint system you worn snugly and positioned properly. consider, please pick the appropriate one for the age and size of the child, The pretensioners are triggered by obey the law and follow the instructions the Occupant Restraint Controller that come with the individual (ORC). Like the air bags, the child-restraint system. pretensioners are single use items. A A child who has outgrown deployed pretensioner or a deployed child-restraint systems should use seat air bag must be replaced immediately. belts, both lap and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. 129 A rear-facing child-restraint system make sure the OFF passenger Air Child Restraint System should NEVER be used on the Bag deactivation indicator light Types passenger seat with the Air Bag system illuminates. For more details, refer to In this Owner’s Manual, explanation of activated. In the event of an impact the "Passenger Occupant Classification child restraint systems secured with Air Bag activation may cause fatal Sensor" in “Supplementary Restraint SAFETY seat belts is provided for the following injuries to the transported child. System SRS — Air Bag” for additional three types of popular child-restraint information. systems: infant seat, child seat, booster Note: A seat belt or child-restraint Warning! seat. system can become very hot in a closed vehicle during warm weather. To Note: In a collision, an unrestrained child can avoid burning yourself or a child, check Installation position is determined become a projectile inside the vehicle. The them before you or your child touches by the type of child restraint system. force required to hold even an infant on them. Always read the manufacturer's your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how instructions and this Owner’s Manual strong you are. The child and others could Warning! carefully. be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in Due to variations in the design of your vehicle should be in a proper restraint child restraint systems, vehicle seats for the child’s size. Improper installation can lead to failure and seat belts, not all child restraint of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be may fit all seating positions. With Passenger Occupant badly injured or killed. Follow the child Before purchasing a child-restraint Classification System restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly system, it should be tested in the To reduce the chance of injuries caused when installing an infant or child restraint. specific vehicle seating position (or by deployment of the passenger Air After a child restraint is installed in the positions) where it is intended to be Bag, the Passenger Occupant vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat used. If a previously purchased Classification Sensor work as a part of forward or rearward because it can loosen child-restraint system does not fit, you the Supplementary Restraint System. the child restraint attachments. Remove may need to purchase a different one This system deactivates the passenger the child restraint before adjusting the that will. front and side Air Bags and also the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child passenger seat belt pretensioner restraint. system when the OFF passenger Air Bag deactivation indicator light When your child restraint is not in use, illuminates. secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the When an infant or small child sits on the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. passenger seat, the system shuts off In a sudden stop or accident, it could the passenger front and side Air Bags strike the occupants or seatbacks and and seat belt pretensioner system, so cause serious personal injury. 130 Note: Booster Seat For additional information, refer to Warning! A booster seat is a child restraint www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm accessory designed to improve the fit of or call: 1–888–327–4236 the seat belt system around the child's body. Canadian residents should refer to Never place a rear-facing child restraint Transport Canada’s website for in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Front Air Bag can cause death additional information: http:// or serious injury to a child 12 years or www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ younger, including a child in a rear-facing motorvehiclesafety/ child restraint. safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm Only use a rear-facing child restraint in Infant Seat the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. An infant seat provides restraint by bracing the infant's head, neck and Child Seat back against the seating surface. A child seat restrains a child's body using the harness. 03030202BOO001 Booster Seat

Warning!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious 06070809INF001 injury or death. A child must always wear Infant Seat both the lap and shoulder portions of the 03030202CHD001 seat belt correctly. Child Seat

131 Child Seat Installation Place the child-restraint system on Place the ignition in ON mode and Position the seat without putting your weight on make sure the passenger air bag the seat and secure the child-restraint deactivation indicator light illuminates The passenger lap/shoulder belt can system with the lap portion of the after installing a child restraint system easily be converted into the automatic lap/shoulder belt. See the on the passenger seat. If the passenger SAFETY locking mode, which must be done to manufacturer's instructions on the air bag deactivation indicator light does hold the child-restraint system. child-restraint system for belt routing not illuminate, remove the child restraint Note: To check if your seats have side instructions. system, cycle the ignition to OFF mode, air bags: FCA vehicles equipped with and then reinstall the child restraint To get the retractor into the side air bag will have an embossed system. "SRS AIRBAG" marking on the automatic locking mode, pull the outboard shoulder of the seats. shoulder belt portion of the seat belt Follow the child restraint system until the entire length of the belt is out of manufacturer's instructions carefully. the retractor. Depending on the type of child restraint Push the child-restraint system firmly system, it may not employ seat belts into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt which are in automatic locking mode, retracts as snugly as possible. A clicking however if it uses an upper tether, it noise from the retractor will be heard may not be mounted properly in this during retraction if the system is in vehicle as there is no safe way to automatic locking mode. If the belt does anchor the tether. Confirm whether the not lock the seat down tight, repeat the child restraint system can be used with previous step and also this one. 06070400567567 seat belts by reading the child restraint Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Light system manufacturer's instructions. Seat your child safely in the child-restraint system and secure the Passengers Seat Child Restraint child according to the instructions from Warning! System Installation (With Passenger the child-restraint system manufacturer. Occupant Classification System) Note: Child restraint systems are Note: Inspect this function before designed to be secured in vehicle seats each use of the child restraint system. Never place a rear-facing child restraint by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a You should not be able to pull the in front of an air bag. A deploying lap/shoulder belt. shoulder belt out of the retractor while passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child Proceed as follows: the system is in the automatic locking mode. When you remove the 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Make sure the ignition is cycled off. child-restraint system, be sure the belt fully retracts to return the system to Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a Slide the seat as far back as vehicle with a rear seat. possible. emergency locking mode before occupants use the seat belts. 132 SUPPLEMENTARY Without seat belt usage, the Air Bags RESTRAINT SYSTEM cannot provide adequate protection SRS — AIR BAG during an accident. Seat belt usage is necessary to: Description Keep the occupant from being The front and side Supplementary thrown into an inflating Air Bag. Restraint Systems (SRS) include different types of Air Bags. Reduce the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed Note: Please verify which kinds of Air for Air Bag inflation, such as roll-over or Bags are equipped on your vehicle by rear impact. locating the “SRS AIR BAG” location 06070400567567 indicators. Reduce the possibility of injuries in Passenger Air Bag Deactivated These indicators are visible in the area frontal, near frontal or side collisions Light that are not severe enough to activate where the Air Bags are installed. Small children must be protected by a the Air Bags. The Air Bags are installed in the child-restraint system as stipulated by following locations: Reduce the possibility of being law in every state and province. In The steering wheel hub (Driver Air thrown from your vehicle. certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraint Bag) Reduce the possibility of injuries to system. Carefully consider which lower body and legs during an accident The passenger dashboard child-restraint system is necessary for because the Air Bags provide no (Passenger Air Bag) your child and follow the installation protection to these parts of the body. The outer sides of the seat backs directions in this Owner's Manual as (Side Air Bags) Hold the driver in a position which well as the child-restraint system allows better control of the vehicle. manufacturer's instructions. This vehicle has front air bags and If your vehicle is also equipped with Do not use a child-restraint system lap/shoulder belts for both the driver which employs an upper tether and front passenger. The front air bags a passenger occupant classification system, refer to the “Passenger because there is no appropriate means are a supplement to the seat belt to anchor the tether. restraint systems. Occupant Classification System” paragraph for further information. The Air Bag supplementary restraint systems are designed to provide If your vehicle is equipped with a supplementary protection in certain passenger occupant classification situations so seat belts are always system, the passenger Air Bag important in the following ways. deactivation indicator light illuminates for a specified time after the ignition has been cycled ON. 133 Warning! Warning!

If the Indicator Light remains illuminated Unapproved modifications or service SAFETY for an adult passenger, have an authorized procedures to the passenger seat dealer service the air bag system assembly, its related components, seat immediately. Failure to do so may cause cover or cushion may inadvertently change serious injury or death. If the Indicator the air bag deployment in case of a frontal Light is illuminated with the words “PASS collision. This could result in death or AIRBAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced serious injury to the front passenger if the Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event of vehicle is involved in a collision. A modified a collision. vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Never place a rear-facing child restraint (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle in front of an air bag. A deploying Safety Standards (CMVSS). passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or If it is necessary to modify the air bag younger, including a child in a rear-facing system for persons with disabilities, child restraint. contact your authorized dealer. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

134 Supplementary Restraint System Components With Passenger Occupant Classification System

03040300-121-002 With Passenger Occupant Classification System 1 — Driver/Passenger Inflators And Air 5 — Side Crash Sensors 9 — Passenger Occupant Bags Classification Sensor 2 — Crash Sensors And Diagnostic 6 — Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner 10 — Passenger Occupant Module (Sas Unit) System Warning Light Classification Module 3 — Seat Belt Pretensioners 7 — Side Inflators And Air Bags 4 — Front Air Bag Sensors 8 — Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light

135 Without Passenger Occupant Classification System SAFETY

03040300-122-003 Without Passenger Occupant Classification System 1 — Driver/Passenger Inflators And Air 4 — Front Air Bag Sensors 7 — Side Inflators And Air Bags Bags 2 — Crash Sensors And Diagnostic 5 — Side Crash Sensors Module (Sas Unit) 3 — Seat Belt Pretensioners 6 — Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light

136 How The SRS Air Bags Never place a rear-facing child restraint (With Passenger Occupant Work in front of an air bag. A deploying Classification System) This vehicle has front air bags and passenger front air bag can cause death The driver's dual-stage air bag controls or serious injury to a child 12 years or lap/shoulder belts for both the driver air bag inflation in two energy stages. younger, including a child in a rear-facing During an impact of moderate severity, and front passenger. The front air bags child restraint. are a supplement to the seat belt the driver's air bag deploys with lesser restraint systems. The SRS Air Bags are Only use a rear-facing child restraint in energy, whereas during more severe designed to provide further protection the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. impacts, it deploys with more energy. for passengers in addition to the seat Passenger Air Bag belt functions. Be sure to wear seat Driver Air Bag (Dual Stage) belts properly. The driver's air bag is mounted in the The passenger Air Bag is mounted in Seat Belt Pretensioners steering wheel. the passenger dashboard. The seat belt pretensioners are designed to deploy in moderate or severe frontal, near frontal collisions. In addition, during a side collision, the pretensioner operates on the side in which the collision occurs. The pretensioners operate differently depending on what types of air bags are equipped. For details on the seat belt pretensioner operation, refer to the “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”. 06010203-126-123 06010204-126-123 Driver Side Air Bags Passenger Side Air Bag Warning! When Air Bag crash sensors detect a The inflation mechanism for the frontal impact of greater than moderate passenger Air Bag is the same as the force, the driver's Air Bag inflates driver's Air Bag, as mentioned above. Being too close to the steering wheel or quickly helping to reduce injury mainly For more details about Air Bag instrument panel during front air bag to the driver's head or chest caused by deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, directly hitting the steering wheel. For Deployment Criteria" in this chapter. including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending more details about Air Bag deployment, For further details about air bag your arms to reach the steering wheel or refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag instrument panel. Criteria" in this chapter for further Deployment Criteria" in this chapter. information. 137 Side Air Bags Bag Deployment Criteria" in this chapter for further information. The side air bags are mounted in the Warning! outer sides of the seat backs. When the air bag crash sensors detect a side Warning! Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do

SAFETY impact of greater than moderate force, the system inflates the side air bag only not lean against the door or window. Sit on the side in which the vehicle was hit. upright in the center of the seat. Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Being too close to the Side Air Bags Bags; the performance could be adversely during deployment could cause you to be affected and/or objects could be pushed severely injured or killed. into you, causing serious injury. Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Warning! Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to SABs can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, With Passenger Occupant including children, should never lean on or Classification System sleep against the door, side windows, or In addition, the passenger side bag is area where the side air bags inflate, even if designed to only deploy when the they are in an infant or child restraint. passenger occupant classification Seat belts (and child restraints where sensor detects a passenger sitting on appropriate) are necessary for your the passenger's seat. protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating SAB. To get the best protection from the 06010205-126-123 SABs, occupants must wear their seat Warning! Side Air Bags belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be The side air bag inflates quickly to properly restrained in a child restraint or If a child restraint system, child, small reduce injury to the driver or booster seat that is appropriate for the size teenager or adult in the front passenger seat passenger's head and chest caused by of the child. is seated improperly, the occupant may directly hitting interior parts such as a provide an output signal to the OCS that is door or window. For more details about different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may result in serious injury air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air or death in a collision. 138 Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seatback in an upright Warning! position, your back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet comfortably on Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your or near the floor. instrument panel could mean you won’t Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., have the air bags to protect you in a backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the collision. If the light does not come on as a front passenger seat. Holding an object bulb check when the ignition is first turned may provide an output signal to the OCS on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if that is different than the occupant’s it comes on as you drive, have an properly seated weight input, which may authorized dealer service the air bag result in serious injury or death in a system immediately. collision. Placing an object on the floor under the Passenger Side Front Air Bag And front passenger seat may prevent the OCS Child Restraint Systems from working properly, which may result in Rearward-facing child restraint systems serious injury or death in a collision. Do not must NEVER be fitted on the front seat place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat. with an active passenger side air bag since in the event of an impact the air bag activation may cause fatal injuries Warning Light/Beep to the transported child. 03030101-121-001 Sun Visor Air Bag Labels A system malfunction or operation ALWAYS comply with the instructions conditions are indicated by a warning. on the label stuck on the passenger Refer to the beginning paragraph of side sun visor : A = Mexico market/ B = Warning! “Warning Lights And Messages” in U.S.A. and Canada market. “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

139 SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type of collision (the illustrations are the representative cases of collisions). Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt SAFETY pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

Types Of Collision

SRS Equipment A Severe Frontal/Near A Severe Side Collision (*) A Rear Collision Frontal Collision

SRS Equipment

Seat Belt Pretensioner X (**) (Both Sides) X (**) (Impact Side Only) Driver Air Bag X No air bag and seat belt pretensioner will be activated in Passenger Air Bag X (**) a rear collision Side Air Bag X (**) (Impact Side Only)

140 X: the SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision. Warning! Warning! (*) In a side collision, the seat belt pretensioners and the side air bags deploy (only on the side in which the Unapproved modifications or service Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in collision occurs). procedures to the passenger seat your instrument panel could mean you (**) Passenger Occupant assembly, its related components, seat won’t have the air bags to protect you in a cover, or cushion may inadvertently collision. If the light does not come on as a Classification System: the passenger change the air bag deployment in case of bulb check when the ignition is first turned front and side air bags and the seat belt a frontal collision. This could result in death on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if pretensioner are designed to deploy or serious injury to the front passenger if it comes on as you drive, have an when the passenger occupant the vehicle is involved in a collision. A authorized dealer service the air bag classification sensor detects a modified vehicle may not comply with system immediately. required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety passenger sitting on the passenger's Placing an object on the floor under the seat. Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS). front passenger seat may prevent the Note: In a frontal offset collision, the occupant classification sensor from equipped air bags and pretensioners If it is necessary to modify the air bag working properly, which may result in may all deploy depending on the system for persons with disabilities, serious injury or death in a collision. Do not direction, angle, and rate of impact. contact your authorized dealer. place any objects on the floor under the front passenger seat. If there is a fault present in the occupant Warning! classification sensor, both the Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. Deployed air bags and seat belt Should this occur, the Passenger pretensioners cannot protect you in Advanced Front Air Bag will remain another collision. Have the air bags, seat deactivated until the fault is cleared. This belt pretensioners, and the seat belt indicates that you should take the vehicle retractor assemblies replaced by an to an authorized dealer for service authorized dealer immediately. Also, have immediately. the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

141 Limitations To SRS Air Limitations To Side Collision Bag A Detection In severe collisions such as those Side collisions may not be detected as described in "SRS Air Bag Deployment severe enough to deploy the SRS air

SAFETY Criteria" paragraph, the applicable SRS bag equipment: air bag equipment will deploy. Side impacts involving trees or poles However, in some accidents, the A. equipment may not deploy depending Side impacts with two-wheeled on the type of collision and its severity. vehicles B. Limitations To Front / Near Front Roll-over. Collision Detection B Front/near front collisions may not be detected as severe enough to deploy A the SRS air bag equipment: Impacts involving trees or poles A. Frontal offset impact to the vehicle B. Rear-ending or running under a truck's tail gate. 03040600-121-001 Front/Near Front Collision B

03040600-123-001 Side Collision

03040600-122-001 Rear End Collision 142 This system shuts off the passenger front and side Air Bags and seat belt Warning! pretensioner system, so make sure the passenger Air Bag deactivation indicator light turns on. Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in The air bag/seat belt pretensioner your instrument panel could mean you system warning light flashes and the won’t have the air bags to protect you in a passenger Air Bag deactivation collision. If the light does not come on as a indicator light illuminates if the sensors bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if have a possible malfunction. If this it comes on as you drive, have an 03040600-124-002 happens, the passenger front and side authorized dealer service the air bag Roll-Over Collision Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner system immediately. system will not deploy. Passenger Occupant Placing an object on the floor under the Note: If a passenger is seated as Classification Sensor front passenger seat may prevent the shown in the following figure the occupant classification sensor from Your vehicle is equipped with a passenger occupant classification working properly, which may result in passenger occupant classification sensor cannot detect a passenger serious injury or death in a collision. Do not sensor as a part of the supplementary sitting on the passenger's seat correctly place any objects on the floor under the restraint system. This sensor is and the deployment/non-deployment of front passenger seat. equipped in the passenger's seat the Air Bags cannot be controlled as If there is a fault present in the occupant cushion. This sensor measures the indicated in the passenger Air Bag classification sensor, both the Indicator electrostatic capacity of the deactivation indicator light on/off Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will passenger's seat. condition chart. illuminate to show that the Passenger The SRS unit is designed to prevent the Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the Passenger passenger front and side Air Bags and Advanced Front Air Bag will remain seat belt pretensioner system from Warning! deactivated until the fault is cleared. This deploying if the passenger Air Bag indicates that you should take the vehicle deactivation indicator light turns on. to an authorized dealer for service If a child restraint system, child, small immediately. To reduce the chance of injuries caused teenager or adult in the front passenger by deployment of the passenger Air seat is seated improperly, the occupant Bag, the system deactivates the may provide an output signal to the passenger front and side Air Bags and occupant classification sensor that is also the seat belt pretensioner system different from the occupant’s properly when the passenger Air Bag seated weight input. This may result in deactivation indicator light turns on. serious injury or death in a collision.

143 Passenger Air Bag Deactivation or serious injury to a child 12 years or Indicator Lights younger, including a child in a rear-facing These indicator lights turn on to remind child restraint. you that the passenger front and side Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a

SAFETY Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner will vehicle with a rear seat. or will not deploy during a collision. Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Note: The system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the passenger front and side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off.

06070400567567 The passenger air bag deactivation Passenger Air Bag Deactivated indicator light may turn on repeatedly if luggage or other items are put on the passenger seat, or if the temperature 03040702-12A-001 of the vehicle's interior changes Improper Seating Positions Warning! suddenly. The passenger air bag deactivation Warning! If the Indicator Light remains illuminated indicator light may turn on for for an adult passenger, have an authorized 10 seconds if the electrostatic capacity dealer service the air bag system on the passenger seat changes. Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., immediately. Failure to do so may cause backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in the serious injury or death. If the Indicator The air bag/seat belt pretensioner front passenger seat. Holding an object Light is illuminated with the words “PASS system warning light might turn on if may provide an output signal to the AIRBAG OFF,” the Passenger Advanced the passenger seat receives a severe Front Air Bag will not deploy in the event of occupant classification sensor that is impact. different than the occupant’s properly a collision. seated weight input, which may result in Never place a rear-facing child restraint serious injury or death in a collision. in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death

144 If the passenger Air Bag If the passenger Air Bag Passenger Air Bag Deactivation deactivation indicator light does not deactivation indicator light turns on Indicator Light On/Off Condition turn on after installing a child restraint when an occupant is seated directly in Chart system on the passenger seat, first, the passenger seat, have the If the passenger occupant classification reinstall your child restraint system passenger readjust their posture by sensor is normal, the indicator light according to the procedure in this sitting with their feet on the floor, and turns on when the ignition is cycled ON. Owner’s Manual. Then, if the then refastening the seat belt. If the The light turns off after a few seconds. passenger Air Bag deactivation OFF passenger Air Bag deactivation Then, the indicator light turns on or is indicator light still does not turn on, indicator light remains turned on, slide off under the following conditions: contact an authorized dealer as soon the passenger seat as far back as as possible. possible. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Condition Detected By The Passenger Air Bag Passenger Front And Side Air Passenger Seat Belt Passenger Occupant Deactivation Indicator Light Bags Pretensioner System Classification System Empty (Not occupied) On Deactivated Deactivated A child is seated in a child On Deactivated Deactivated restraint system (*) Adult (**) Off Ready Ready (*) The occupant classification sensor may not detect a child seated on the seat, in a child restraint system, or a junior seat depending on the child's physical size and seated posture. (**) If a smaller adult sits on the passenger seat, the sensors might detect the person as being a child depending on the person's physique. If the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not turn on when the ignition is cycled ON and does not turn on as indicated in the passenger air bag deactivation indicator light on/off condition chart, do not allow an occupant to sit in the passenger seat and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work properly in an accident.

145 Maintaining Your Air Bag EVENT DATA System Warning! RECORDER (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event Warning! data recorder (EDR). Never place a rear-facing child restraint SAFETY in front of an air bag. A deploying The main purpose of an EDR is to passenger front air bag can cause death Modifications to any part of the air bag record, in certain crash or near or serious injury to a child 12 years or system could cause it to fail when you crash-like situations, such as an air bag younger, including a child in a rear-facing need it. You could be injured if the air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, child restraint. system is not there to protect you. Do not data that will assist in understanding Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a modify the components or wiring, how a vehicle’s systems performed. vehicle with a rear seat. including adding any kind of badges or The EDR is designed to record data stickers to the steering wheel hub trim related to vehicle dynamics and safety Children 12 years or younger should always cover or the upper right side of the systems for a short period of time, ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add typically 30 seconds or less. aftermarket side steps or running boards. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: Warning! It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to How various systems in your vehicle tell anyone who works on your vehicle that were operating. No objects should be placed over or it has an air bag system. near the air bag on the instrument panel or Whether or not the driver and Do not attempt to modify any part of passenger safety belts were steering wheel because any such objects your air bag system. The air bag may could cause harm if the vehicle is in a inflate accidentally or may not function buckled/fastened. collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. properly if modifications are made. Take How far (if at all) the driver was your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any pushing the accelerator and/or brake Do not put anything on or around the air air bag system service. If your seat, pedal. bag covers or attempt to open them including your trim cover and cushion, manually. You may damage the air bags needs to be serviced in any way (including How fast the vehicle was traveling. and you could be injured because the air removal or loosening/tightening of seat bags may no longer be functional. The attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your This data can help provide a better protective covers for the air bag cushions understanding of the circumstances in are designed to open only when the air authorized dealer. Only manufacturer bags are inflating. approved seat accessories may be used. If which crashes and injuries occur. it is necessary to modify the air bag Relying on the air bags alone could lead system for persons with disabilities, to more severe injuries in a collision. The contact an authorized dealer. air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. 146 Note: However, if necessary, FCA will: Data Handling EDR data are recorded by your Use the data for research on FCA FCA and its subcontracting parties may vehicle only if a non-trivial crash or near vehicle performance, including safety. obtain and use the recorded data for crash-like situation occurs; no data are vehicle malfunction diagnosis, research Disclose the data or the recorded by the EDR under normal and development, and quality summarized data to a third party for driving conditions and no personal improvement. research purposes without disclosing data (e.g., name, gender, age, and FCA will not disclose or provide any of vehicle or owner identification crash location) are recorded. However, the obtained data to a third party information. other parties, such as law unless: Recording Of Vehicle Data enforcement, could combine the EDR An agreement from the vehicle data with the type of personally This vehicle is equipped with a owner (agreements from lessor and identifying data routinely acquired computer which records the following lessee for leased vehicle) is obtained. during a crash investigation. main vehicle data related to vehicle controls, operation, and other driving Officially requested by the police or To read data recorded by an EDR, other law enforcement authorities. special equipment is required, and conditions. access to the vehicle or the EDR is Recorded Data For statistical processing by a needed. In addition to the vehicle Vehicle conditions such as engine research institution, after processing manufacturer, other parties, such as speed and vehicle speed. the data so that identification of the law enforcement, that have the special owner or the vehicle is impossible. equipment, can read the information if Driving operation conditions such they have access to the vehicle or the as accelerator and brake pedals, and EDR.FCA will not disclose any of the information related to the environmental circumstances while the data recorded in an EDR to a third party vehicle is driven. unless: Malfunction diagnosis information A written agreement from the from each on-vehicle computer. vehicle owner or the lessee is obtained. Information related to controls of other on-vehicle computers. Officially requested by the police or other law enforcement authorities. The recorded data may vary depending on the vehicle grade and optional Used as a defense for FCA in a law equipment. Voice and images are not suit, claim, or arbitration. recorded. Ordered by a judge or court.

147 CONSTANT Enhanced Accident Cut off battery power to the: Response System MONITORING – Engine In the event of an impact, if the The following components of the Air – Electric Motor (if equipped) Bag systems are monitored by a communication network remains intact, SAFETY diagnostic system: and the power remains intact, – Electric power steering depending on the nature of the event, – Brake booster Crash Sensors, And Diagnostic the ORC will determine whether to have Module (Sas Unit) the Enhanced Accident Response – Electric park brake System perform the following functions: Front Air Bag Sensors – Automatic transmission gear Air Bag Modules Cut off fuel to the engine (If selector Equipped) Side Crash Sensors – Horn Cut off battery power to the electric – Front wiper Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner motor (If Equipped) System Warning Light – Headlamp washer pump Flash hazard lights as long as the Seat Belt Buckle Switch battery has power Note: After an accident, remember to Seat Belt Pretensioners cycle the ignition to the STOP Turn on the interior lights, which (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the Related Wiring remain on as long as the battery has key from the ignition switch to avoid power or for 15 minutes from the draining the battery. Carefully check the With Passenger Occupant intervention of the Enhanced Accident Classification System vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine Response System. compartment and on the ground near Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Unlock the power door locks. the engine compartment and fuel tank Indicator Light before resetting the system and starting Your vehicle may also be designed to the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or Passenger Occupant Classification perform any of these other functions in damage to the vehicle electrical devices Sensor response to the Enhanced Accident (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset Response System: Passenger Occupant Classification the system by following the procedure Module — If Equipped Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off described below. The diagnostic module continuously the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the monitors the system's readiness. This HVAC Circulation Door begins when the ignition is cycled ON and continues while the vehicle is being driven.

148 Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

149 This page is intentionally left blank

150 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTINGTHEENGINE...... 152 BRAKE SYSTEM ...... 153 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ...... 155 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED ...... 156 SPEED CONTROL ...... 162 RADAR SENSORS — IF EQUIPPED ...... 165 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ...... 166 PARKVIEW REAR BACKUP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED ...... 170 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 176 VEHICLELOADING...... 179 TOWING TRAILERS ...... 181 DRIVING TIPS ...... 181

151 STARTING THE Never press the accelerator pedal for 4. Place the start button in the ON ENGINE starting the engine. mode, push and release it as soon as the engine starts. If the engine does not Models Equipped With A Starting The Engine start within 10 seconds, push the start Manual Transmission Before starting the engine, adjust the button to OFF mode and wait for seat, the interior rear view mirrors, and Proceed as follows: 10-15 seconds before repeating the starting procedure. the door mirrors, and fasten the seat 1. Engage the parking brake and place belt correctly. the gear selector in NEUTRAL. Cold Weather Operation 2. Place the start button in the ACC Regarding Cold Start Disable Warning! mode. When the ambient temperature is 3. Fully depress the clutch pedal extremely low, the engine may not without touching the accelerator. crank even when the engine starting When leaving the vehicle, always remove procedure is performed. At this time, the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. 4. Place the start button in the ON the Cold Start Disable Indicator light in mode, push and release it as soon as the instrument cluster flashes. However, Never leave children alone in a vehicle, the engine starts. If the engine does not this does not indicate a problem.

STARTING AND OPERATING or with access to an unlocked vehicle. start within 10 seconds, push the start Perform the necessary procedures (see Allowing children to be in a vehicle button to OFF mode and wait for “Warning lights And Messages” unattended is dangerous for a number of 10-15 seconds before repeating the paragraph in “Getting To Know Your reasons. A child or others could be starting procedure. Instrument Panel” chapter). seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, Models Equipped With Regarding Ice Breaker brake pedal or the transmission gear An Automatic When the ambient temperature is low, selector. Transmission the start of cranking may be delayed after engine starting procedure is Do not leave the key fob in or near the Proceed as follows: vehicle, or in a location accessible to performed. At this time, the Cold Start children, and do not leave the ignition of a 1. Engage the parking brake and place Disable Indicator light in the instrument vehicle equipped with Advanced Keyless the gear selector to P (PARK) or N cluster illumintes. However, this does Entry in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A (NEUTRAL). not indicate a problem. child could operate power windows, other Refer to your authorized dealer controls, or move the vehicle. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal regarding other related parts which are Do not leave children or animals inside without touching the accelerator. to be input such as function name, parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior 3. Place the start button in the ACC operating scenario (condition) of each heat build-up may cause serious injury or mode. function, indicator operation, and user death. operation/procedure information. 152 Extended Park Starting After Starting — BRAKE SYSTEM Warming Up The Engine Note: Extended Park condition occurs This vehicle has power-assisted brakes when the vehicle has not been started Proceed as follows: that adjust automatically through or driven for at least 30 days. normal use. Should power-assist fail, 1. Travel slowly, letting the engine run you can stop by applying greater force 1. Install a battery charger or jumper at a reduced RPM, without accelerating than normal to the brake pedal. But the cables to the battery to ensure a full suddenly. battery charge during the crank cycle. distance required to stop will be greater 2. It is recommended to wait until the than usual. 2. Place the ignition in the START digital engine coolant temperature Note: Always depress the brake pedal mode and release it when the engine indicator starts moving before with the right foot. Applying the brakes starts. demanding full performance. with the unaccustomed left foot could slow your reaction time to an 3. If the engine fails to start within Stopping The Engine 10 seconds, place the ignition in the emergency situation resulting in STOP (OFF/LOCK) mode, wait five Proceed as follows: insufficient braking operation. seconds to allow the starter to cool, Do not drive with your foot held on the 1. Park the car in a position that is not then repeat the Extended Park Starting clutch pedal or brake pedal, or hold the dangerous for oncoming traffic, if procedure. clutch pedal depressed halfway equipped with manual transmission unnecessarily. Doing so could result in place gear selector in FIRST (1st) or 4. If the engine fails to start after eight the following: attempts, allow the starter to cool for at REVERSE (R) gear, if equipped with least 10 minutes, then repeat the automatic transmission place the gear The clutch and brake parts will wear procedure. selector to PARK (P). out more quickly. 2. Push and release the ignition button The brakes can overheat and Caution! to STOP the engine. adversely affect brake performance.

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

153 Releasing the Parking Brake Warning! Warning! Depress the brake pedal and pull the parking brake lever upwards, then press the release button. While holding Riding the brakes can lead to brake Never leave children alone in a vehicle, the button, lower the parking brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with or with access to an unlocked vehicle. lever all the way down to the released your foot resting or riding on the brake position. pedal can result in abnormally high brake Allowing children to be in a vehicle temperatures, excessive lining wear, and unattended is dangerous for a number of possible brake damage. You would not reasons. A child or others could be have your full braking capacity in an seriously or fatally injured. Children should emergency. be warned not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light” on is dangerous. A Do not leave the key fob in or near the significant decrease in braking vehicle or in a location accessible to performance or vehicle stability during children. A child could operate power braking may occur. It will take you longer windows, other controls, or move the to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle harder to control. You could have a Be sure the park brake is fully collision. Have the vehicle checked disengaged before driving; failure to do so 05050102-12A-001 immediately. can lead to brake failure and a collision. Parking Brake Always fully apply the park brake when 1 — Parking Brake Lever leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and 2 — Parking Brake Release Button Caution! cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmission in REVERSE (R) or FIRST (1st) gear. Failure to do so Warning Light Wear shoes appropriate for driving in order may allow the vehicle to roll and cause The warning light turns on when the to avoid your shoe contacting the brake damage or injury. pedal when depressing the accelerator system has a malfunction. Refer to pedal. “Warning Lights And Messages” in Setting the Parking Brake “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Parking Brake Depress the brake pedal and then firmly pull the parking brake lever fully Note: Driving with the parking brake on upwards with sufficient force to hold the will cause excessive wear of the brake vehicle in a stationary position. parts.

154 Brake Pad Wear Indicator MANUAL When the disc brake pads become TRANSMISSION worn, the built-in wear indicators Manual Transmission contact the rotors. This causes a screeching noise to warn that the pads should be replaced. When you hear this noise contact your authorized dealer as Warning! soon as possible. Brake Assist You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the During emergency braking situations park brake fully applied. The park brake when it is necessary to depress the 05210101-12A-001 should always be applied when the driver Gear Selector brake pedal with greater force, the is not in the vehicle, especially on an brake assist system provides braking incline. Depress the clutch pedal all the way assistance, thus enhancing braking down while shifting, then release it performance. When the brake pedal is slowly. depressed hard or depressed more Caution! Your vehicle is equipped with a device quickly, the brakes apply more firmly. to prevent shifting to REVERSE (R) by mistake. Push the gear selector Note: Never drive with your foot resting on the downward and shift to REVERSE (R). When the brake pedal is depressed clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially A natural driving posture can be hard or depressed more quickly, the engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear achieved by lightly gripping the gear pedal will feel softer but the brakes will on the clutch. selector from the side without having to apply more firmly. This is a normal rest your elbow on the center console. effect of the brake assist operation and does not indicate a malfunction. To engage the gears, press the clutch If shifting to REVERSE (R) is difficult, pedal fully and put the gear selector shift back into neutral, release the When the brake pedal is depressed into the required position. The diagram clutch pedal, and try again. hard or depressed more quickly, a for gear engagement is shown on the Note: A certain amount of noise from motor/pump operation noise may be knob. the transmission is normal. This noise heard. This is a normal effect of the can be most noticeable when the brake assist and does not indicate a vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the malfunction. clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), The brake assist equipment does but it may also be heard when driving. not supersede the functionality of the The noise may also be more noticeable vehicle's main braking system. when the transmission is warm. This 155 noise is normal and is not an indication AUTOMATIC When leaving the vehicle, always make of a problem with your clutch or TRANSMISSION — IF sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, transmission. EQUIPPED remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. With Parking Sensor System Shift Interlock When the gear selector is shifted to the Never leave children alone in a vehicle, REVERSE (R) position with the ignition This vehicle is equipped with an or with access to an unlocked vehicle. placed in the ON mode, the parking interlock system that holds the Allowing children to be in a vehicle transmission gear selector in PARK (P) unattended is dangerous for a number of sensor system is activated an audible reasons. A child or others could be sound is heard. unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN Caution! brake pedal or the transmission gear mode (engine running or not) and the selector. brake pedal must be pressed. Do not leave the key fob in or near the Keep your foot off the clutch pedal vehicle (or in a location accessible to except when shifting gears. Also, do not children), and do not leave the ignition in use the clutch to hold the vehicle on an hill Warning! the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could or grade. Riding the clutch will cause operate power windows, other controls, or STARTING AND OPERATING needless clutch wear and damage. move the vehicle. It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Do not apply any excessive lateral force NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher to the gear selector when changing from than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly fifth to fourth gear. This could lead to the pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could Caution! accidental selection of second gear, which accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. could result in damage to the You could lose control of the vehicle and transmission. hit someone or something. Only shift into Damage to the transmission may occur if gear when the engine is idling normally the following precautions are not observed: Make sure the vehicle comes to a and your foot is firmly pressing the brake Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE complete stop before shifting to REVERSE pedal. only after the vehicle has come to a (R). Shifting to REVERSE (R) while the complete stop. vehicle is still moving may damage the Unintended movement of a vehicle transmission. could injure those in or near the vehicle. As Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, with all vehicles, you should never exit a NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is Reverse can only be engaged when the vehicle while the engine is running. Before above idle speed. vehicle is completely stationary. With the exiting a vehicle, always apply the park engine running, wait at least two seconds brake, shift the transmission into PARK, Before shifting into any gear, make sure with the clutch pedal fully pressed before and turn the ignition OFF. When the your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. engaging reverse to prevent damage to ignition is in the OFF mode, the the gears. transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. 156 The gear selector must be in PARK (P) Note: Even if you intend to use the or NEUTRAL (N) to operate the starter. automatic transmission functions as a Warning! The transmission gear selector has traditional automatic, you should also PARK (P), REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N), be aware that you can inadvertently DRIVE (D), and MANUAL (M)(+/–) shift shift into manual shift mode and an Never use the PARK position as a positions. inappropriate gear may be retained as substitute for the park brake. Always apply The transmission may be shifted freely the vehicle speed increases. If you the park brake fully when parked to guard notice the engine speed going higher or against vehicle movement and possible from REVERSE (R), to NEUTRAL (N), to injury or damage. DRIVE (D), to MANUAL (M)(+/–). hear the engine racing, confirm you have not accidentally slipped into Your vehicle could move and injure you manual shift mode (refer to “Manual and others if it is not in PARK. Check by Shift Mode” paragraph in this section). trying to move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make Shift Position Indication sure the transmission is in PARK before The gear selector position (PRNDM) is exiting the vehicle. illuminated when the ignition is placed It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or in the ON mode. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher Note: If one of the following actions is than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly performed, the gear selector position is pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could displayed for five minutes even if the accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. ignition is placed in a mode other than You could lose control of the vehicle and ON. hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally The ignition is placed in the OFF and your foot is firmly pressing the brake mode. pedal. The driver's door is opened. Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As Gear Position Indication with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before In MANUAL (M) shift mode, the “M” of exiting a vehicle, always come to a the shift position indication illuminates complete stop, then apply the park brake, and the number of the selected gear is 05210200LHD12AT001 shift the transmission into PARK, turn the Gear Selector And Pattern displayed. ignition OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key Gear Selector Positions removal) position (or, with pushbutton PARK (P) start, when the ignition is in the OFF mode), the transmission is locked in PARK, PARK (P) locks the transmission and securing the vehicle against unwanted prevents the driveshaft from rotating. movement. 157 When leaving the vehicle, always make Note: sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, Shifting into PARK (P), NEUTRAL Warning! remove the key fob from the vehicle, and (N) or REVERSE (R) while the vehicle is lock the vehicle. moving can damage your Never leave children alone in a vehicle, transmission. Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn or with access to an unlocked vehicle. off the ignition to coast down a hill. These Allowing children to be in a vehicle Shifting into DRIVE (D) or REVERSE are unsafe practices that limit your unattended is dangerous for a number of (R) when the engine is running faster response to changing traffic or road reasons. A child or others could be than idle can damage the conditions. You might lose control of the seriously or fatally injured. Children should transmission. vehicle and have a collision. be warned not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear Note: Do not shift into NEUTRAL (N) selector. REVERSE (R) when driving the vehicle. Doing so will Do not leave the key fob in or near the This range is for moving the vehicle damage the transmission. Press the vehicle (or in a location accessible to backward. Shift into REVERSE only parking brake or depress the brake children), and do not leave the ignition (in a after the vehicle has come to a pedal before moving the gear selector vehicle equipped with pushbutton start) in complete stop. from NEUTRAL (N) to prevent the the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate

STARTING AND OPERATING With Parking Sensor system power windows, other controls, or move : when vehicle from moving unexpectedly. the gear selector is shifted to the the vehicle. DRIVE (D) REVERSE (R) position with the ignition placed in the ON mode, the parking DRIVE (D) is the normal driving position. From a stop, the transmission will Caution! sensor system is activated and an audible sound is heard. automatically shift through all available gears. NEUTRAL (N) Before moving the transmission gear MANUAL (M) selector out of PARK, you must turn the In NEUTRAL (N), the wheels and transmission are not locked. The vehicle MANUAL (M) is the manual shift mode ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also position. Gears can be shifted up or press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage will roll freely even on the slightest to the gear selector could result. incline unless the parking brake or down by operating the gear selector. brakes are applied. (Refer to “Manual Shift Mode” DO NOT race the engine when shifting paragraph in this section). from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.

158 Shift-Lock System 2. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the Override Access Hole, and Warning! The shift-lock system prevents shifting push the override button down. out of PARK (P) unless the brake pedal is depressed. Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive To shift from PARK (P): wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. 2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode. Active Adaptive Shift 3. Press and hold the lock-release (AAS) button on the gear selector. Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) automatically controls the transmission 4. Move the gear selector. 05210206-12A-002 shift points to best suit the road When the ignition is in the ACC or OFF Shift Lock Override Access Hole conditions and driver input. This mode, the gear selector cannot be improves driving feel. shifted from PARK (P). 3. Push and hold the lock release button on the gear selector and move The transmission may switch to AAS The ignition cannot be placed in the the gear selector. mode when driving up and down OFF mode if the gear selector is not in slopes, cornering, driving at high PARK (P). 4. Take the vehicle to your authorized elevations, or depressing the dealer. accelerator pedal quickly while the gear Shift Lock Override selector is in the DRIVE (D) position. If the gear selector will not move from Depending on the road and driving PARK (P) using the proper shift conditions/vehicle operations, gear procedure, continue to press the brake shifting could be delayed or not occur, pedal and proceed as follows: however, this does not indicate a 1. Remove the shift lock override cover problem because the AAS mode will using a cloth wrapped flat head maintain the optimum gear position. screwdriver.

159 For Some Models To change to MANUAL (M) shift mode, Proceed as follows: shift the gear selector from DRIVE (D) to MANUAL (M). To return to automatic 1. Push the lock release button on the shift mode, shift the gear selector from gear selector while also pushing down MANUAL (M) to DRIVE (D). on the Shift Lock Override button. You can shift between DRIVE (D) and 2. Move the gear selector. MANUAL (M) mode at any time, without taking your foot off the accelerator. 3. Take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Note:

If you change to manual shift mode 05210207-12A-002 when the vehicle is stopped, the gear Instrument Panel will shift to M1. 1 — Manual Shift Mode Indication If you change to manual shift mode 2 — Gear Position Indication while the vehicle is moving it will remain in the current gear until a manual shift request is made. Manually Shifting Up/Down STARTING AND OPERATING To shift up to a higher gear, tap the Indicators gear selector rearward once (or tap the Manual Shift Mode Indication [+] shift paddle on the steering wheel, if 005210206-122-001 In manual shift mode, the “M” of the equipped). Shift Lock Override shift position indication in the To shift down to a lower gear, tap the Manual Shift Mode instrument panel illuminates. gear selector forward once (or tap the [-] shift paddle on the steering wheel, if The manual shift mode gives you the Gear Position Indication equipped). feel of driving a manual transmission The numeral for the selected gear vehicle by allowing you to operate the illuminates. gear selector manually. This allows you to control engine rpm and torque to the drive wheels much like a manual transmission when more control is desired.

160 Note: Note: Because Paddle mode is only Climbing steep grades from a stop temporary, use of the MANUAL (M) If a requested downshift would To climb a steep grade from a stopped position is recommended if you need to cause the engine to over-speed, that position: drive the vehicle in a particular gear for shift will not occur. long periods. 1. Press the brake pedal. The system will ignore attempts to Driving Tips 2. Shift to DRIVE (D) or M1, depending upshift at too low of a vehicle speed. on the load weight and grade Overtaking Do not drive the vehicle with the steepness. tachometer needle in the red zone For extra power when passing another 3. Release the brake pedal while while in manual shift mode. vehicle or climbing steep grades, press the accelerator fully. The transmission gradually accelerating. During deceleration, the will shift to a lower gear, depending on Descending steep grades transmission may automatically shift vehicle speed. down depending on vehicle speed. When descending a steep grade, shift Note: to lower gears, depending on load You can start out, from a stop, in weight and grade steepness. first or second gear. Tapping the gear The accelerator pedal may initially selector rearward (+) (at a stop) will feel heavy as it is being pressed, then Descend slowly, using the brakes only allow starting in second gear. Starting feel lighter as it is pressed further. This occasionally to prevent them from out in second gear can be helpful in change in pedal force controls whether overheating. snowy or icy conditions. or not kickdown should be performed. Paddle Mode — If While the gear selector is in the Equipped MANUAL (M) position and the Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is turned off, Tapping one of the steering manual shift mode does not switch to wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-), if automatic shift mode even if the equipped, while the gear selector is in accelerator pedal is completely DRIVE (D), will activate Paddle Mode (a pressed. Tap the gear selector forward temporary manual mode). The current or rearward to select the appropriate gear will be displayed in the instrument gear. cluster, with the "M" also illuminated. The transmission will revert back to normal operation (if the gear selector remains in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal activity.

161 SPEED CONTROL Activation / Deactivation Speed Control Note: When the ignition is cycled OFF, This is an electronically controlled the system status before it was turned driving assistance feature that allows off is stored. For example, if the ignition the desired vehicle speed to be is cycled OFF while the Speed Control maintained, without having to press the is operating, the system will be accelerator pedal. operable when the ignition is cycled ON This feature can be used at a speed the next time. above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long Activating Speed Control stretches of dry, straight roads with few variations, such as highways. Push the ON button located on the right side of the steering wheel with the It is therefore not recommended to use other Speed Control buttons. The this feature on city roads with traffic. Do warning light (amber) in the instrument not use it in town. cluster will illuminate.

STARTING AND OPERATING Warning!

Do not use Speed Control under the 05100101-877-877AB following conditions: Speed Control Buttons hilly terrain steep inclines Warning! heavy or unsteady traffic slippery or winding roads Leaving the Speed Control system on similar restrictions that require when not in use is dangerous. You could inconsistent speed accidentally set the system or cause it to Using the Speed Control under the go faster than you want. You could lose following conditions is dangerous and control and have an accident. Always leave could result in loss of vehicle control. the system off when you are not using it.

162 Deactivating Speed Control Automatic Transmission: the The vehicle’s set speed is displayed in Push the OFF/CAN button. The gear selector is in the PARK or the instrument cluster. NEUTRAL position. warning light (amber) in the Increasing Speed instrument cluster turns off. Manual Transmission: the gear To increase speed using the Speed When A Speed Has Been Set:the selector is in the NEUTRAL position or Control buttons: warning light (green) in the when the clutch is disengaged (clutch instrument cluster is illuminated, push is depressed). Push the RES (+) button and hold it, and hold the OFF/CAN button or push The parking brake is applied. your vehicle will accelerate. Release the the OFF/CAN button twice to button at the desired speed. deactivate. Release the SET (-) button at the When A Speed Has Not Been Set: desired speed, otherwise the speed will Push the RES (+) button and release the warning light (amber) in the continue decreasing while the SET (-) it immediately, to adjust the set speed. instrument cluster is illuminated, push button is pushed and held (except Multiple pushes of the button will the OFF/CAN button to deactivate. when the accelerator pedal is increase the set speed according to the depressed). Setting A Desired Speed number of times it is pushed. Note: Proceed as follows: Increasing speed with a single RES Release the SET (-) button at the (+) button operation: 1. Activate the Speed Control device desired speed, otherwise the speed If the instrument cluster display for by pushing the ON button. The cruise will continue decreasing while the SET vehicle speed is indicated in mph: warning light (amber) illuminates. (-) button is pushed and held (except speed will increase in 1 mph 2. Accelerate to the desired speed, when the accelerator pedal is increments. depressed). which must be more than 25 mph If the instrument cluster display for (40 km/h). On a steep grade, the vehicle may vehicle speed is indicated in km/h: 3. Set the Speed Control by pushing momentarily slow down while speed will increase in 1 km/h the SET (-) button at the desired speed. ascending, or speed up while increments. descending. The Speed Control is set at the To increase speed using moment the SET (-) button is pushed. The Speed Control will cancel if the accelerator pedal: Release the accelerator pedal vehicle speed decreases below simultaneously. The warning light 16 mph (25 km/h) when climbing a Press the accelerator pedal to (green) illuminates. steep incline. accelerate to the desired speed. Note: The Speed Control setting The Speed Control may cancel at Push the SET (-) button and release it cannot be performed under the about 9 mph (15 km/h) below the immediately. This new set speed will be following conditions: preset speed such as when climbing a saved. long, steep incline. 163 Note: Accelerate the vehicle to speed Resume Speed If the RES (+) button is pushed when up temporarily with the accelerator the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) If any other method besides the pedal when the Speed Control is on. or higher, the system reverts to the OFF/CAN button was used to cancel Increasing the speed will not interfere previously set speed. cruising speed (such as applying the with, or change the set speed. Take brake pedal or pressing in the clutch Note: If any of the following conditions your foot off the accelerator to return to pedal) and the system is still activated, occur, the Speed Control system is the set speed. the most recent set speed will temporarily canceled: Decreasing Speed automatically resume when the RES (+) The parking brake is applied. button is pushed. To decrease speed using the Speed Automatic Transmission: the If vehicle speed is below 25 mph Control buttons: gear selector is in the PARK or (40 km/h), increase the vehicle speed NEUTRAL position. Push the SET (-) button and hold it, up to 16 mph (25 km/h) or more and the vehicle will gradually slow down. push RES (+) button. Manual Transmission: the gear Release the button at the desired selector is in the NEUTRAL position. Temporarily Canceling speed. The System Automatic Transmission: the Push the SET (-) button and release Speed Control cannot be canceled

STARTING AND OPERATING while driving in manual mode (gear it immediately to adjust the set speed. Warning! Multiple button pushes will decrease selector shifted from D to M position). Therefore, engine braking will not be the set speed according to the number applied even if the transmission is of times it is pushed. Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could shifted down to a lower gear. If Decreasing speed with a single SET accidentally set the system or cause it to deceleration is required, lower the set (-) button operation: go faster than you want. You could lose speed or press the brake pedal. control and have an accident. Always leave If the instrument cluster display for the system OFF when you are not using it. When the Speed Control system is vehicle speed is indicated in mph: the temporarily canceled, the speed cannot speed will decrease in 1 mph be reset. To temporarily cancel the system, use increments. one of these methods: If the instrument cluster display for Slightly press the brake pedal. vehicle speed is indicated in km/h: the speed will decrease in 1 km/h Press the clutch pedal (if equipped increments. with a manual transmission). Push OFF/CAN button.

164 RADAR SENSORS — Vehicles are shipped with the direction of the radar sensors adjusted for each IF EQUIPPED Caution! vehicle to a loaded vehicle condition so Rear Radar Sensors that the radar sensors detect The following systems use the rear If the rear bumper receives a severe approaching vehicles correctly. If the radar sensors: impact, the system may no longer operate direction of the radar sensors has normally. Stop the system immediately and changed, contact an authorized dealer. Blind Spot Monitoring System (BSM) contact your authorized dealer. The radar sensors are regulated by the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) relevant radio wave laws of the country The radar sensors function by detecting The detection ability of the radar in which the vehicle is driven. If the the radio waves reflected off of a vehicle sensors has limitations. In the following vehicle is driven abroad, authorization approaching from the rear, or an cases, the detection ability may be from the country in which the vehicle is obstruction, sent from the radar sensor. decreased, and the system may not driven may be required. operate normally: The radar sensors are installed inside Note: the rear bumper, one each on the left The rear bumper near the radar For repairs or replacement of the and right sides. sensors has been damaged. radar sensors, bumper repairs, paint Snow, ice or mud has adhered to the work, or replacement near the radar radar sensors on the rear bumper. sensors, consult an authorized dealer. Operating in weather conditions such Turn off the radar system when as rain, snow and fog. pulling a trailer or while an accessory, Note: Under the following conditions, such as a bicycle carrier, is installed to the radar sensors cannot detect objects the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise, the or it may be difficult to detect them: radio waves emitted by the radar will be blocked causing the system to not Stationary objects on a road or a operate normally. road side such as small, two-wheeled 07080915112112 vehicles, bicycles, pedestrians, Radar Sensor Locations animals, and shopping carts. Always keep the surface of the rear Vehicle shapes which do not reflect bumper near the radar sensors clean so radar waves well such as empty trailers that the radar sensors operate normally. with a low vehicle height and sports Also, do not apply items such as cars. stickers.

165 REAR PARK ASSIST — The system is equipped with an assist The sensor area is frozen (operation IF EQUIPPED device to notify the driver of the will return to normal when the ice is approximate distance from the vehicle thawed). Rear Park Assist to the surrounding obstruction using a The sensor is covered by a hand or audible alert. excessive force has been applied to Warning! the bumper. The vehicle is on a steep incline. Do not rely completely on the parking Under extremely hot or cold sensor system and be sure to confirm the weather conditions. safety around your vehicle visually when driving. This system can assist the driver in The vehicle is driven on bumps, operating the vehicle in the forward and inclines, gravel, or grass covered backward directions while parking. The roads. detection ranges of the sensors are limited, therefore, driving the vehicle while Anything which generates

relying only on the system may cause an 05200100-121-001 ultrasound is near the vehicle, such as accident. Always confirm the safety Parking Sensor Locations another vehicle's horn, the engine STARTING AND OPERATING around your vehicle visually when driving. sound of a motorcycle, the air brakes Note: Parking and other potentially dangerous of a large-sized vehicle, or another maneuvers are, however, always the Do not install any accessories within vehicle's sensors. driver’s responsibility. When performing the detection ranges of the sensors. It The vehicle is driven in heavy rain or these operations, always make sure that may affect the system operation. in road conditions causing water there are no other people (especially children) or animals on the route you want Depending on the type of splash. to drive into. The parking sensors are an obstruction and the surrounding A antenna for a radio transmitter is aid for the driver, but the driver must never conditions, the detection range of a installed to the vehicle. allow their attention to lapse during sensor may narrow, or the sensors potentially dangerous maneuvers, even may not be able to detect The vehicle is moving towards a tall those executed at low speeds. obstructions. or square curbstone. The system may not operate An obstruction is too close to the The Rear Park Assist System uses four normally under the following sensor. ultrasonic sensors (two rear sensors conditions: and two rear corner sensors) to detect The following types of obstructions obstructions around the vehicle while Mud, ice, or snow adhered to the may not be detected: parking the vehicle in a garage or sensor area (operation will return to Thin objects such as wire or rope. during parallel parking when the gear normal when removed). selector is in REVERSE. 166 Things which absorb sonic waves The beeper which indicates a Sensor Detection Range easily such as rain or snow. system malfunction may not be heard The sensors detect obstructions within if the ambient temperature is extremely Angular shaped objects. the following range: cold, or mud, ice, or snow adheres to Very tall objects, and those which the sensor area. Remove any foreign Lateral Detection Range: arewideatthetop. material from the sensor area. 19 inches (50 cm) Small, short objects. When installing a trailer hitch, Rear Detection Range: 59 inches contact an authorized dealer. (150 cm) Obstructions under the bumper may not be detected. Obstructions System Operation that are lower than the bumper or thin Caution! which may have been initially detected The system is operational when the but are no longer detected as the ignition is cycled ON and the gear vehicle approaches more closely. Only have repairs on the bumper in the selector is shifted to REVERSE. When area of the sensors carried out by your an audible signal sounds, the system is Always have the system inspected authorized dealer. Repairs on the bumper enabled for use. by an authorized dealer if any force is that are not carried out properly may applied to the bumpers, even in a compromise the operation of the parking minor accident. If the sensors have sensors. been repositioned in any way, they Only have the bumpers repainted or any cannot detect obstructions. retouches to the paint work in the area of The system may have a malfunction the sensors carried out by your authorized if the audible signal does not operate. dealer. Incorrect paint application could Contact an authorized dealer. affect the operation of the parking sensors.

167 Parking Sensor Audible Alert The audible alert will sound while the system is operating according to the following chart: Rear Sensor

Distance Between Vehicle And Distance Detection Area Audible Alert (*) Obstruction Farthest distance Approx. 59 - 23 inches (150 cm - 60 cm) Slow intermittent sound Far distance Approx. 23 -17 inches (60 - 45 cm) Medium intermittent sound Middle distance Approx. 17 -13 inches (45 - 35 cm) Fast intermittent sound Close distance Within approx. 13 inches (35 cm) Continuous sound (*) The rate at which the intermittent audible alert increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction. Rear Corner Sensor

STARTING AND OPERATING Distance Between Vehicle And Distance Detection Area Audible Alert (**) Obstruction Far distance Approx. 19 - 14 inches (50 - 38 cm) Medium intermittent sound Middle distance Approx. 14 - 9.8 inches (38 - 25 cm) Fast intermittent sound Close distance Within approx. 9.8 inches (25 cm) Continuous sound (**) The rate at which the intermittent audible alert increases as the vehicle approaches the obstruction. Note: If an obstruction is detected in a zone for six seconds or more, the audible alert stops, unless the obstruction is within the close distance zone. If the same obstruction is detected in another zone, the corresponding audible alert is heard.

168 When A Warning Alert Is Activated The system notifies the driver of an obstacle by activating the audible alert.

Beep How To Check The system may have a malfunction. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as The audible alert is not heard. possible. When the engine is cycled ON, or if the parking sensor Remove any foreign material from the sensor area. If the system continues to sound detects a problem while driving, an intermittent audible the audible alert, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. alert is heard one to four times(*). ( * ) The number of times the audible alert is heard changes depending on the malfunction location.

169 PARKVIEW REAR Note: BACKUP CAMERA — When the gear selector is moved Warning! IF EQUIPPED from the REVERSE position and put in Operation any other position, the screen returns to the previous display mode. Always use extreme caution and verify The camera is located on the trunk lid, the real conditions of the area behind the above the license plate. When parking in REVERSE, take vehicle. Backing up while looking only at care over obstacles that may be above the screen is dangerous and can lead to or under the camera’s display range. an accident or collision with an object. The rear-view monitor is simply a system to aid When the display is cold, the reversing. The view on the display can images could be more blurred than show a situation that differs from the real usual, making it difficult to check the one. conditions of the area around the Do not use the rear-view monitor under vehicle. Always use extreme caution the following conditions: and verify the real conditions of the area behind the vehicle with you own Roads covered in ice or snow. eyes. When snow chains are mounted or the

STARTING AND OPERATING temporary space saver spare wheel is 07040110-124-008 If water, snow, or mud is deposited fitted. Rear Camera Location on the camera lens, clean it with a soft cloth. If this does not clean it, use a The rear trunk is not completely closed. Switching The Display To Rear View mild detergent. The vehicle is on a sloping road. Camera Mode: Place the gear selector in the REVERSE If the camera is subjected to abrupt Using the rear-view monitor under the position, after the ignition is cycled ON, temperature changes (from hot to cold conditions listed above is dangerous and or vice versa), the rear-view monitor can cause damage to persons and/or the to switch the display to rear-view vehicle. camera mode. may not work properly. When replacing tires, contact an authorized dealer. Replacing the tires can cause the guide lines that appear on the display to be misaligned.

170 Display Caution! Note: The images on the display can show a situation that differs from the actual view. Do not apply excessive force to the camera. You could alter the position and angle of the camera. Do not disassemble, modify or remove it as this could compromise the seal. The camera’s cover is made of plastic. Do not apply degreasers, organic solvents, wax or glass polish to the camera’s cover. If some substance ends up on the cover, clean it off immediately with a soft cloth. Do not rub the cover too much, nor polish it with abrasive compounds or hard 07080913987987 brushes. The cover could be damaged Camera View and create image problems. 1—BlockedArea If the vehicle has been involved in a 2 — Rear Bumper frontal, lateral or rear collision, the rear parking camera’s alignment (location or 07080913988988 installation angle) may have been altered. The field of view varies depending on Camera Field Of View Contact a authorized dealer. the vehicle and the road conditions. The field of view is limited. Objects below The distance displayed by the camera If the display shows "no video signal", the bumper or around it’s sides may not view differs from the actual view, as the there may be a problem with the camera. be displayed. rear parking camera is equipped with a Contact your authorized dealer. special lens. The camera could capture any non-standard accessories installed on the vehicle. Do not install non-standard accessories that could interfere with the camera’s view, such as lights or reflectors.

171 Note: If it is difficult to see the display Looking At The Display under the following conditions, it does The vehicle width guide lines are Warning! not mean that there is a malfunction: displayed on the screen as a reference In dark areas. to show the width of the vehicle compared to the width of the parking Drivers must be careful when backing up When the temperature around the space to be entered while in REVERSE. even when using the ParkView Rear Back lens is particularly high or low. Up Camera. Always check carefully behind Vehicle Width Guide Lines: these your vehicle, and be sure to check for When the camera is wet from rain guide lines serve as a reference pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, or due to a high atmospheric humidity. showing the width of the vehicle. obstructions, or blind spots before backing When there is some foreign deposit up. You are responsible for the safety of Distance Guide Lines: these lines your surroundings and must continue to around the camera, such as mud. indicate the approximate distance from pay attention while backing up. Failure to When the camera lens reflects the rear of the vehicle (the rear edge of do so can result in serious injury or death. sunlight or a headlight beam. the bumper). The red and yellow lines indicates the points at about 19 inches The image on the display may be Rear View Camera (50 cm), for the red line and 39 inches delayed if the temperature around the Operation (1 m) for the yellow line, from the rear

STARTING AND OPERATING camera is low. bumper (central point of each line). The operating modes of the rear view camera when the vehicle is in REVERSE vary depending on traffic, Caution! road, and vehicle conditions. Also, the amount of turning and the duration of To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView the maneuver vary depending on the should only be used as a parking aid. The conditions. Therefore, it is important to ParkView camera is unable to view every check the surrounding conditions and obstacle or object in your drive path. adapt the steering as necessary. To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle Note: The images from the rear must be driven slowly when using parking camera shown on the monitor ParkView to be able to stop in time when are reversed (mirror image). an obstacle is seen. It is recommended 07080913-111-111 that the driver look frequently over his/her Vehicle Width Guide Lines 1. Place the gear selector in the shoulder when using ParkView. REVERSE position to switch the display to rear view camera mode. 2. Check the surrounding conditions and begin backing up.

172 5. Once the guide lines are parallel, 6. When the gear selector is moved straighten the steering wheel and from the REVERSE position and put in reverse slowly into the parking space. any other position, the screen returns to Continue to check the vehicle’s the previous display mode. surroundings and stop in the best position possible (if the parking space Note: has dividing lines, check that the vehicle Since there may be some width guide lines are parallel with them). differences between the displayed image and the real conditions, always visually inspect the area behind the vehicle, and the surrounding areas, to make sure they are completely clear. In the image of the parking space (or garage) shown above, the rear of the vehicle and the distance guide lines may seem parallel on the monitor, but may not be when the parked vehicle is inspected. When you enter a parking space

07080913989989 with a dividing line only on one side, Entering Parking Spot the dividing line and the vehicle width guide lines may appear parallel on the A — Rear Camera View monitor, but may not be when the B — Check Surrounding Area parked vehicle is inspected.

3. Once the vehicle starts to enter the parking space, proceed slowly in

REVERSE while keeping the vehicle 07080913990990 width guide lines away from the two Entering Parking Spot sides of the parking space. A — Rear Camera View 4. Continue to adjust the steering B — Check Surrounding Area wheel until the vehicle width guide lines are parallel with the two sides of the parking space. 173 Road Conditions And When The Road Behind The Displayed Image Vehicle Slopes Steeply: There are some differences between When the vehicle is on a steep uphill what is shown on the display, and the (downhill) slope, the object on the actual road conditions. screen seems to be further away than it The different perceptions of distance really is. could lead to an accident. The conditions that can lead to the different perceptions of distance, listed below, must be taken into consideration: 07080913993993 When The Vehicle Slopes Due To Downgrade Camera Angle The Weight Of Passengers And Load: 1 — Distance Between The Vehicle And Object Displayed On The Screen When the vehicle is rear heavy, the 2 — Actual Distance Between The Ve- object on the screen seems to be hicle And Object further away than it really is. STARTING AND OPERATING 07080913992992 3 — Appears Closer Than Actual Dis- Downhill Camera Angle tance 1 — Distance Between The Vehicle And 4—ObjectOnScreen Object Displayed On The Screen 5 — Object At Actual Position 2 — Actual Distance Between The Ve- hicle And Object Three Dimensional Object Behind 3 — Appears Farther Than Actual Dis- The Vehicle: tance Since the distance guide line display is 4 — Object At Actual Position based on a flat surface, the distance to 5 — Object On Screen a three dimensional object on the 07080913991991 screen differs from the actual distance. Loaded Vehicle Camera Angle 1 — Object 2 — Variance

174 Adjusting The Image Quality Warning! The image quality can be adjusted with the gear selector in the REVERSE position. Adjusting the rear-view camera image quality must always be done when the Four adjustments can be made: vehicle is stationary. Do not adjust the brightness, contrast, tint and color. Give rear-view camera image quality while attention to the vehicle’s surroundings vehicle driving. Adjusting the image quality while making adjustments: (brightness, contrast, color and tint) of the rear-view camera while driving the vehicle 1. Select the icon on the top left of the is dangerous since it could distract the screen to display the tabs. driver and cause a serious accident. 2. Select the desired tab. 3. Use the cursor to adjust the brightness, contrast, tint and color. If a reset is needed, press the reset button. 4. Select the icon on the top left of the screen to close the tabs.

07080913994994 Three-Dimensional Object Camera View A — Object In View B — Actual Distance To Object C — Appears Farther Than Actual

07080914-111-111 Image Quality Adjustments

175 REFUELING THE While operating on gasoline with an Reformulated Gasoline octane number of 87, hearing a light VEHICLE Many areas of the country require the knocking sound from the engine is not use of cleaner burning gasoline referred Refueling The Vehicle a cause for concern. However, if the to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. engine is heard making a heavy Stop the engine before refueling. Reformulated gasoline contains knocking sound, see your authorized oxygenates and are specifically blended Fuel Requirements dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with to reduce vehicle emissions and Vehicles with catalytic converters or an octane number lower than 87 can improve air quality. oxygen sensors must use ONLY cause engine failure and may void or UNLEADED FUEL, which will reduce not be covered by the New Vehicle The use of reformulated gasoline is exhaust emissions and keep spark plug Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline recommended. Properly blended fouling to a minimum. can cause problems such as hard reformulated gasoline will provide Fuel: Premium unleaded fuel. starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. Octane Rating experience these symptoms, try (Anti-knock index): 91 another brand of gasoline before Gasoline/Oxygenate (R + M)/2 method or considering service for the vehicle. Blends Gasoline blended with oxygenates such above (96 RON or Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded STARTING AND OPERATING as alcohol or ether compounds are above) (U.S. federal gasoline with oxygenates such as generally referred to as oxygenated law requires that ethanol. octane ratings be fuels. posted on gasoline station pumps). The common gasoline blend that can Regular unleaded fuel with an octane be used with your vehicle is ethanol Caution! rating from 87 to 90 (91 to 95 RON) can blended at no more than 15%. Gasoline containing alcohol, such as ethanol or be used, but this will reduce DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing performance slightly, such as reduced methanol, may be marketed under the methanol, or gasoline containing more than engine output, and engine knocking. name "Gasohol". 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane Vehicle damage and problems resulting may result in starting and drivability (91 RON) will negatively affect the from the use of the following may not problems, damage critical fuel system emission control system performance be covered by the New Vehicle Limited components, cause emissions to exceed and could also cause engine knocking Warranty: the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. and serious engine damage. Alcohol containing more than 15% Please observe pump labels as they ethanol. should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline or alcohol containing methanol. Leaded fuel or leaded alcohol. 176 Problems that result from using number without MMT. Gasoline blended active solvents or similar ingredients. gasoline containing more than 15% with MMT reduces spark plug life and These can harm fuel system gasket and ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing reduces emissions system performance diaphragm materials. methanol are not the responsibility of in some vehicles. The manufacturer Fuel System Cautions the manufacturer and may void or not recommends that gasoline without be covered under New Vehicle Limited MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT Warranty. content of gasoline may not be Caution! indicated on the gasoline pump; Do Not Use E-85 In therefore, you should ask your gasoline Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles retailer whether the gasoline contains Follow these guidelines to maintain your Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and vehicle’s performance: compatible with gasoline containing up California reformulated gasoline. The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline Materials Added To Fuel impair engine performance and damage with higher ethanol content may void the emissions control system. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Besides using unleaded gasoline with If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently the proper octane rating, gasolines that An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. catalytic converter to overheat. If you have some or all of these symptoms: notice a pungent burning odor or some Using gasolines that have these Operate in a lean mode. light smoke, your engine may be out of additives will help improve fuel tune or malfunctioning and may require OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” economy, reduce emissions, and immediate service. Contact an authorized on. maintain vehicle performance. dealer for service assistance. Designated TOP TIER Poor engine performance. The use of fuel additives, which are now Detergent Gasoline being sold as octane enhancers, is not Poor cold start and cold drivability. contains a higher level recommended. Most of these products of detergents to further Increased risk for fuel system contain high concentrations of methanol. aide in minimizing Fuel system damage or vehicle component corrosion. engine and fuel system performance problems resulting from the MMT In Gasoline deposits. When use of such fuels or additives is not the available, the usage of TOP TIER responsibility of the manufacturer and may Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Detergent gasoline is recommended. void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese- Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of containing metallic additive that is TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. blended into some gasoline to increase Indiscriminate use of fuel system Note: Intentional tampering with the octane. Gasoline blended with MMT cleaning agents should be avoided. emissions control system can result in provides no performance advantage Many of these materials intended for civil penalties being assessed against beyond gasoline of the same octane gum and varnish removal may contain you. 177 Carbon Monoxide When the fuel filler door end is pressed Fuel Filler Cap Warnings with the doors unlocked, the fuel filler To remove the fuel filler cap, turn it door rises. counterclockwise. Attach the removed Warning! cap to the inner side of the fuel filler door.

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If 04040201-12A-002 the vehicle is stopped in an open area with Fuel Filler Door the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to The fuel filler door operates in 04040202-12A-001 Fuel Filler Cap STARTING AND OPERATING force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. conjunction with the door Guard against carbon monoxide with locking/unlocking mechanism. To close the fuel filler cap, turn it proper maintenance. Have the exhaust To close, press the fuel filler door until a clockwise until a click is heard. system inspected every time the vehicle is click sound is heard. raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with Note: all side windows fully open. Warning! Make sure to lock both the doors when leaving the vehicle. Refueling Procedure Never have any smoking materials lit in Lock the doors after closing the fuel or near the vehicle when the gas cap is Fuel Filler Door filler door. If the fuel filler door is closed removed or the tank is being filled. Note: Always use only a designated after locking the doors, the fuel filler Never add fuel when the engine is FCA fuel filler cap or an approved door cannot be locked. running. This is in violation of most state equivalent, available at your authorized and federal fire regulations and may cause dealer. The wrong cap can result in a the MIL to turn on. serious malfunction of the fuel and A fire may result if gasoline is pumped emission control systems. into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. 178 Do not apply any object/plug to the end VEHICLE LOADING of the filler which is not provided for the Certification Label vehicle. The use of non-compliant objects/plugs could cause a pressure As required by National Highway Traffic increase inside the tank, resulting in Safety Administration regulations, your dangerous situations. vehicle has a certification label affixed to Do not use a mobile phone near the the driver's side door or pillar. refueling pump: risk of fire. This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Emergency Fuel Filler Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Door Release 08100100-121-002 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A If the battery is discharged, the fuel filler Trunk Interior Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is door cannot be opened. In this case, 1 — Plastic Fasteners included on this label and indicates the the fuel filler door can be opened by 2 — Cover Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. taking care of the discharged battery The bar code that appears on the situation. bottom of the label is your VIN. If the fuel filler door cannot be opened 2. Partially peel back the cover inside even if the discharged battery situation the trunk, then pull the emergency Gross Vehicle Weight Rating has been resolved, the electrical system release lever. (GVWR) may have a malfunction. In this case, the fuel filler door can be The GVWR is the total permissible opened using the following procedure weight of your vehicle including driver, as an emergency measure: passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum 1. Open the trunk and pull the center capacities of front and rear axle section of the plastic fastener and systems (GAWR). Total load must be remove the fastener. limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

08100100-122-001 Fuel Door Emergency Release 3 — Emergency Release Lever

179 Payload Rim Size The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to The payload of a vehicle is defined as This is the rim size that is appropriate insure that the GVWR has not been the allowable load weight a truck can for the tire size listed. exceeded. The weight on the front and carry, including the weight of the driver, Inflation Pressure rear of the vehicle should then be all passengers, options and cargo. determined separately to be sure that Gross Axle Weight Rating This is the cold tire inflation pressure for the load is properly distributed over the your vehicle for all loading conditions up front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle (GAWR) to full GAWR. may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded The GAWR is the maximum permissible Curb Weight load on the front and rear axles. The but the total load is within the specified load must be distributed in the cargo The curb weight of a vehicle is defined GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted area so that the GAWR of each axle is as the total weight of the vehicle with all from front to rear or rear to front as not exceeded. fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full appropriate until the specified weight Each axle GAWR is determined by the capacity conditions, and with no limitations are met. Store the heavier components in the system with the occupants or cargo loaded into the items down low and be sure that the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, vehicle. The front and rear curb weight weight is distributed equally. Stow all

STARTING AND OPERATING springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles values are determined by weighing your loose items securely before driving. or suspension components sometimes vehicle on a commercial scale before Improper weight distributions can have specified by purchasers for increased any occupants or cargo are added. an adverse effect on the way your durability does not necessarily increase vehicle steers and handles and the way the vehicle's GVWR. Loading the brakes operate. Tire Size The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at Caution! The tire size on the Vehicle Certification the ground can best be determined by Label represents the actual tire size on weighing it when it is loaded and ready your vehicle. Replacement tires must be for operation. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than equal to the load capacity of this tire the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can size. break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

180 TOWING TRAILERS DRIVING TIPS Follow the maintenance schedule and contact your authorized dealer. Trailer Towing Engine Break-In Recommendation Use the air conditioner only when Your car is not designed for towing. necessary. No special break-in is necessary, but a Recreational Towing few precautions in the first 620 miles Slow down on rough roads. An example of "recreational towing" is (1000 km) may add to the performance, Keep the tires properly inflated. towing your vehicle behind a economy, and life of the vehicle: motorhome. Do not carry unnecessary weight. The transmission is not designed for Do not race the engine. Do not rest your foot on the brake towing this vehicle on all four wheels. Do not maintain one constant speed, pedal while driving. either slow or fast, for a long period of Keep the wheels in correct Caution! time. alignment. Do not drive constantly at full-throttle or high engine rpm for extended Keep windows closed at high DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to periods of time. speeds. the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make sure the drive Avoid unnecessary hard stops. Slow down when driving in wheels are OFF the ground. crosswinds and headwinds. Avoid full-throttle starts. Towing this vehicle in violation of the Hazardous Driving above requirements can cause severe Saving Fuel And transmission damage. Damage from Protection Of The When driving on ice or in water, snow, improper towing is not covered under the Environment mud, sand, or similar hazards: New Vehicle Limited Warranty. How you operate your vehicle Be cautious and allow extra distance determines how far it will travel on a for braking. tank of fuel. Avoid sudden braking and sudden Use these suggestions to help save fuel maneuvering. and reduce CO : 2 Do not pump the brakes. Continue to Avoid long warm-ups. Once the press down on the brake pedal. engine runs smoothly, begin driving. If you get stuck, select a lower gear Avoid fast starts. and accelerate slowly. Do not spin the Drive at lower speeds. rear wheels. Anticipate when to apply the brakes (avoid sudden braking). 181 For more traction in starting on the floor, remove the floor mat from the slippery surfaces such as ice or packed Warning! vehicle and place the floor mat in your snow, use sand, rock salt, chains, trunk. carpeting, or other nonslip material ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat under the rear wheels. An improperly attached, damaged, folded, on the passenger’s side floor area. or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat Note: Use snow chains only on the ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall rear wheels. fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or or slide into the driver’s side floor area Floor Mat Safety clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle when the vehicle is moving. Objects can Information control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or become trapped under accelerator, brake, DEATH: or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of Always use floor mats designed to fit ALWAYS securely attach your floor vehicle control. the footwell of your vehicle. Use only mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT NEVER place any objects under the floor floor mats that leave the pedal area install your floor mat upside down or turn mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These unobstructed and that are firmly your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm objects could change the position of the secured so that they cannot slip out of mat is secured using the floor mat floor mat and may cause interference with position and interfere with the pedals or fasteners on a regular basis. the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. impair safe operation of your vehicle in ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING If the vehicle carpet has been removed STARTING AND OPERATING other ways. FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE and re-installed, always properly attach before installing any other floor mat. carpet to the floor and check the floor mat NEVER install or stack an additional floor fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. mat on top of an existing floor mat. Fully depress each pedal to check for ONLY install floor mats designed to fit interference with the accelerator, brake, or your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. cannot be properly attached and secured It is recommended to only use mild soap to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be and water to clean your floor mats. After replaced, only use a FCA approved floor cleaning, always check your floor mat has mat for the specific make, model, and year been properly installed and is secured to of your vehicle. your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on by lightly pulling mat. 04090400-USA-001 the driver’s side floor area. To check for Floor Mat Retention Post Location interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to

182 Rocking The Vehicle Winter Driving Do not open or close the soft top when Note: Too much rocking may cause Carry emergency gear, including tire the temperature is 41 °F (5 °C) or less. engine overheating, transmission failure, chains, window scraper, flares, a small The material of the soft top could be and tire damage. shovel, jumper leads, and a small bag damaged by freezing. of sand or salt. Do not apply excessive force to a If you must rock the vehicle to free it window scraper when removing ice or from snow, sand or mud, depress the Contact an authorized dealer to check frozen snow on the mirror glass and accelerator slightly and slowly move the the following: windshield. gear selector from 1 (D) to R. Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in Never use warm or hot water for the radiator. removing snow or ice from windows Warning! Inspect the battery and its leads. and mirrors as it could result in the Cold reduces battery capacity. glass cracking. Use an engine oil appropriate for the Snow Tires Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. lowest ambient temperatures that the Forces generated by excessive wheel If your vehicle is equipped with the tire speeds may cause damage, or even vehicle will be driven in. pressure monitoring system (vehicle failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could Inspect the ignition system for with run-flat tires), the system may not explode and injure someone. Do not spin damage and loose connections. function correctly when using tires with your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph steel wire reinforcement in the (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds Use winter windshield washer fluid sidewalls. continuously without stopping when you that will not freeze. are stuck and do not let anyone near a Use Snow Tires on all Four Wheels: spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Note: Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed for your snow tires or Remove snow before driving. Snow legal speed limits. Caution! left on the windshield is dangerous as When snow tires are used, select the it could obstruct vision. specified size and pressure. Drive slowly. Braking performance Tire Chains When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by can be adversely affected if snow or Check local regulations before using tire shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do ice adheres to the brake components. not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph chains. (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. If this situation occurs, drive the vehicle slowly, releasing the accelerator pedal If your vehicle is equipped with the Revving the engine or spinning the and lightly applying the brakes several TPMS system, the system may not wheels too fast may lead to transmission times until the brake performance function correctly when using tire overheating and failure. It can also damage returns to normal. chains. the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). 183 Install the chains on the rear tires only. Driving In Flooded Area Do not use chains on the front tires. Caution! Note: Do not drive the vehicle on Note: flooded roads as it could cause short circuit of electrical/electronic parts, or Chains may affect handling. To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, water enters the engine and causes it observe the following precautions: Do not go faster than 30 mph to lock up (hydro-lock) and stall. If the Because of restricted traction device (50 km/h) or the chain manufacturer's vehicle has been immersed in water clearance between tires and other contact your authorized dealer. recommended limit, whichever is lower. suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition Although your vehicle is capable of Drive carefully and avoid bumps, driving through shallow standing water, holes, and sharp turns. are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle consider the following Cautions and Avoid locked-wheel braking. immediately if noise occurs that could Warnings before doing so. indicate device breakage. Remove the Do not use chains on roads that are damaged parts of the device before further free of snow or ice. The tires and use. Warning! chains could be damaged. Install device as tightly as possible and Chains may scratch or chip then retighten after driving about ½ mile STARTING AND OPERATING aluminium wheels. (0.8 km). Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. Warning! Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded Driving through standing water limits vehicle. your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Do not drive for a prolonged period on after driving through standing water, drive Snow) between front and rear axles can dry pavement. slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal cause unpredictable handling. You could several times to dry the brakes. lose control and have a collision. Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method Failure to follow these warnings may of installation, operating speed, and result in injuries that are serious or fatal to conditions for use. Always use the you, your passengers, and others around suggested operating speed of the device you. manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

184 Overloading This vehicle is equipped with low profile tires allowing class-leading performance Caution! Note: Be careful not to overload your vehicle. The gross axle weight rating and handling. As a result, the sidewall (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight of the tires are very thin and the tires Always check the depth of the standing rating (GVWR) of the vehicle are on the and wheels can be damaged if driven water before driving through it. Never drive Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on through potholes or on rough/uneven through standing water that is deeper than the driver's door frame. Exceeding roads at excessive speeds. the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the these ratings can cause an accident or Use care and reduce speed when vehicle. vehicle damage. You can estimate the traveling on rough/uneven roads or Determine the condition of the road or weight of the load by weighing the through potholes. the path that is under water and if there items (or people) before putting them in are any obstacles in the way before driving the vehicle. through the standing water. Driving On Uneven Road Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will Your vehicle's suspension and minimize wave effects. underbody can be damaged if driven on rough/uneven roads or over speed Driving through standing water may bumps at excessive speeds. cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s Use care and reduce speed when fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, traveling on rough/uneven roads or over etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid speed bumps. that is milky or foamy in appearance) after Use care not to damage the vehicle's driving through standing water. Do not underbody, bumpers or muffler(s) when continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid driving under the following conditions: appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not Ascending or descending a slope covered by the New Vehicle Limited with a sharp transition angle. Warranty. Ascending or descending a driveway Getting water inside your vehicle’s or trailer ramp with a sharp transition engine can cause it to lock up and stall angle. out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

185 This page is intentionally left blank

186 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS . . . .188 REPLACING A BULB...... 188 REPLACING FUSES ...... 198 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . .207 TIRE SERVICE KIT ...... 212 JUMPSTARTING...... 221 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . .223 TOWINGTHEVEHICLE...... 224 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) ...... 226 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . .226

187 HAZARD WARNING When the switch is pushed, the Hazard REPLACING A BULB LIGHTS Warning Lights are active and all directional turn signals will flash on and General Instructions Control off to warn oncoming traffic of an The Hazard Warning Lights should emergency. Push the switch a second Warning! always be used when you stop on or time to turn off the Hazard Warning near a roadway in an emergency. Lights. The hazard warning indicator Before proceeding with the replacement The Hazard Warning Light switch is lights in the instrument cluster will flash simultaneously. of the lamp wait until the exhaust pipes are located on the center instrument panel cool: DANGER OF BURNS! below the radio. Push the switch to turn Note: theHazardWarningLightsonoroff. Modifications or repair of the electrical The turn signals do not work while system performed incorrectly and without Note: The Hazard Warning Lights warn the Hazard Warning Lights are taking into account the technical other drivers that your vehicle is a traffic activated. characteristics can cause malfunctions hazard and that they must take extreme with the risk of fire. caution when near it. Check local regulations about the Halogen lamps contain gas under

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY use of Hazard Warning Lights while the pressure, in the event of breakage be vehicle is being towed to verify that it is careful of the projection of fragments of not in violation of the law. glass. If the brake pedal is pressed while Halogen lamps must be handled by driving on slippery roads, the touching only the metallic part. If the emergency stop signal system could transparent bulb is in contact with the operate causing all of the directional fingers, reduces the intensity of the turn signals to flash. emitted light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In case of accidental While the emergency stop signal contact, rub the bulb with a cloth system is operating, all of the dampened with alcohol and allow to dry. 05031100-L12A directional turn signals automatically Hazard Warning Light Switch flash rapidly to caution the driver of a vehicle following behind of a sudden braking situation.

188 Before replacing a bulb check the Note: contacts for oxidation. When removing the lens or light unit Replace blown bulbs with others of using a flathead screwdriver, make the same type and power. sure that the flathead screwdriver does not contact the interior terminal. If the After replacing a headlight bulb, flathead screwdriver contacts the always check its alignment. terminal, a short circuit may occur. To replace the bulb, contact your When the weather is cold or damp authorized dealer. or after heavy rain or washing, the When a light is not working, check surface of headlights or rear lights may that the corresponding fuse is intact steam up and/or form drops of before replacing the bulb. For the condensation on the inside. This is a location of fuses, refer to the section on natural phenomenon due to the “Replacing Fuses” in this chapter. difference in temperature and humidity between the inside and the outside of the glass which does not indicate a Caution! fault and does not compromise the normal operation of lighting devices. Use the protective cover and carton for the The mist disappears quickly when the replacement bulb to dispose of the old lights are turned on, starting from the bulb promptly and out of the reach of center of the diffuser, extending children. progressively towards the edges.

189 Replacement Bulbs

Light Bulbs Type Power Front Position LED – Front Side-Maker Lights (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) W5W 5 W Front Positions/Side-Maker Lights (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) WY5W 5 W High Beam (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED – High Beam/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) HB3 60 W Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED – Low Beam (If Equipped With Full-LED Headlights) LED – Low Beam (If Equipped With Halogen Headlights) H11 55 W IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Front Direction Indicator Light WY21W 21 W Side Direction Indicator Light WY5W 5 W Fog Light H11 55 W Rear Position Lights LED – Stop Lights LED – Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED – Rear Direction Indicator Light WY21W 21 W Rear Side Marker W5W 5 W Reverse Light W21W 21 W License Plate Light W5W 5 W Overhead Light 10 W Trunk Lid Light 5W

190 Light Bulbs 3. Remove the fasteners in the seven locations and partially peel back the Front Lights mud guard. The bulbs are arranged as follows :

04110102-L40-010 Rear Lights 4 — Side Marker — If Equipped 5 — Position Light/Stop Light/Rear Di- 08020499000002 04110102-L38-008 Mud Guard Head Lights rection Indicator Light 6 — Reverse Light — If Equipped 1 — Fasteners 1 — High Beam with Daytime Running 7 — Third Stop Light 2 — Mud Guard Lights (DRL)/Position Light/Low Beam/ Side Marker 2 — Front Indicator Light Replacing Exterior 4. Turn the cover counterclockwise and 3 — Fog Light Lights remove it, disconnect the connector from the unit by pressing the tab on the Headlights (low beam) connector with your finger and pulling Rear Lights (If Equipped with halogen bulb) the connector. The bulbs are arranged as follows : Proceed as follows: 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly 1. If you are changing the right bulb, counterclockwise and remove it. start the engine, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and turn off 6. Disconnect the bulb from the engine. If you are changing the left bulb, socket. turn the steering wheel to the left. 7. Install the new bulb in the reverse 2. Make sure the ignition is placed in order of the removal procedure. the OFF mode, and the headlight switch is off.

191 Headlights (High Beam) With Daytime Running Lights (If Equipped With LED Lamps) Proceed as follows: 1. If you are changing the right bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and turn off engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left.

2. Make sure the ignition is placed in 07031501206002 the OFF mode, and the headlight Mud Guard switch is off. Front Direction Indicator Lights 3. Remove the fasteners in the seven Proceed as follows: locations and partially peel back the IN CASE OF EMERGENCY mud guard. 1. If you are changing the right bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel 4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly all the way to the right, and turn off counterclockwise and remove it. engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. 5. Turn the cover counterclockwise and 08020499000010 remove it, disconnect the connector Head Lamp Assembly 2. Make sure the ignition is placed in from the unit by pressing the tab on the the OFF mode, and the headlight connector with your finger and pulling 1 — High Beam Lamp switch is off. the connector. 2 — Position Lamp 3 — Daytime Running Lamp 3. Remove the fasteners in the five 6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly locations and partially peel back the counterclockwise and remove it. mud guard. 7. Disconnect the bulb from the 4. Disconnect the connector from the socket. unit by pressing the tab on the connector with your finger and pulling 8. Install the new bulb in the reverse the connector rearward. order of the removal procedure. 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly counterclockwise and remove it.

192 Fog Lights Side Direction Indicator Lights Proceed as follows: Proceed as follows: 1. If you are changing the right bulb, 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in start the engine, turn the steering wheel the OFF mode, and the headlight all the way to the right, and turn off switch is off. engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. 2. If you are changing the right bulb, start the engine, turn the steering wheel 2. Make sure the ignition is switched all the way to the right, and turn off off, and the headlight switch is off. engine. If you are changing the left bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. 07031501-207-001 3. Remove the fasteners in the five Front Direction Indicator Housing locations and partially peel back the 3. Remove the fasteners in the five 1 — Socket Assembly mud guard. locations and partially peel back the 2 — Bulb mud guard. 4. Disconnect the connector from the unit by pressing the tab on the 4. Disconnect the electrical connector 6. Disconnect the bulb from the connector with your finger and pulling from the bulb by pressing the tab on socket. the connector. the connector with your finger and pulling the connector. 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly counterclockwise, extract the bulb and 5. Remove the lens assembly by remove it. pressing the tab on the unit with your finger and pulling the unit forward to 6. Disconnect the bulb from the compress in the internal catch, then pull socket. the cluster outwards. 7. Install the new bulb in the reverse 6. Lift up the lens assembly, and then order of the removal procedure. remove the cluster and install the new Brake lights / Tail lights side direction indicator lens assembly in the reverse order of the removal Go to your authorized dealer when the 07031501208002 procedure. Direction Indicator Lamp Connector replacement of this lights is necessary. 7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure.

193 2. Turn the socket counterclockwise, remove socket assembly then remove the bulb.

08020499000011 Side Direction Indicator 1 — Fasteners IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

07031501211001 Side Direction Indicator 3 — Internal Catch 4 — Lens Assembly 08070604-123-100 Front Side Marker

Front Side Marker 1 — Socket 07031501210001 2 — Bulb Assembly Side Direction Indicator (If Equipped With Halogen Bulb) Proceed as follows: 2 — Lens Assembly 3. Install the new bulb in the reverse 1. Remove the fasteners in the seven order of the removal procedure. locations and partially peel back the upper side of the mud guard.

194 Rear Direction Indicator Lights Proceed as follows: 1. Remove the retainers and the trunk lid end trim.

07031501214002 07031501-215-001 Trunk Trim Taillight Housing Fasteners 2 — Connector 4 — Screw 5 — Nuts 2. Disconnect the connector from the unit by pressing the tab on the 4. Pull the taillight housing rearward to connector with your finger. remove it.

07031501-212-002 Trunk Trim 1 — Retainers

07031501213002 07031501-216-001 Rear Direction Indicator Socket Rear of Vehicle 3 — Connector 6 — Taillight Housing

3. Remove the screw and nuts.

195 5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly Reverse Light Rear Side Marker counterclockwise to remove from Proceed as follows: Proceed as follows: taillight housing, and remove bulb. 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in 1. Push the lens assembly rearward to the OFF mode, and the headlight compress the internal catch, then pull switch is off. the lens assembly outwards. 2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise to remove, and remove bulb.

07031501-203-002 Taillight Housing

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 7 — Socket and Bulb Assembly 08070605-123-100 Rear Side Marker 6. Install the new bulb in the reverse 1 — Rear Side Marker Lens Assembly order of the removal procedure. 07031501-219-001 Reverse Light 2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly 1 — Socket Assembly counterclockwise to remove, and 2 — Bulb remove bulb.

3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure.

196 License Plate Lights 3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly Proceed as follows: counterclockwise and remove, remove bulb. 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in the OFF mode, and the headlight switch is off. 2. Slide the unit as shown in the figure to remove it.

07031501-221-001 License Plate Light Housing 2 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of the removal procedure. Insert 08070606-123-100 catch and push the housing back into Side Marker Housing place. 2 — Socket and Bulb Assembly

3. Install the new bulb and then reinstall the socket in the reverse order of the removal procedure.

07031501220001 Trunk Lid 1 — License Plate Light Assembly

197 Replacing Interior Light REPLACING FUSES Bulbs General Information Overhead Light Proceed as follows: Warning! 1. Using a suitable tool to prevent damage to the lens, remove the overhead light by carefully prying on the When replacing a blown fuse, always edge of the lens. use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of 07031502-202-001 higher amp rating. Never replace a blown Trunk Light fuse with metal wires or any other material. 1 — Trunk Light Lens Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 2. Disconnect the connector from the trunk light lens. Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. 07031502-201-001 Overhead Light Location If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. 1 — Overhead Light Lens If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), 2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out. power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering system 3. Install the new bulb in the reverse blows, contact an authorized dealer. order of the removal procedure. 07031502-203-001 Trunk Light Trunk Light Housing Your vehicle's electrical system is protected by fuses. Proceed as follows: 2 — Connector If any lights, accessories, or controls do 1. Using a suitable tool to prevent not work, inspect the appropriate circuit damage to the to the lens, remove the 3. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out. protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside trunk light lens by carefully prying on element will be melted. If the same fuse 4. Install the new bulb in the reverse the edge of the lens. blows again, go to an authorized dealer order of the removal procedure. as soon as possible. 198 Fuse location 4. Pull the fuse straight out with the 6. Insert a new fuse of the same Fuses are grouped together in two fuse fuse puller provided on the fuse block amperage rating, and make sure it fits boxes located in the interior on the left located in the engine compartment. tightly. If it does not fit tightly, contact side of the vehicle and under the hood. your authorized dealer. If you have no spare fuses, borrow one of the same Interior Fuses rating from a circuit not essential to If the electrical system does not work, vehicle operation, such as the audio or first inspect the fuses on the vehicle's outlet circuit. left side. 7. Reinstall the cover and make sure Proceed as follows: that it is securely installed. 1. Make sure the ignition is placed in Note: Always replace a fuse with a the OFF mode, and other switches are genuine FCA fuse or equivalent of the turned off. same rating. Otherwise you may 07031601-122-001 damage the electric system. 2. Open the fuse panel cover (located Fuse Puller near the door). Underhood Fuses 5. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it is If the headlights or other electrical blown. components do not work and the fuses in the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse block in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced. Make sure the ignition is placed in the OFF mode, and other switches are turned off and remove the fuse block cover. If the lock is forcefully opened, the fuse block cover may come in

07031601-121-001 contact with the frame when it is Fuse Panel Cover removed and become scratched. 07031601-ALL-001 3. Press retaining clip and remove Fuses protection cover. 1 — Normal Fuse 2 — Blown Fuse

199 When removing the cover, remove it slowly according to the following procedure: 1. Disengage the rear lock by pressing down on the front tab with your fingers.

07031601-ALL-002AB Fuse 1 — Normal Fuse 2 — Blown Fuse IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 07031601-123-001 5. Reinstall the cover and make sure Underhood Fuse Block that it is securely installed. 1 — Lock 2 — Cover

2. Remove the front tab while slightly lifting the front of the cover. 3. Remove the cover while lifting it and sliding it to the rear. 4. If any fuse but the main fuse is blown, replace it with a new one of the same amperage rating.

200 Fuse Block (Engine Compartment)

07031602-121-001

201 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F01 ENG IG3 5 A Engine Control Systems F02 ENG IG2 5 A Engine Control Systems F03 HORN2 7.5 A Horn F04 C/U IG1 15 A For Protection Of Various Circuits F05 ENG IG1 7.5 A Engine Control System F06 — — — F07 INTERIOR 15 A Overhead Light F08 — — — F09 AUDIO2 15 A Audio System

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F10 METER1 10 A Instrument Cluster F11 SRS1 7.5 A Air Bag F12 — — — F13 RADIO 7.5 A Audio System F14 ENGINE3 20 A Engine Control System F15 ENGINE1 10 A Engine Control System F16 ENGINE2 15 A Engine Control System F17 AUDIO1 25 A Audio System F18 A/C MAG 7.5 A Air Conditioner F19 AT PUMP H/L HI 20 A Transmission Control System (If Equipped) F20 AT 15 A Transmission Control System (If Equipped) F21 D LOCK 25 A Power Door Locks F22 H/L RH 20 A Headlight (RH) F23 ENG + B2 7.5 A Engine Control System 202 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F24 TAIL 20 A Taillights/Number Plate Lights/Position Lights F25 — — — F26 ROOM 25 A Overhead Light F27 FOG 15 A Fog Lights F28 H/CLEAN 20 A Headlight Washer (If Equipped) F29 STOP 10 A Stop Lights/Rear Fog Light (If Equipped) F30 HORN 15 A Horn F31 H/L LH 20 A Headlight (LH) F32 ABS/DSC S 30 A ABS/DSC System F33 HAZARD 15 A Hazard Warning Flashers/Direction Indicators Lights F34 FUEL PUMP 15 A Fuel System F35 ENG + B3 5 A Engine Control System F36 WIPER 20 A Windshield Wipers F37 CABIN + B 50 A For Protection Of Various Circuits F38 — — — F39 — — — F40 ABS/DSC M 50 A ABS/DSC System F41 EVVT A/R PUMP 20 A Engine Control System F42 — — — F43 — — — F44 FAN2 40 A Cooling Fan F45 ENG.MAIN 40 A Engine Control System F46 EPS 60 A Power Steering System 203 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F47 DEFOG 30 A Rear Window Defogger F48 IG2 30 A For Protection Of Various Circuits F49 — — — F50 HEATER 40 A Air Conditioner F51 — — — F52 — — — IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

204 Fuse Block Interior

07031602-03F-002

205 DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT F01 RHT R 30 A — F02 RHT L 30 A — F03 — — — F04 — — — F05 F.OUTLET 15 A Accessory Sockets F06 — — — F07 AT IND 7.5 A AT Shift Indicator — If Equipped F08 MIRROR 7.5 A Power Control Mirror F09 R_DECK R 30 A —

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY F10 R_DECK L 30 A — F11 F.WASHER 15 A Windshield Washer F12 P.WINDOW 30 A Power Windows F13 — — — F14 SRS2/ESCL 15 A — F15 — — — F16 — — —

206 JACKING AND TIRE Tools Location CHANGING Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire, jack, lug wrench and tow Warning! eyes. For details, contact an authorized dealer. Tools are stored in the trunk. Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 08020101-124-001 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is Jack Location dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. 1 — Cover Tab Never put any part of your body under a 2 — Jack And Tools Cover vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. 2. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw 08020100-122-002 counterclockwise. The jack is designed to be used as a Jack Tools tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for 1 — Jack Lever service purposes. The vehicle should be 2 — Lug Wrench (If Equipped) jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid 3 — Tow Eyes (If Equipped) ice or slippery areas.

Preparations For Jacking To Remove The Jack Proceed as follows:

08020101-122-001 1. In the right side of the trunk, pull the Jack Components cover tab to remove cover. 3 — Wing Bolt 4 — Jack Screw

207 To Secure The Jack Conditions Of Non-Use 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Lights and engage the parking brake. Proceed as follows: Temperatures below -40°F (−40°C). 1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with On sandy or muddy ground. 3. For vehicles with automatic the jack screw pointing back, and turn transmission, place the gear selector in the wing bolt clockwise to temporarily On uneven ground. PARK. For vehicles with manual tighten it. On steep roads. transmission, place gear selector in REVERSE and cycle the engine to OFF. 2. Turn the jack screw clockwise. In extreme weather conditions. 4. Stop the engine. The motor must be 3. Turn the wing bolt completely to In direct contact with the engine or kept off as long as the vehicle is lifted secure the jack. for repairs under the vehicle. off the ground. 4. Insert the cover tabs and install the On boats. 5. Remove the jack and tools. cover. Jacking Instructions 6. Block both the front and rear of the Note: Make sure the jack is well wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking Warning! lubricated before using it. position. For example, if changing the IN CASE OF EMERGENCY right front tire, block the left rear wheel. A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a Warning! collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places Do not attempt to change a tire on the side provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull repaired or replaced immediately. far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. Maintenance Always keep the jack clean. Proceed as follows: Make sure the moving parts are kept 1. Stop the vehicle in a position that 08020300-121-001 free from dirt or rust. does not cause any danger to traffic Blocking Right Front Tire And Left Make sure the screw thread is and lets you change the tire in safety, as Rear Tire adequately lubricated. far as possible from the edge of the driving lane. The ground must be flat and sufficiently compact.

208 Removing A Tire 4. Continue raising the jack head gradually by rotating the screw with your hand until the jack head is inserted Warning! into the lift point.

Carefully follow these tire changing Caution! warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: Always park on a firm, level surface as Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by far from the edge of the roadway as jacking on locations other than those possible before raising the vehicle. indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this 08020301-123-001 vehicle. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. Loosen Lug Nuts Counterclockwise Block the wheel diagonally opposite the 2. Place the jack under the lift point wheel to be raised. closest to the tire being changed with Apply the parking brake firmly and set the jack head squarely under the the transmission in PARK. jacking location. Do not let any passenger sit in the 3. Turn the jack screw in the direction vehicle when it is on a jack. shown and adjust the jack head so that Do not get under the vehicle when it is it is close to the jacking location. on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. 08020301-121-001 Front Jacking Location Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a 5. Insert the jack lever and attach the tire change. lug wrench to tire jack. If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.

Proceed as follows: 08020301-ALL-003 1. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them Raising The Jack counterclockwise one turn each, but do not remove any lug nuts until the tire 1 — Jack Head has been raised off the ground. 209 To Remove An Anti-theft Lug Nut Warning! Proceed as follows: 1. Obtain the special key for the Raising the vehicle higher than necessary anti-theft lug nut. can make the vehicle less stable. It could 2. Place the special key on top of the slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. anti-theft lug nut, and be sure to hold Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. the key square to it. If you hold the key at an angle, you may damage both key and nut. Do not use a power impact

08020301-ALL-006 7. Remove the lug nuts by turning wrench. Jack With Lug Wrench Attached them counterclockwise, then remove the wheel. 3. Place the lug wrench on top of the key and apply pressure. Turn the Locking Lug Nuts — If Equipped wrench counterclockwise. Warning! If your vehicle has optional anti-theft To Install The Anti-theft Lug Nut IN CASE OF EMERGENCY wheel lug nuts, one on each wheel will Proceed as follows: Being under a jacked-up vehicle is lock the tires and you must use a dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the special key to unlock them. This key will 1. Place the special key on top of the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. attach to the lug wrench. nut, and be sure to hold the key square Never get any part of your body under a Register them with the lock to it. If you hold the key at an angle, you vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get manufacturer by filling out the card may damage both key and nut. Do not under a raised vehicle, take it to a service provided in the glove compartment and center where it can be raised on a lift. use a power impact wrench. mailing it in the accompanying envelope. If you lose this key, contact 2. Place the lug wrench on top of the 6. Turn the jack handle clockwise and an authorized dealer or use the lock special key, apply pressure, and turn it raise the vehicle high enough so that manufacturer's order form, which is clockwise. the tire is just raised off the ground and with the registration card. Mounting The Tire can be removed. Before removing the Accessory wheel locks cannot be used Proceed as follows: lug nuts, make sure your vehicle is on steel wheels. This includes situations firmly in position and that it cannot slip when the spare tire is installed. If the 1. Remove dirt and grime from the or move. spare tire is installed, one of the original mounting surfaces of the wheel and lug nuts (which should still be in the hub, including the hub bolts, with a vehicle) must be installed in place of the cloth. wheel lock.

210 With TPMS Do not push the tire pressure monitoring system set switch after installing the spare tire. The switch is only to be pushed after installing the repaired flat tire or installing a replacement tire. Note: To prevent the jack and tool from rattling, store them properly.

08020303-XX4-001 08020303-122-001 Warning! Clean Mounting Surface Lug Nut Tightening Order 2. Mount the tire and install the lug A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a nuts with the beveled edge inward, then Warning! collision or hard stop could endanger the tighten them by hand. occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places Caution! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully repaired or replaced immediately. until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure Be sure to mount the spare tire with the to follow this warning may result in serious valve stem facing outward. The vehicle injury. could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly. 4. After tightening the lug nuts, have them checked with a torque wrench by 3. Turn the lug wrench an authorized dealer or service station counterclockwise and lower the vehicle. to verify correct tightness. Use the lug wrench to tighten the nuts 5. Remove the tire blocks and store in the order shown. the tools and jack. 6. Check the inflation pressure. Refer to “Technical Specifications” for more information.

211 TIRE SERVICE KIT Tire Service Kit Mexico Market: Components And Tire Service Storage Operation The Tire Service Kit is located inside the The Tire Service Kit includes the trunk. following items: U.S.A. And Canada Markets:

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 08020202-121-003 Tire Service Kit Location The Tire Service Kit included with your vehicle is for a temporary repair of a slightly damaged flat tire resulting from running over nails or similar sharp 08070606456456 objects on the road surface. Tire Service Kit Components — Perform the emergency flat tire repair Mexico Markets without removing the nail or similar sharp object which punctured the tire. 1— Tire Sealant Note: Your vehicle is not equipped with 2— Compressor a spare tire. In the event of a flat tire, 08070606457457 3— Valve Core Tool use the Tire Service Kit to repair the tire Tire Service Kit Components — 4— Injection Hose temporarily. When doing the repair, refer U.S.A. And Canada Markets 5— Spare Valve Core to the instructions included in the Tire 1— Sealant Bottle 6— Speed Restriction Sticker Service Kit. If an emergency repair was 2— Compressor 7— Instructions performed on a flat tire using the Tire 3— Speed Restriction Sticker Service Kit, contact an authorized 4— Repaired Tire Sticker dealer to repair or replace the tire as soon as possible. 5— Instructions 212 Tire Service Usage Sealing A Tire With Tire absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, Precautions Service Kit eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is The tire sealant cannot be reused. If the any contact with eyes or skin. Change sealant has been used, or is expired, Warning! clothing as soon as possible, if there is any purchase new tire sealant at an contact with clothing. authorized dealer. Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains Note: The Tire Service Kit cannot be Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far latex. In case of an allergic reaction or used in the following cases. Consult an rash, consult a physician immediately. authorized dealer if any of these enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of conditions exist: children. If swallowed, rinse mouth Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the immediately with plenty of water and drink The period of effective use for the vehicle under the following circumstances: plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! tire sealant has expired (the period of Consult a physician immediately. effectiveness is indicated on the bottle If the puncture in the tire tread is label). approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. If the tire has any sidewall damage. U.S.A. And CANADA Markets: The tear or puncture in the tire Proceed as follows: exceeds about 0.16 inches (4 mm). If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn The damage has occurred to an on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Lights. area of the tire other than the tread. If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. The vehicle has been driven with 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the If the wheel has any damage. nearly no air remaining in the tire. wheel with the deflated tire) is in a If you are unsure of the condition of the position that is near to the ground. This The tire has come off the wheel rim. tire or the wheel. will allow the Tire Service Kit hoses to Damage to the wheel rim has reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Keep Tire Service Kit away from open Service Kit flat on the ground. This will occurred. flames or heat sources. provide the best positioning of the kit The tire has two or more punctures. A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward when injecting the sealant into the in a collision or hard stop could endanger deflated tire and running the air pump. the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow Move the vehicle as necessary to place the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. the valve stem in this position before Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, proceeding. your passengers, and others around you. 3. Place the gear selector in REVERSE Take care not to allow the contents of for a manual transmission, and PARK Tire Service Kit to come in contact with for automatic transmission. hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or 213 4. Apply the parking brake with the Note: brake pedal pressed and cycle the Do not shake the bottle engine OFF. excessively. Otherwise, the sealant could spray out of the injection hose. If 5. Unload passengers and cargo, then the sealant contacts clothing or other remove the Tire Service Kit. objects, you may not be able to remove it. The sealant hardens easily, and injecting it will be difficult under cold weather conditions (32 °F (0 °C) or below). Warm the sealant inside the vehicle to facilitate injection. 08020202-031-670 Install Air Compressor To Sealant 7. Pull out the air compressor hose Bottle and the air compressor plug from the 3 — Air Compressor Hose air compressor. 4 — Injection Valve IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 08020202-121-003 Tire Service Kit Location Note: Make sure that the air 6. Gently shake the sealant bottle to compressor switch is off before mix the contents. Then extend the inserting the air compressor hose into injection hose. the injection valve of the bottle. If the air compressor hose is not installed to the injection valve of the bottle securely, the sealant may leak. 9. Remove the valve cap from the valve

08020202-36A-004 of the flat tire, install the injection hose Air Compressor With Hose And to the tire valve, and turn the sleeve to Plug the right to tighten. 2 — Air Compressor Hose

08020202-03A-666 8. Install the air compressor hose, Sealant Bottle With Injection Hose which was pulled out of the air compressor, into the injection valve of 1 — Injection Hose the bottle. 214 11. Insert the air compressor plug into the accessory socket, located deep in Warning! the back of the footwell on the passenger side, and cycle the ignition to ACC. Never use the air compressor above 3 Bar (43.5 psi). Using the air compressor at an Note: When inserting the air inflation pressure above 3 Bar (43.5 psi) compressor plug into or removing it continuously is dangerous. If the air from the accessory socket, make sure compressor overheats, hot air will be that the air compressor switch is off. exhausted and you could get burned. When turning the air compressor on/off, 08020202-03A-004 use the air compressor switch. Before Valve And Valve Cover checking the tire inflation pressure using Caution! 5 — Valve Cap the tire pressure gauge, turn the air 6 — Valve compressor switch off. If the tire inflation pressure does not 12. The sealant is injected into the tire increase, repair of the tire is not possible. If 10. Install the bottle to the air when the air compressor is switched the tire does not reach the specified tire compressor and push it in until the left on. After the sealant is injected inflation pressure within 10 minutes, it may have received extensive damage. In this and right tabs are engaged securely. completely, wait until the tire inflation pressure increases to the specified tire case, the repair using the tire service kit inflation pressure. For the correct was not successful. pressure, check the tire inflation Do not operate the air compressor for a pressure label on the driver's door continuous 10 minutes or longer because frame. using it for long periods could cause a malfunction. Note: The inflation pressure may increase to about 43.5 psi (3 Bar) temporarily to inject the sealant through 13. Adhere the speed restriction sticker the valve. Normally, the inflation to an area where it can be viewed easily pressure decreases gradually and it by the driver. reaches the actual inflation pressure 08020202-031-669 after about 30 seconds. Sealant Bottle Into Air Compressor 7 — Air Compressor Tabs

215 16. Remove the air compressor hose Note: With TPMS System: if the tire from the injection valve of the bottle. is not properly inflated, the warning Warning! Then, install the injection hose to the light will illuminate. injection valve of the bottle to prevent After driving the vehicle for about leakage of any remaining sealant. Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), connect to the padded area on the steering wheel. the air compressor to the tire using Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel is Step nine of the procedure, and check dangerous because the air bag may not the tire inflation pressure using the tire operate (deploy) normally resulting in pressure gauge on the air compressor. serious injury. In addition, do not adhere If the tire inflation pressure is lower than the sticker to areas where warning lights or the specified tire inflation pressure, turn the speedometer cannot be viewed. the air compressor on and wait until it reaches the specified tire inflation 14. Adhere the repaired tire sticker to pressure. the wheel of the flat tire. The Tire Service Kit is completed

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 08020202-031-668 successfully if the tire inflation pressure Install Injection Hose To Sealant does not decrease. Carefully drive the Bottle vehicle to the nearest authorized dealer Note: The remaining sealant in the immediately and have the flat tire hose may spray out when the hose is replaced. Replacement with a new tire removed. Remove the hose carefully is recommended. If the tire is to be because you may not be able to repaired or reused, consult an remove the sealant contacting clothing authorized dealer. or other objects. Note: 17. Install the tire valve cap. If an emergency flat tire repair has 08020202-031-667 Repaired Tire Sticker 18. Place the Tire Service Kit back into been performed using the Tire Service its storage location. Kit, FCA recommends that the tire be 15. When the tire inflates to the replaced with a new one as soon as specified tire inflation pressure, turn the 19. Start driving immediately to spread possible. If the tire is to be repaired or air compressor switch off, turn the the sealant in the tire. reused, contact an authorized dealer. sleeve of the injection hose to the left, Note: Carefully drive the vehicle at a and pull it out of the tire valve. Thewheelcanbereusedifthe speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less. If sealant adhering to it is removed. the vehicle is driven at a speed of However, replace the valve with a new 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle one. may vibrate. 216 Sealing A Tire With Tire absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, 4. Apply the parking brake with the Service Kit eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush brake pedal pressed and cycle the immediately with plenty of water if there is engine OFF. any contact with eyes or skin. Change Warning! clothing as soon as possible, if there is any 5. Unload passengers and cargo, then contact with clothing. remove the Tire Service Kit.

Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains 6. Gently shake the tire sealant. If the of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far latex. In case of an allergic reaction or bottle is shaken after the injection hose enough off the road to avoid the danger of rash, consult a physician immediately. is screwed on, tire sealant could spray being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of out from the injection hose. Tire sealant children. If swallowed, rinse mouth contacting clothing or other objects Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the immediately with plenty of water and drink vehicle under the following circumstances: plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! may be impossible to remove. Shake Consult a physician immediately. the bottle before screwing on the If the puncture in the tire tread is injection hose. approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger. If the tire has any sidewall damage. Mexico Market Note: Proceed as follows: Do not shake the bottle If the tire has any damage from driving excessively. Otherwise, the sealant with extremely low tire pressure. 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn could spray out of the injection hose, If the tire has any damage from driving on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning Lights. and if the sealant contacts clothing or on a flat tire. other objects, you may not be able to 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the remove it. If the wheel has any damage. wheel with the deflated tire) is in a The sealant hardens easily and position that is near to the ground. This If you are unsure of the condition of the injecting it will be difficult under cold will allow the Tire Service Kit hoses to tire or the wheel. weather conditions 32 °F (0 °C) or reach the valve stem and keep the Tire below. Warm the sealant inside the Keep Tire Service Kit away from open Service Kit flat on the ground. This will flames or heat sources. vehicle to facilitate injection. provide the best positioning of the kit A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward when injecting the sealant into the 7. Remove the cap from the bottle and in a collision or hard stop could endanger deflated tire and running the air pump. the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow screw on the injection hose with the Move the vehicle as necessary to place bottle's inner cap left on to break the the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. the valve stem in this position before Failure to follow these warnings can result inner cap. in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, proceeding. your passengers, and others around you. 3. Place the gear selector in REVERSE Take care not to allow the contents of for a manual transmission, or PARK for Tire Service Kit to come in contact with automatic transmission. hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or 217 Note: Store the valve core in a place where it will not get dirty. 10. Insert the injection hose into the valve.

08020202-03A-004 Valve And Valve Cover 5 — Valve Cap 6 — Tire Valve

08020202-03A-005 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Note: If there is air remaining in the Injection Hose Into Valve tire when the valve core is removed, the 11. Hold the bottom of the bottle valve core could fly out. Remove the upright, squeeze the bottle with your valve core carefully. hands, and inject the entire amount of 9. Turn the valve core counter tire sealant into the tire. clockwise with the valve core tool and 0802020203A003 Attaching Injection Hose To Sealant remove the valve core. Bottle 8. Remove the valve cap from the flat tire. Push the back of a valve core tool to the core of the tire valve and bleed out all of the remaining air.

08020202-03A-008 Squeeze Sealant Into Tire

08020202-03A-005 Turn Valve Core Counterclockwise 218 12. Pull out the injection hose from the 15. Adhere the speed restriction sticker 17. Install the air compressor hose to valve. to an area where it can be viewed easily the tire valve. by the driver.

Warning!

Do not adhere the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel. Adhering the speed restriction sticker to the padded area on the steering wheel is dangerous because the air bag may not operate (deploy) normally resulting in 08020202-03A-007 serious injury. In addition, do not adhere 08020202-03A-00B Turn Valve Core Clockwise To the sticker to areas where warning lights or Air Compressor Hose Into Valve Reinstall the speedometer cannot be viewed. 18. Insert the air compressor plug into 13. Reinsert the valve core into the the accessory socket, located deep in valve and turn it clockwise to install. 16. Pull out the air compressor hose the back of the footwell on the and the air compressor plug from the passenger side, and cycle the ignition Note: to ACC. The tire sealant cannot be reused. air compressor. If the tire sealant kit has been used, or 19. Turn the air compressor switch on is expired, purchase new one at an and inflate the tire carefully to the authorized dealer. correct inflation pressure. For the Do not throw away the empty tire correct pressure, check the tire inflation sealant bottle after use. Return the pressure label on the driver's door empty tire sealant bottle to an frame. authorized dealer when replacing the tire. The empty tire sealant bottle will Note: When inserting the air need to be used to extract and compressor plug into or removing it dispose of the used sealant from the from the accessory socket, make sure tire. that the air compressor switch is off. 08020202-36A-004 When turning the air compressor on/off, Air Compressor With Hose And 14. Install the injection hose to the tab use the air compressor switch. Before Plug of the bottle to prevent leakage of any checking the tire inflation pressure using remaining sealant. 2 — Air Compressor Hose the tire pressure gauge, turn the air compressor switch off. 219 Note: If an emergency flat tire repair has been performed using the Tire Service Caution! Carefully drive the vehicle at a Kit, FCA recommends that the tire be speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or less. If replaced with a new one as soon as the vehicle is driven at a speed of possible. If the tire is to be repaired or If the tire inflation pressure does not 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the vehicle reused, contact an authorized dealer. increase, repair of the tire is not possible. If may vibrate. the tire does not reach the specified tire The tire can be reused if the sealant inflation pressure within 10 minutes, it may With TPMS System: if the tire is adhering to it is removed. However, have received extensive damage. In this not properly inflated, the warning replace the valve with a new one. case, the repair using the tire service kit light will illuminate. was not successful. After driving the vehicle for about Replacing The Bottle Do not operate the air compressor for a 10 minutes or 3 miles (5 km), connect Note: The tire sealant has a period of continuous 10 minutes or longer because the air compressor to the tire using effective use. Check the period of using it for long periods could cause a effective use indicated on the bottle malfunction. step nine of the procedure, and check the tire inflation pressure using the tire labelanddonotuseitifithasexpired. pressure gauge on the air compressor. Have the tire sealant replaced at an IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Note: If the tire has been over If the tire inflation pressure is lower authorized dealer before the period of inflated, loosen the screw cap on the air than the specified tire inflation effective use has expired. compressor and bleed some of the air pressure, turn the air compressor on out. Inspect the Tire Service Kit at regular and wait until it reaches the specified intervals as well as the operation of the tire inflation pressure; tire compressor. 20. When the tire inflates to the The emergency flat tire repair is specified tire inflation pressure, turn the completed successfully if the tire air compressor switch off, turn the inflation pressure does not decrease. sleeve of the air compressor hose to Carefully drive the vehicle to the the left, and pull it out of the tire valve. nearest authorized dealer and have the 21. Install the tire valve cap. flat tire replaced. Replacement with a new tire is recommended. If the tire is 22. Place the Tire Service Kit back into to be repaired or reused, contact an its storage location. authorized dealer. 23. Start driving immediately to spread the sealant in the tire.

220 JUMP STARTING Preparations For Jump Caution! Starting If the battery is discharged, a jump Do not use a portable battery booster pack starting procedure can be performed or any other booster source with a system using the battery and the cables of voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to another vehicle, or using a booster the battery, starter motor, alternator or battery. electrical system may occur. Jump starting is dangerous if done incorrectly, so follow the procedure in Jump Starting this section carefully. If you feel unsure Procedure about jump starting, it is strongly recommended that you have a Warning! competent service technician do the work. Note: When a booster battery is being Failure to follow this jump starting used, comply with the utilization and procedure could result in personal injury or precaution instructions specified by the property damage due to battery explosion. manufacturer.

08030100121001 Jump Start Locations Caution!

Failure to follow these procedures could Warning! result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

221 To jump start the vehicle, follow this 4. Connect the positive end of the Do not push-start a vehicle that has procedure: jumper cable to the positive terminal on a manual transmission. It can damage the discharged battery. the emission control system. 1. Remove the positive terminal cover. 5. Connect the opposite end of the Starting A Flooded positive jumper cable to the positive Engine terminal on the booster battery. If the engine fails to start, it may be 6. Connect the negative end of the flooded (excessive fuel in the engine). negative jumper cable to the negative Follow this procedure: terminal of the booster battery. 1. If the engine does not start within 7. Connect the opposite end of the 5 seconds on the first try, wait negative jumper cable to a good engine 10 seconds and try again. ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery (exposed metal part 2. Make sure the parking brake is 08030100-122-001 of the engine) away from the battery applied. Positive Terminal Cover IN CASE OF EMERGENCY and the fuel injection system. 3. Press the accelerator all the way and 2. Make sure the booster battery is hold it there. 12 Volts and that the negative terminal 8. Start the engine of the booster is grounded. vehicle and run it a few minutes. Then 4. Press the clutch pedal (manual start the engine of the other vehicle. transmission) or the brake pedal 3. Make sure the engine of the vehicle 9. Once the engine is started, remove (automatic transmission), then push the with the booster battery is OFF and all STOP/START button. If the engine unnecessary electrical loads in both the jumper cables in the reverse sequence. starts, release the accelerator vehicles. immediately because the engine will 10. Replace the positive terminal cover. suddenly rev up. Warning! Make sure cover is secure. 5. If the engine fails to start, crank it Bump Starting without pressing the accelerator. Do not allow vehicles to touch each other Never jump start the engine by pushing, If the engine still does not start using as this could establish a ground towing or coasting downhill. the above procedure, have your vehicle connection and personal injury could inspected by an authorized dealer. result. Note: You cannot start a vehicle with an automatic transmission by pushing it.

222 IF YOUR ENGINE If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is Escaping: OVERHEATS Warning! Open the hood and idle the engine until If Your Engine Overheats it cools. In any of the following situations, you You or others can be badly burned by hot can reduce the potential for overheating engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from Note: by taking the appropriate action. your radiator. If you see or hear steam If the cooling fan does not operate coming from under the hood, do not open while the engine is running, the engine On highways — slow down. the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system temperature will increase. Stop the In city traffic — while stopped, place pressure cap when the radiator or coolant engine and contact an authorized the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do bottle is hot. dealer. not increase engine idle speed. If the engine continues to overheat Note: There are steps that you can or frequently overheats, have the Caution! take to slow down an impending cooling system inspected. The engine overheat condition: could be seriously damaged unless Driving with a hot cooling system could repairs are made. Contact an If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, authorized dealer. turn it off. The A/C system adds heat damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. to the engine cooling system and Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turning the A/C off can help remove turned off until the pointer drops back into this heat. the normal range. If the pointer remains on You can also turn the temperature the “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to If Steam Is Coming From The act as a supplement to the radiator Engine Compartment: and aids in removing heat from the Do not go near the front of the vehicle. engine cooling system. Stop the engine. Wait until the steam dissipates, then open the hood and start the engine.

223 TOWING THE VEHICLE Caution! Attaching The Tow Eyes — If Equipped The tow eye must be used exclusively for roadside assistance operations. Only use the tow eye with an appropriate device Warning! in accordance with the highway code (a rigid bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a short distance to the nearest service Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with location. tow eyes. 08060203121001 Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow Front Bumper Cap Location Chains may break, causing serious injury vehicles off the road or where there are or death. obstacles. 1— Front Bumper Cap Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. In compliance with the above Tow straps may break or become conditions, towing with a tow eye must IN CASE OF EMERGENCY disengaged, causing serious injury or take place with two vehicles (one towing, death. the other towed) aligned as much as possible along the same center line. Failure to follow proper tow eye usage Damage to your vehicle may occur if these may cause components to break resulting guidelines are not followed. in serious injury or death. When towing, only use a facility that can tow vehicles with low ground clearances as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform.

Proceed as follows: 08060203-122-001 1. Remove the towing eyelet and the Rear Bumper Cap Location lug wrench from the luggage compartment. 2— Rear Bumper Cap 2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver or similar tool with a soft cloth to prevent damage to a painted bumper, and open the cap located on the front or rear bumper. 224 Note: Do not use excessive force as it A towed vehicle usually should have its may damage the cap or scratch the drive wheels (rear wheels) OFF of the Caution! painted bumper surface. Remove the ground. If excessive damage or other cap completely and store it so as not to conditions prevent this, use wheel dollies. lose it. Tow eyes are for emergency use only, to When towing with the rear wheels on rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not the ground, release the parking brake. 3. Securely install the tow eye in front use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or or rear using the lug wrench or highway towing. You could damage your equivalent. vehicle. Caution!

When using the tow eyes, always pull DO NOT use sling-type equipment when the lead or chain in a straight direction towing. When securing the vehicle to a with respect to the eyelet. Never apply flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear a sideways force. suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. Note: Follow the precautions below to avoid damage to the towing eyelet and towing hook, vehicle body, or If towing service is not available in an transmission system when towing: emergency, the vehicle may be towed with all four wheels on the ground using 08060201-121-001 Do not tow a vehicle heavier than the towing hook at the front of the Installing Front Towing Eye yours. vehicle. Only tow the vehicle on paved Do not suddenly accelerate your surfaces for short distances at low vehicle as it will apply a severe shock speeds. to the tow eye and towing hook or Follow these instructions when towing rope. the vehicle with all wheels on the ground: Do not attach any rope other than to the tow eye and towing hook. 1. Shift to NEUTRAL for manual transmission or automatic transmission. Emergency Towing 2. Cycle the ignition to ACC mode. Towing Description Proper lifting and towing are necessary 3. Release the parking brake. 08060201-122-001 Installing Rear Tow Eye to prevent damage to the vehicle. Note: Remember that power assist for Government and local laws must be the brakes and steering will not be 4. Hook the towing rope to the tow followed. available when the engine is not eye. running. 225 ENHANCED EVENT DATA ACCIDENT RECORDER (EDR) RESPONSE SYSTEM This vehicle is equipped with an Event (EARS) Data Recorder (EDR). The main This vehicle is equipped with an purpose of an EDR is to record data Enhanced Accident Response System. that will assist in understanding how a Please refer to “Occupant Restraint vehicle’s systems performed under Systems” in “Safety” for further certain crash or near crash-like information on the Enhanced Accident situations, such as an air bag Response System (EARS) function. deployment or hitting a road obstacle. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR). IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

226 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

INTRODUCTION...... 228 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 235 BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 239 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES. . .239 RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 242 WHEELS AND TIRES...... 242 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES...... 257 STORINGTHEVEHICLE...... 258 BODYWORK ...... 259 INTERIORS ...... 265

227 INTRODUCTION documents, should any New Vehicle Any auto repair shop using parts Be extremely careful and prevent injury Limited Warranty coverage equivalent to your vehicle's original to yourself and others or damage to disagreement occur. Failure to do so equipment may perform maintenance. your vehicle when using this Owner’s can result in your New Vehicle Limited But we recommend that it always be Manual for inspection and maintenance. Warranty being voided either in whole done by an authorized dealer using or in part. genuine FCA parts. Selecting If you are unsure about any procedure it “Maintenance Monitor” enables the describes, we strongly urge you to have This evidence may consist of the system to notify you of your vehicle's a reliable and qualified service shop following: approaching inspection/servicing perform the work, preferably at an Original copies of repair orders or period. authorized dealer. other receipts that include the mileage Factory-trained FCA technicians and and date the vehicle was serviced. Owner Maintenance genuine FCA parts are best for your Each receipt should be signed by a Precautions vehicle. Without this expertise and the qualified automotive service technician. The owner or a qualified service parts that have been designed and For self maintenance, a statement technician should make these vehicle made especially for your vehicle, that you completed the maintenance inspections at the indicated intervals to inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient yourself, displaying mileage and the ensure safe and dependable operation. servicing may result in problems. This date the work was performed. Also, Bring any problem to the attention of an could lead to vehicle damage or an receipts for the replacement parts (fluid, authorized dealer or qualified service accident and injuries. filters, etc.) indicating the date and technician as soon as possible. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE For expert advice and quality service, mileage must accompany this When refueling perform inspection contact an authorized dealer. statement. Note: Under no circumstances should of: Note: If you elect to perform oil change intervals exceed maintenance yourself or have your Brake and clutch fluid level 10,000 miles (16,000 kilometers) or vehicle serviced at a location other than 1year. Engine coolant level an authorized dealer, FCA requires that To continue New Vehicle Limited all fluids, parts and materials must meet Engine oil level Warranty eligibility and to protect your FCA standards for durability and Washer fluid level investment, it is your responsibility to performance as described in this properly maintain your vehicle Owner’s Manual. At least monthly perform inspection according to factory recommended Claims against the warranty resulting of: schedules outlined in this Owner’s from lack of maintenance, as opposed Tire inflation pressures Manual. As part of this you must keep to defective materials or authorized FCA your maintenance records, receipts, workmanship, will not be honored. repair orders and any other documents as evidence this maintenance was performed. You must present these 228 At least twice a year (for example, Tire inflation pressure and condition Visually inspect conditions of the: every spring and fall) perform engine, transmission, lines and hoses Operation of lighting system inspection of: (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and (headlights, direction indicators, hazard rubber elements (hoses/belts/etc.) Engine coolant warning lights, etc.) Check battery charge and battery Engine oil Operation of windshield fluid level As explained in the “Introduction” washer/wiper system and paragraph, several procedures can be positioning/wear of windshield wiper Visually inspect conditions of the done only by a qualified service blades accessory drive belts technician with special tools. Every 1860 miles (3,000 km) check Check and, if necessary, change For details, read the separate Warranty and top off the engine oil level if engine oil and replace oil filter required Booklet provided with the vehicle. If you Check and, if necessary, replace are unsure about any servicing or Heavy-Duty Use Of The cabin air filter maintenance procedure, have it done Vehicle by an authorized dealer. Check and, if necessary, replace air If the vehicle is used under one of the cleaner There are strict environmental laws following conditions: regarding the disposal of waste oil and Severe Duty All Models Dusty roads fluids. Please dispose of your waste Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles properly and with due regard to the Short, repeated trips less than 4.4 - (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a environment. 5 miles (7-8km)atsub-zero outside dusty and off road environment or is We recommend that you entrust the oil temperatures operated predominately at idle or only and fluid changes of your vehicle to an very low engine RPM’s. This type of Engine idling for long periods of time authorized dealer. vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. or driving long distances at low speeds Periodic Checks or long periods of inactivity Every 620 miles (1,000 km) or before The following checks must be carried long trips check and, if necessary, top out more often than indicated in the off: Scheduled Servicing Plan: Engine coolant level Check front disc brake pad condition Brake fluid level and wear Windshield washer fluid level Check cleanliness of underhood area and all door and trunk locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

229 Scheduled Servicing Plan

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary, check Tire ••••••••••••••• Service Kit expiration date (if equipped). Check operation of lighting

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, luggage ••••••••••••••• compartment, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.). Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch, ••••••••••••••• windshield washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.).

230 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Check engine control system operation (via ••••••••••••••• diagnostic tool). Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - ••••• • • fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.). Visually inspect conditions of steering elements and ••••• • • check their operation. Check the front and rear suspension, tie rods, CV ••••• • • Joints, and replace if necessary. Check endfloat of wheel ••••• • • bearings.

231 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Check windshield/rear window wiper blade •• ••• • • • position/wear. Check operation of windshield washer system •• ••• • • • and adjust jets if necessary.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Check cleanliness of hood and trunk locks and •• ••• • • • cleanliness and lubrication of linkages. Check parking brake lever travel and adjust, if ••••••••••••••• necessary. Visually check the condition and wear of the ••••••••••••••• front and rear brakes. Visually inspect condition of evaporation control ••• • • system. 232 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Visual inspect the condition and tensioning of •• • the accessory drive belt. Replace the accessory • drive belt. **** Inspect and replace PCV • valve if necessary. Change engine oil and In accordance with Oil Change Indicator System OR Severe Duty Mileage, whichever occurs first. replace oil filter.* Replace spark plugs (1.4L ••• • • Turbo engine).**

****Replace belt every 40,000 miles (60,000 km) for use on dusty roads. *The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed one year. **The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine: Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines (refer to “Engine” in “Technical Specifications” for further information). Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the scheduled servicing plan for spark plug replacement. Contact an authorized dealer if you have any questions. 233 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000

Or Years: 123456789101112131415

Or Kilometers: 16,000 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000

Replace engine air filter.# ••• • • Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles •• (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Replace the timing belt • SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE (1.4L Turbo Engine).

#The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.

Warning!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

234 ENGINE COMPARTMENT Checking Levels

07030300-121-003 1 — Window Washer Reservoir 4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir 3 — Engine Oil Cap 6 — Battery

235 Engine Oil Engine Coolant

Warning! Warning!

You or others can be badly burned by Be very careful when working in the hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam engine compartment when the engine is from your radiator. If you see or hear hot: you may get burned. steam coming from under the hood, do Do not get too close to the radiator not open the hood until the radiator has cooling fan: the electric fan may start; had time to cool. Never open a cooling danger of injury. 07030403-121-001 system pressure cap when the radiator or Engine Compartment coolant bottle is hot. Loose clothing might be pulled by moving parts. 1 — Engine Oil Dipstick Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry 2 — Engine Oil Cap away from the radiator cooling fan when Recommended Oil the hood is raised. The fan starts Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in automatically and may start at any time, “Technical Specifications” for further 5. Pull the dipstick out again and whether the engine is running or not. information. examine the level. The level is normal if When working near the radiator cooling it is between Low and Full. If it is near fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn Inspecting engine oil level SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE or below Low, open the engine oil the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is Proceed as follows: cap/filler 2 and add enough oil to bring temperature controlled and can start at the level to Full. any time the ignition is in the ON mode. 1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level surface. Note: Do not overfill the engine oil. This may cause engine damage. Inspecting Coolant Level 2. Warm up the engine to normal Note: Changing the coolant should be operating temperature. 6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick done by an authorized dealer. is positioned properly before reinserting 3. Turn the engine OFF and wait at the dipstick. Inspect the antifreeze protection and least five minutes for the oil to return to coolant level in the coolant reservoir at the sump. 7. Reinsert the dipstick fully. least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling 4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, Engine Oil Consumption where temperatures may drop below and reinsert it fully. During the initial period of use the freezing. engine oil consumption conditions Inspect the condition and connections should stabilize after the first 3000 – of all cooling system and heater hoses. 3500 miles (5000 – 6000 km). Replace any that are worn or deteriorated. 236 If it is at or near L (Low), add coolant by mixing a minimum solution of 50% Warning! Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate for FIAT Spider. Use higher Do not open hot engine cooling system. concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are when the engine is overheated. Do not anticipated. Bring the level to F (Full). loosen or remove the cap to cool an Please contact an authorized dealer for overheated engine. Heat causes pressure assistance. to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove Securely tighten the coolant reservoir tank cap after adding coolant. the pressure cap while the system is hot or 07030601-121-002 under pressure. If the coolant reservoir is empty or new Brake Fluid Reservoir Do not use a pressure cap other than coolant is required frequently, contact the one specified for your vehicle. Personal an authorized dealer. injury or engine damage may result. Brake/Clutch Fluid Warning! Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level The coolant should be at full in the Use only manufacturer's recommended radiator and between the F (Full) and L The brakes and clutch draw fluid brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And (Low) marks on the coolant reservoir from the same reservoir. Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” when the engine is cool. for further information. Using the wrong Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir type of brake fluid can severely damage regularly. your brake system and/or impair its It should be kept between the MAX performance. The proper type of brake and MIN lines. fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic The level normally drops with master cylinder reservoir. accumulated use, a condition To avoid contamination from foreign associated with wear of brake and matter or moisture, use only new brake clutch linings. If it is excessively low, fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly have the brake/clutch system closed container. Keep the master cylinder inspected. Contact an authorized reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake dealer. fluid in a open container absorbs moisture 07030501-121-001 from the air resulting in a lower boiling Coolant Reservoir point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. 237 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can Use plain water if washer fluid is unavailable. But use only washer fluid in result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine Warning! parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. cold weather to prevent it from freezing. Brake fluid can also damage painted and Automatic Transmission vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to Control Unit Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution avoid its contact with these surfaces. and can burn or even blind you. Do not Do not allow petroleum based fluid to The transmission oil level should only be allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal checked at an authorized dealer. skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery components could be damaged, causing when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in partial or complete brake failure. This could Battery Maintenance eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately result in a collision. To get the best service from a battery: with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Keep it securely mounted. Emergency” for further information. Windshield And Keep the top clean and dry. Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Headlight Washer Fluid Keep flame or sparks away from the Keep terminals and connections Inspecting Washer Fluid Level battery. Do not use a booster battery or clean, tight, and coated with petroleum any other booster source with an output Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid jelly or terminal grease. greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable reservoir, open the cap and add fluid if clamps to touch each other. necessary. Rinse off spilled electrolyte immediately with a solution of water Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE and baking soda. compounds. Wash hands after handling. If the vehicle will not be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery leads and charge the battery every six weeks. Battery Replacement Contact an authorized dealer to purchase a replacement battery.

07030901-121-001 Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir

238 BATTERY MAINTENANCE RECHARGING Caution! PROCEDURES Battery Charging The following pages contain Procedure instructions on the required It is essential when replacing the cables maintenance from the technical on the battery that the positive cable is personnel who designed the vehicle. attached to the positive post and the Warning! negative cable is attached to the negative In addition to these specific post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) maintenance instructions specified for and negative (-) and are identified on the routine scheduled servicing, there are Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution battery case. Cable clamps should be tight other components which may require and can burn or even blind you. Do not on the terminal posts and free of periodic maintenance or replacement allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, corrosion. over the vehicle’s life cycle. skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in If a “fast charger” is used while the Body Lubrication eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both Ensure that the locks and bodywork vehicle battery cables before connecting with large amounts of water. Refer to junction points, including components “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of the charger to the battery. Do not use a Emergency” for further information. “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. such as the seat guides, door hinges (and rollers), trunk and hood are Battery gas is flammable and explosive. periodically lubricated with lithium Keep flame or sparks away from the Charge battery as follows: based grease to ensure correct, silent battery. Do not use a booster battery or operation and to protect them from rust any other booster source with an output Before recharging the battery, turn off greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable all accessories and turn the engine OFF and wear. clamps to touch each other. by cycling the ignition to OFF. Thoroughly clean the components, eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. Battery posts, terminals, and related Disconnect the negative battery After lubricating, eliminate excess oil accessories contain lead and lead cable. compounds. Wash hands after handling. and grease. Also pay particular Connect the charger cables to the attention to the hood closing devices, battery terminals, observing the polarity to ensure correct operation. (+,–). During operations on the hood, be sure Turn on the charger. to perform with the engine cold, also remember to check, clean and lubricate When finished, turn the charger off the locking, release and safety devices. before disconnecting the battery. Make sure the hood's secondary latch Reconnect the negative battery keeps the hood from opening when the terminal. primary latch is released. 239 Lubricate the external lock cylinders Note: Blade Replacement twice a year. Apply a small amount of Hot waxes applied by automatic car Proceed as follows: high-quality lubricant directly into the washers have been known to affect lock cylinder. If necessary, contact your 1. Raise the wiper arm. the wiper's ability to clean windows. authorized dealer. 2. Open the clip and slide the blade To prevent damage to the wiper Wiper Blades assembly in the direction of the arrow. blades, do not use gas, paraffin, paint Contamination of either the windshield thinner, or other solvents on or near or the blades with foreign matter can them. reduce wiper effectiveness. Common sources are insects, tree sap, and hot Be careful not to pinch hands or wax treatments used by some fingers as it may cause injury, or commercial car washes. damage the wipers. When washing or If the blades are not wiping properly, servicing the vehicle, make sure the clean the window and blades with a wiper lever is in the OFF position. good cleaner or mild detergent; then Replacing Windshield Wiper Blades rinse thoroughly with clean water. When the wipers no longer clean well, Repeat if necessary. the blades are probably worn or 07031101-36A-001 When the wiper lever is in the AUTO cracked. Replace them. Clip position and the ignition is cycled to the

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE When raising both windshield wiper ON mode, the wipers may move arms, raise the driver's side wiper arm automatically in the following cases: first. If the windshield above the rain When lowering the wiper arms, slowly sensor is touched. lower the wiper arm from the If the windshield above the rain passenger's side first while supporting sensor is wiped with a cloth. it with your hand. Forcefully lowering the wiper arms could damage the wiper If the windshield is struck with a hand arm and blade, and may scratch or or other object. crack the windshield. If the rain sensor is struck with a Note: To prevent damage to the wiper hand or other object from inside the arms and other components, do not try vehicle. to sweep the wiper arm by hand.

240 3. Tilt the blade assembly and remove 6. Carefully insert the new blade it from the arm. rubber. Then install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

07031101-36A-003 Blade Holder 07031101-36A-002 5. Remove the metal stiffeners from Blade Assembly and Arm each blade rubber and install them in 07031101-36A-005 the new blade. Reassemble Blade

Warning!

To prevent damage to the windshield let the wiper arm down easily, do not let it slap down on the windshield.

4. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it out of blade holder.

07031101-36A-004 Metal Stiffeners

241 RAISING THE WHEELS AND TIRES Note: VEHICLE Tire Safety Information P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. If the vehicle needs to be raised, see an Tire safety information will cover authorized dealer which is equipped P-Metric tires have the letter “P” aspects of the following information: molded into the sidewall preceding the with arm hoists or workshop lifts. Tire Markings, Tire Identification The vehicle’s lifting points are marked size designation. Example: Numbers, Tire Terminology and P215/65R15 95H. on the side skirts with the symbols. Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tire Markings Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/ 65R15 96H. LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 0601085395US for the letters “LT” that are molded into Tire Markings the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum Safety Standards Load Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Code (TIN) Temporary high pressure compact 2 — Size 5 — Maximum spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” Designation Pressure molded into the sidewall preceding the 3 — Service 6 — Treadwear, size designation. Example: Description Traction and T145/80D18 103M. Temperature High flotation tire sizing is based on Grades U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

242 Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code "R" means radial construction, or "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

243 EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN) white sidewalls will have the full TIN, vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the including the date code, located on the outboard side, then you will find it on The TIN may be found on one or both white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the inboard side of the tire. sides of the tire; however, the date code the TIN on the outboard side of black may only be on one side. Tires with sidewall tires as mounted on the

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week

244 EXAMPLE: 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front B-Pillar door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting Cold Tire Inflation Pressure for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Maximum Inflation Pressure pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading Tire Placard capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

245 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Loading Placard Note: The proper cold tire inflation The vehicle maximum load on the tire pressure is listed on the driver’s side must not exceed the load carrying B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You side door. will not exceed the tire's load carrying Check the inflation pressure of each capacity if you adhere to the loading tire, including the spare tire (if conditions, tire size, and cold tire equipped), at least monthly and inflate inflation pressures specified on the Tire to the recommended pressure for your and Loading Information placard in vehicle. “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual. GUID-054900418-high.tif Tire And Loading Information Note: Under a maximum loaded Placard vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear This placard tells you important axles must not be exceeded. information about the: For further information on GAWRs, 1. Number of people that can be vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer carried in the vehicle. to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 0806115150US To determine the maximum loading Example Tire Placard Location 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. conditions of your vehicle, locate the (Door) statement “The combined weight of 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the occupants and cargo should never front, rear, and spare tires. exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

0806115151US Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

246 Steps For Determining Correct the amount of available cargo and passengers in your vehicle, the amount Load Limit— luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. of available cargo and luggage load (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = (1) Locate the statement “The 295 kg) as shown in step 4. combined weight of occupants and (5) Determine the combined weight cargo should never exceed XXX kg of luggage and cargo being loaded Note: or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's on the vehicle. That weight may not If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, placard. safely exceed the available cargo load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table (2) Determine the combined weight and luggage load capacity shows examples on how to calculate of the driver and passengers that calculated in Step 4. total load, cargo/luggage, and towing will be riding in your vehicle. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a capacities of your vehicle with varying trailer, load from your trailer will be seating configurations and number and (3) Subtract the combined weight of size of occupants. This table is for the driver and passengers from XXX transferred to your vehicle. Consult illustration purposes only and may not kg or XXX lbs. this manual to determine how this be accurate for the seating and load (4) The resulting figure equals the reduces the available cargo and carry capacity of your vehicle. available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity of your For the following example, the luggage load capacity. For vehicle. combined weight of occupants and example, if “XXX” amount equals Metric Example For Load Limit cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). 1400 lbs. and there will be five For example, if “XXX” amount equals 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg

247 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

GUID-054900419-high.tif

Warning!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

248 Tires — General Unequal tire pressures from one side of Tire Inflation Pressures Information the vehicle to the other can cause the The proper cold tire inflation pressure is vehicle to drift to the right or left. Tire Pressure listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear Always drive with each tire inflated to the edge of the driver's side door. Proper tire inflation pressure is essential recommended cold tire inflation pressure. to the safe and satisfactory operation of At least once a month: your vehicle. Four primary areas are Check and adjust tire pressure with a Both under-inflation and over-inflation affected by improper tire pressure: good quality pocket-type pressure affect the stability of the vehicle and can gauge. Do not make a visual judgement Safety and Vehicle Stability produce a feeling of sluggish response when determining proper inflation. Tires or over responsiveness in the steering. Economy may look properly inflated even when Tread Wear Note: they are under-inflated. Ride Comfort Unequal tire pressures from side to Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or side may cause erratic and visible damage. Safety unpredictable steering response. Unequal tire pressure from side to Caution! Warning! side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. After inspecting or adjusting the tire Fuel Economy Improperly inflated tires are dangerous pressure, always reinstall the valve stem and can cause collisions. Underinflated tires will increase tire cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel from entering the valve stem, which could Underinflation increases tire flexing and consumption. damage the valve stem. can result in overheating and tire failure. Tread Wear Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to Improper cold tire inflation pressures Inflation pressures specified on the cushion shock. Objects on the road and can cause abnormal wear patterns and placard are always “cold tire inflation chuckholes can cause damage that result pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is in tire failure. reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. defined as the tire pressure after the Overinflated or underinflated tires can Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability vehicle has not been driven for at least affect vehicle handling and can fail three hours, or driven less than 1 mile suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle Proper tire inflation contributes to a (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of control. comfortable ride. Over-inflation three hours. The cold tire inflation Unequal tire pressures can cause produces a jarring and uncomfortable pressure must not exceed the steering problems. You could lose control ride. maximum inflation pressure molded into of your vehicle. the tire sidewall. 249 Check tire pressures more often if recommended safe operating speeds, The puncture is no greater than a ¼ subject to a wide range of outdoor loading and cold tire inflation pressures. of an inch (6 mm). temperatures, as tire pressures vary Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire with temperature changes. repairs and additional information. Warning! Tire pressures change by approximately Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air tires that have experienced a loss of temperature change. Keep this in mind High speed driving with your vehicle under pressure should be replaced when checking tire pressure inside a maximum load is dangerous. The added immediately with another Run Flat tire garage, especially in the Winter. strain on your tires could cause them to of identical size and service description Example: If garage temperature = 68°F fail. You could have a serious collision. Do (Load Index and Speed Symbol). (20°C) and the outside temperature = not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation capacity at continuous speeds above Run Flat Tires — If Equipped pressure should be increased by 3 psi 75 mph (120 km/h). Run Flat tires allow you the capability to (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph every 12°F (7°C) for this outside Radial Ply Tires (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation temperature condition. pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is Tire pressure may increase from 2 to referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. Warning! Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa).

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE build up or your tire pressure will be too Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat low. Combining radial ply tires with other types mode it has limited driving capabilities of tires on your vehicle will cause your Tire Pressures For High Speed vehicle to handle poorly. The instability and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. Operation could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine It is not recommended driving a vehicle The manufacturer advocates driving at them with other types of tires. loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer safe speeds and within posted speed while a tire is in the run flat mode. limits. Where speed limits or conditions Tire Repair See the tire pressure monitoring section are such that the vehicle can be driven for more information. at high speeds, maintaining correct tire If your tire becomes damaged, it may inflation pressure is very important. be repaired if it meets the following Tire Spinning Increased tire pressure and reduced criteria: When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice vehicle loading may be required for The tire has not been driven on when conditions, do not spin your vehicle's high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to flat. wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for an authorized tire dealer or original longer than 30 seconds continuously equipment vehicle dealer for The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is without stopping. not repairable). 250 These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will Warning! Warning! appear as bands when the tread depth becomesa1/16ofaninch(1.6mm). Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. When the tread is worn to the tread Tires and the spare tire should be replaced Forces generated by excessive wheel wear indicators, the tire should be after six years, regardless of the remaining speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” tread. Failure to follow this warning can tire could explode and injure someone. Do in this section for further information. result in sudden tire failure. You could lose not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than control and have a collision resulting in 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than Life Of Tire serious injury or death. 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a The service life of a tire is dependent spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. upon varying factors including, but not Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry limited to: place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with Tread Wear Indicators Driving style. oil, grease, and gasoline. Tread wear indicators are in the original Tire pressure - Improper cold tire Replacement Tires equipment tires to help you in inflation pressures can cause uneven determining when your tires should be wear patterns to develop across the tire The tires on your new vehicle provide a replaced. tread. These abnormal wear patterns balance of many characteristics. They will reduce tread life, resulting in the should be inspected regularly for wear need for earlier tire replacement. and correct cold tire inflation pressures. Distance driven. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the Performance tires, tires with a speed originals in size, quality and rating of V or higher, and Summer tires performance when replacement is typically have a reduced tread life. needed. Refer to the paragraph on Rotation of these tires per the vehicle “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. scheduled maintenance is highly Refer to the Tire and Loading recommended. Information placard or the Vehicle 0806104865NA Tire Tread Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index 1—WornTire and Speed Symbol for your tire will be 2 — New Tire found on the original equipment tire sidewall.

251 See the Tire Sizing Chart example Never use a tire with a smaller load Summer Or Three Season Tires found in the “Tire Safety Information” index or capacity, other than what was — If Equipped section of this manual for more originally equipped on your vehicle. Using information relating to the Load Index a tire with a smaller load index could result Summer tires provide traction in both and Speed Symbol of a tire. in tire overloading and failure. You could wet and dry conditions, and are not It is recommended to replace the two lose control and have a collision. intended to be driven in snow or on ice. front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Failure to equip your vehicle with tires If your vehicle is equipped with Summer Replacing just one tire can seriously having adequate speed capability can tires, be aware these tires are not affect your vehicle’s handling. If you result in sudden tire failure and loss of designed for Winter or cold driving ever replace a wheel, make sure that vehicle control. conditions. Install Winter tires on your the wheel’s specifications match those vehicle when ambient temperatures are of the original wheels. less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more It is recommended you contact an Caution! information, contact an authorized authorized tire dealer or original dealer. equipment dealer with any questions Replacing original tires with tires of a Summer tires do not contain the all you may have on tire specifications or different size may result in false capability. Failure to use equivalent speedometer and odometer readings. season designation or mountain/ replacement tires may adversely affect snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. the safety, handling, and ride of your Use Summer tires only in sets of four; Tire Types vehicle. failure to do so may adversely affect the SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE All Season Tires — If Equipped safety and handling of your vehicle. Warning! All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Warning! Winter). Traction levels may vary Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice for your vehicle. Some combinations of conditions. You could lose vehicle control, unapproved tires and wheels may change M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on resulting in severe injury or death. Driving suspension dimensions and performance the tire sidewall. Use all season tires too fast for conditions also creates the characteristics, resulting in changes to only in sets of four; failure to do so may possibility of loss of vehicle control. steering, handling, and braking of your adversely affect the safety and handling vehicle. This can cause unpredictable of your vehicle. handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. 252 Snow Tires Spare Tires — If compact spare by looking at the spare Equipped tire description on the Tire and Loading Some areas of the country require the Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire Information Placard located on the use of snow tires during the Winter. Service Kit instead of a spare tire, driver’s side door opening or on the Snow tires can be identified by a please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the Case Of Emergency” for further descriptions begin with the letter “T” or tire sidewall. information. “S” preceding the size designation. If you need snow tires, Example: T145/80D18 103M. select tires equivalent T,S=Temporary Spare Tire in size and type to the Caution! Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment original equipment tire should be tires. Use snow tires Because of the reduced ground clearance, repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on only in sets of four; do not take your vehicle through an your vehicle at the first opportunity. failure to do so may automatic car wash with a compact or Do not install a wheel cover or attempt adversely affect the safety and handling limited use temporary spare installed. of your vehicle. Damage to the vehicle may result. to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel Snow tires generally have lower speed is designed specifically for the compact ratings than what was originally Spare Tire Matching Original spare tire. Do not install more than one equipped with your vehicle and should compact spare tire and wheel on the not be operated at sustained speeds Equipped Tire And Wheel — If vehicle at any given time. over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds Equipped above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to Your vehicle may be equipped with a original equipment or an authorized tire Warning! spare tire and wheel equivalent in look dealer for recommended safe operating and function to the original equipment speeds, loading and cold tire inflation tire and wheel found on the front or rear pressures. Compact and collapsible spares are for axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may temporary emergency use only. With these While studded tires improve be used in the tire rotation for your spares, do not drive more than 50 mph performance on ice, skid and traction vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have capability on wet or dry surfaces may refer to an authorized tire dealer for the limited tread life. When the tread is worn to be poorer than that of non-studded recommended tire rotation pattern. the tread wear indicators, the temporary tires. Some states prohibit studded use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be tires; therefore, local laws should be Compact Spare Tire — If sure to follow the warnings, which apply to checked before using these tire types. your spare. Failure to do so could result in Equipped spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a 253 Collapsible Spare Tire — If contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original Equipped Warning! equipped tire on the front or rear axle of The collapsible spare is for temporary your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of emergency use only. You can identify if Compact and Collapsible spares are for this limited use spare tire affects vehicle your vehicle is equipped with a temporary emergency use only. With these handling. Since it is not the same as collapsible spare by looking at the spares, do not drive more than 50 mph your original equipment tire, replace (or spare tire description on the Tire and (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have repair) the original equipment tire and Loading Information Placard located on limited tread life. When the tread is worn to reinstall on the vehicle at the first the driver’s side door opening or on the the tread wear indicators, the temporary opportunity. sidewall of the tire. use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to Collapsible spare tire description your spare. Failure to do so could result in Warning! example: 165/80-17 101P. spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Since this tire has limited tread life, the Limited use spares are for emergency use original equipment tire should be Full Size Spare — If Equipped repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on only. Installation of this limited use spare your vehicle at the first opportunity. tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, The full size spare is for temporary do not drive more than the speed listed on Inflate collapsible tire only after the emergency use only. This tire may look the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated wheel is properly installed to the like the originally equipped tire on the to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is your Tire and Loading Information Placard SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the electric air pump before lowering not. This spare tire may have limited located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the the vehicle. tread life. When the tread is worn to the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace Do not install a wheel cover or attempt tread wear indicators, the temporary (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your to mount a conventional tire on the use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel of vehicle control. is designed specifically for the your original equipment tire, replace (or collapsible spare tire. repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Limited Use Spare — If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label 254 Wheel And Wheel Trim Note: If you intend parking or storing Care your vehicle for an extended period Caution! after cleaning the wheels with wheel All wheels and wheel trim, especially cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the aluminum and chrome plated wheels, brakes to remove the water droplets should be cleaned regularly using mild Avoid products or automatic car washes from the brake components. This (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many activity will remove the red rust on the their luster and to prevent corrosion. aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic brake rotors and prevent vehicle Wash wheels with the same soap car washes may damage the wheel's vibration when braking. solution recommended for the body of protective finish. Such damage is not the vehicle and remember to always covered by the New Vehicle Limited Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin wash when the surfaces are not hot to Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Chrome, or Low Gloss Clear Coat the touch. Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is Wheels Your wheels are susceptible to recommended. deterioration caused by salt, sodium Caution! chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium When cleaning extremely dirty wheels chloride, etc., and other road chemicals including excessive brake dust, care used to melt ice or control dust on dirt must be taken in the selection of tire If your vehicle is equipped with these roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and and wheel cleaning chemicals and specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do equipment to prevent damage to the compounds. They will permanently not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or damage this finish and such damage is not They can damage the wheel’s Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their covered by the New Vehicle Limited protective coating that helps keep them equivalent is recommended or select a Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING from corroding and tarnishing. non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT aluminum or chrome wheels. CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish. Caution!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. 255 Snow Chains The use of snow chains should be in Caution! Caution! compliance with local regulations of each country. In certain countries, tires marked with code M+S (Mud and To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, Using snow chains with tires with Snow) are considered as winter observe the following precautions: non-original dimensions may damage the equipment; therefore their use is Because of restricted traction device vehicle. equivalent to that of the snow chains. clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important Using different size or type (M+S, snow, The snow chains may be applied only that only traction devices in good condition etc.) tires between front and rear axle may to the front wheel tires. Check the are used. Broken devices can cause adversely affect vehicle driveability, with tension of the snow chains after the first serious damage. Stop the vehicle the risk of losing control of the vehicle and few feet have been driven. immediately if noise occurs that could resulting accidents. indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further Tire Rotation use. Warning! Recommendations Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile The front and rear tires are subject to Using tires of different size and type (M+S, (0.8 km). different loads and stress due to Snow) between front and rear axles can steering, maneuver and braking. For cause unpredictable handling. You could Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). this reason they are subject to uneven

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE lose control and have a collision. Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns wear. To resolve this problem, tires and large bumps, especially with a loaded should be rotated at the appropriate vehicle. time. Do not drive for a prolonged period on The following rotation methods must dry pavement. NOT be used with one-way unidirectional tires! This type of tires can Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method only be switched from the front axle to of installation, operating speed, and the rear axle and vice versa, keeping conditions for use. Always use the them on the same side of the vehicle. suggested operating speed of the device Rotate one-way unidirectional tires manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern only from Do not use traction devices on a front to rear, not from side to side. Tire compact spare tire. performance will be reduced if rotated from side to side. 256 Tire rotation means moving the wheels Because your vehicle is not DEPARTMENT OF to a different position, with respect to equipped with a spare tire, you cannot TRANSPORTATION the vehicle. During rotation, inspect tires do a tire rotation safely with the jack UNIFORM TIRE for correct balance. that may come with your vehicle if so QUALITY GRADES equipped. Contact an authorized dealer for tire rotation. The following tire grading Also, inspect them for uneven wear and categories were established by the damage. Abnormal wear is usually National Highway Traffic Safety caused by one or a combination of the Administration. The specific grade following: rating assigned by the tire's Incorrect tire pressure manufacturer in each category is Improper wheel alignment shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. Out-of-balance wheel 07031402-FRT-001 All passenger vehicle tires must Severe braking Rotation Diagram conform to Federal safety The single wheel will therefore operate After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to requirements in addition to these specification and inspect the wheel nuts on a different axle and, where possible, grades. on the opposite side of the vehicle. for tightness. With Tire Pressure Monitor System Treadwear Note: (TPMS) The Treadwear grade is a Rotate tires periodically. Irregular tire The TPM system must be initialized comparative rating, based on the wear is dangerous. To equalize tread after adjusting the tire pressure, to wear rate of the tire when tested wear for maintaining good make the system operate normally. performance in handling and braking, Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring under controlled conditions on a rotate the tires every 6,200 miles System” in “Safety” for further specified government test course. (10,000 km), or sooner if irregular wear information. For example, a tire graded develops. Rotate unidirectional tires and radial 150 would wear one and one-half To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires that have an asymmetrical tread times as well on the government pattern only from front to rear, not from tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) at course as a tire graded 100. The the latest or sooner if irregular wear side to side. Tire performance will be develops. FCA recommends to rotate reduced if rotated from side to side. relative performance of tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) to help depends upon the actual increase tire life and distribute wear conditions of their use, however, more evenly. and may depart significantly from 257 the norm due to variations in driving when tested under controlled STORING THE habits, service practices, and conditions on a specified indoor VEHICLE differences in road characteristics laboratory test wheel. If the vehicle is left inactive for longer and climate. Sustained high temperature can than a month, the following precautions should be observed: Traction Grades cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and Park the vehicle in covered, dry and if The Traction grades, from highest possible well-ventilated premises and excessive temperature can lead to to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. slightly open the windows. sudden tire failure. The grade C These grades represent the tire's corresponds to a level of Check that the parking brake is not ability to stop on wet pavement, as activated. performance, which all passenger measured under controlled vehicle tires must meet under the Disconnect the negative battery conditions on specified government terminal and check the battery charge. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety test surfaces of asphalt and Repeat this check once every three Standard No. 109. Grades B and A concrete. A tire marked C may months during storage. represent higher levels of have poor traction performance. If the battery is not disconnected performance on the laboratory test from the electrical system, check its wheel, than the minimum required state of charge every thirty days. by law. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Warning! Clean and protect the painted parts using protective wax. The traction grade assigned to Warning! Clean and protect the shiny metal this tire is based on straight-ahead parts using special compounds available commercially. braking traction tests, and does The temperature grade for this tire not include acceleration, is established for a tire that is Sprinkle talcum powder on the cornering, hydroplaning, or peak properly inflated and not windshield and rear window wiper rubber blades and lift them off the traction characteristics. overloaded. Excessive speed, glass. under-inflation, or excessive Cover the vehicle with a fabric or Temperature Grades loading, either separately or in perforated plastic sheet, paying combination, can cause heat The Temperature grades are A (the particular care not to damage the buildup and possible tire failure. painted surface by dragging any dust highest), B, and C, representing the that may have accumulated on it. Do tire's resistance to the generation of not use compact plastic sheets which heat and its ability to dissipate heat, 258 do not allow humidity to evaporate from BODYWORK Preserving The the surface of the vehicle. Paintwork Protection From Inflate the tires at a pressure of Atmospheric Agents Touch up abrasions and scratches +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) higher than The vehicle is equipped with the best immediately to prevent the formation of recommended on the tire placard and available technological solutions to rust. check it periodically. protect the bodywork against corrosion. Maintenance of paintwork consists of Do not drain the engine cooling These include: washing the vehicle: the frequency system. depends on the conditions and Painting products and systems environment in which the vehicle is Any time the vehicle is left inactive for which give the vehicle resistance to used. two weeks or more, operate the air corrosion and abrasion. For example, it is advisable to wash the conditioning system with engine idling Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) vehicle more often in areas with high for at least five minutes, setting external steel sheets, with high resistance to levels of atmospheric pollution or salted air and with fan set to maximum speed. corrosion. roads. This operation will ensure appropriate lubrication for the system, thus Spraying of plastic parts, with a To correctly wash the vehicle, follow minimizing the possibility of damage to protective function in the more exposed these instructions: the compressor when the system is points: underdoor, inner fender, edges, If high pressure jets or cleaners are operated again. etc. used to wash the vehicle, keep a Note: After placing the ignition in the Use of “open” boxed sections to distance of at least 1.3 ft (40 cm) from OFF mode and having closed the driver prevent condensation and pockets of the bodywork to avoid damage or side door, wait at least one minute moisture which could favor the alteration. Build up of water could before disconnecting the electrical formation of rust inside. cause damage to the vehicle in the long supply from the battery. When term. reconnecting the electrical supply to the Use of special films to protect against abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. Wash the vehicle using a low battery, make sure that the ignition in pressure jet of water if possible. the OFF mode and the driver side door rear fender, doors, etc.). is closed. Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy Corrosion Warranty solution over the bodywork, frequently Your vehicle is covered by Corrosion rinsing the sponge. Warranty against perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure Rinse well with water and dry with a or bodywork. For the general terms of jet of air or a chamois leather. this Corrosion Warranty, refer to the Warranty Booklet.

259 Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door Prevention: be waxed according to the instructions frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) It is necessary to wash and wax your in this section. Insects and tree sap are with special care, as water may vehicle to preserve its finish according best removed with a soft sponge and stagnate more easily in these areas. Do to the instructions in this section. These water or a commercially available not wash the vehicle after it has been steps should be taken immediately after chemical cleaner. left in the sun or with the hood hot: this you suspect that acid rain has settled Another method is to cover the affected may alter the shine of the paintwork. on your vehicle's finish. area with dampened newspaper for one Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned to two hours. After removing the Damage caused by bird in the same way as the rest of the newspaper, rinse off the loosened dropping/insects/tree sap vehicle. debris with water. Problem: Note: Bird droppings contain acids. If these Water marks Avoid parking under trees; the sap are not removed they can eat away the Problem: dropped by trees makes the paint clear and color base coat of the Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can work go dull and increases the vehicle's paintwork. contain harmful minerals such as salt possibility of corrosion. When insects stick to the paint surface and lime. If moisture containing these and decompose, corrosive compounds minerals settles on the vehicle and Bird droppings must be washed off form. These can erode the clear and evaporates, the minerals will immediately and thoroughly as the acid color base coat of the vehicle's concentrate and harden to form white they contain is particularly aggressive. paintwork if they are not removed. rings. The rings can damage your SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Etching caused by acid rain or Tree sap will harden and adhere vehicle's finish. industrial fallout permanently to the paint finish. If you Prevention: Cause: scratch the sap off while it is hard, It is necessary to wash and wax your Industrial pollutants and vehicle some vehicle paint could come off with vehicle to preserve its finish according emissions drift into the air and mix with it. to the instructions in this section. These rain or dew to form acids. These acids Prevention: steps should be taken immediately after can settle on a vehicle's finish. As the It is necessary to have your vehicle you find water marks on your vehicle's water evaporates, the acid becomes washed and waxed to preserve its finish finish. concentrated and can damage the according to the instructions in this Paint chipping finish. section. This should be done as soon Problem: as possible. The longer the acid remains on the Paint chipping occurs when gravel surface, the greater the chance is for Bird droppings can be removed with a thrown in the air by another vehicle's damage. soft sponge and water. If you are tires hits your vehicle. travelling and these are not available, a moistened tissue may also take care of the problem. The cleaned area should 260 How to avoid paint chipping: If the vehicle is washed improperly, the Note: paint surface could be scratched. Here Keeping a safe distance between you Keep hands and scrapers clear of are some examples of how scratching and the vehicle ahead reduces the the windshield when the wiper lever is could occur: chances of having your paint chipped in the AUTO position and the ignition is by flying gravel. The vehicle is washed without first cycled to ON mode as fingers could be Note: rinsing off dirt and other foreign matter. pinched or the wipers and wiper blades damaged when the wipers The vehicle is washed with a rough, The paint chipping zone varies with activate automatically. If you are going dry, or dirty cloth. the speed of the vehicle. For example, to clean the windshield, be sure the when travelling at 55 mph (90 km/h), The vehicle is washed at a car wash wipers are turned off completely (when the paint chipping zone is 164 ft that uses brushes that are dirty or too it is most likely that the engine is left (50 m). stiff. running) this is particularly important when clearing ice and snow. In low temperatures, a vehicle's Cleansers or wax containing finish hardens. This increases the abrasives are used. Do not spray water in the engine chance of paint chipping. Note: FCA is not responsible for compartment. Otherwise, it could Chipped paint can lead to rust scratches caused by automatic car result in engine-starting problems or forming on your vehicle. Before this washes or improper washing. damage to electrical parts. happens, repair the damage by using Scratches are more noticeable on When washing and waxing the FCA touch-up paint according to the vehicles with darker paint finishes. vehicle, be careful not to apply instructions in this section. Failure to When the wiper lever is in the AUTO excessive force to any single area of repair the affected area could lead to position and the ignition is placed in the the vehicle hood. Otherwise, you could serious rusting and expensive repairs. ON mode, the wipers may move dent the vehicle. Follow all label and container directions automatically in the following cases: Do not use automatic car washing when using a chemical cleaner or If the windshield above the rain machines and car washing devices polish. Read all warnings and cautions. sensor is touched or wiped with a cloth. using high water pressure. Maintaining The Finish If the windshield is struck with a hand Make sure that the fuel door is Washing or other object from either outside or closed and lock the doors. Otherwise, To help protect the finish from rust and inside the vehicle. the fuel door may be forcefully opened deterioration, wash your vehicle by water pressure causing damage to thoroughly and frequently, at least once the vehicle or fuel door. a month, with lukewarm or cold water.

261 To minimize scratches on the vehicle's Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, Repairing Damage To paint finish: industrial fallout, and similar deposits The Finish can damage the finish if not removed Rinse off any dirt or other foreign Deep scratches or chips on the finish immediately. When prompt washing matter using lukewarm or cold water should be repaired promptly. Exposed with plain water is ineffective, use a mild before washing. metal quickly rusts and can lead to soap made for use on vehicles. major repairs. Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water Thoroughly rinse off all soap with Note: If your vehicle is damaged and and a soft cloth when washing the lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow needs metal parts repaired or replaced, vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth. soap to dry on the finish. make sure the body shop applies Rub gently when washing or drying After washing the vehicle, dry it with a corrosion prevention materials to all the vehicle. clean chamois to prevent water spots parts, both repaired and new. This will from forming. prevent them from rusting. Take your vehicle only to a car wash that keeps its brushes well maintained. Waxing Bright-Metal Maintenance Do not use abrasive cleansers or Your vehicle needs to be waxed when wax that contain abrasives. water no longer beads on the finish. Use tar remover to remove road tar and Always wash and dry the vehicle before insects. Never do this with a knife or waxing it. In addition to the vehicle similar tool. Caution! body, wax the metal trim to maintain its To prevent corrosion on brigh-tmetal lustre: surfaces, apply wax or chrome SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE preservative and rub it to a high lustre. Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, Use wax which contains no or strong detergents containing highly abrasives. Waxes containing abrasive During cold weather or in coastal areas, alkaline or caustic agents on chrome will remove paint and could damage cover bright-metal parts with a coating plated or anodized aluminium parts. This bright metal parts. of wax or preservative heavier than may damage the protective coating; also, usual. It would also help to coat them cleaners and detergents may discolor or Use a good grade of natural wax for with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or deteriorate the paint. metallic, mica, and solid colors. some other protective compound. When waxing, coat evenly with the Pay special attention to removing salt, sponge supplied or a soft cloth. dirt, mud, and other foreign material from the underside of the fenders, and Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth. make sure the drain holes in the lower Note: A spot remover to remove oil, edges of the doors and rocker panels tar, and similar materials will usually also are clean. take off the wax. Rewax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not need it. 262 Aluminium Wheel Washing Maintenance Caution! Do not wait until the convertible top A protective coating is provided over gets really dirty before cleaning it. Dirt the aluminium wheels. Special care is that's there too long will cause Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, needed to protect this coating. deterioration. or strong detergents containing highly Note: Do not use any detergent other Before washing, remove dust and alkaline or caustic agents on chrome than mild detergent. Before using any plated or anodized aluminium parts. This coarse particulate with a soft brush. detergent, verify the ingredients. may result in damage to the protective Gently clean the convertible top with coating and cause discoloration or paint Otherwise, the product could discolor deterioration. or stain the aluminium wheels. a synthetic neutral detergent, lots of water, and a soft brush.

Underbody Maintenance Caution! Rinse it thoroughly with clean water to remove all the soap. Road chemicals and salt used for ice and snow removal and solvents used Do not use a wire brush or any abrasive Wipe it as dry as you can before the for dust control may collect on the cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent on water dries on it. underbody. If not removed, they will aluminium wheels. They may damage the Then allow it to dry completely before speed up rusting and deterioration of coating. lowering it. such underbody parts as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system, Note: Always use a sponge or soft even though these parts may be coated cloth to clean the wheels. Rinse the with anti-corrosive material. wheels thoroughly with lukewarm or Thoroughly flush the underbody and cold water. Also, be sure to clean the wheel housings with lukewarm or cold wheels after driving on dusty or salted water at the end of each winter. Try also roads to help prevent corrosion. to do this every month. Pay special attention to these areas Convertible Top because they easily hide mud and dirt. It Maintenance will do more harm than good to wet The convertible top is made of a special down the road grime without removing it. high-grade material, but if it's not taken The lower edges of doors, rocker good care of, hardening, staining, and panels, and frame members have drain loss of lustre will result. Maintain it holes that should not be clogged. under these guidelines. Water trapped there will cause rusting.

263 Test on an inconspicuous, small corner of the convertible top if you are Caution! not sure. Do not get any car wax on the Automatic and high-pressure car convertible top. washes are harmful to a convertible top. Avoid them. If you do, remove it with a good leather cleaner or mild detergent Do not spray water directly on the area (about 5% solution). where the window glass and the convertible top meet. This would probably Let the convertible top dry cause water to enter the interior. completely before lowering after 07040110123001 Do not spray water directly on the seam applying treatment or dressing. Drain Filter Location area of the body and the convertible top 1 — Drain Filter as it could result in water penetrating the interior. Drain Filter Cleaning 2 — Bow If leaves or other matter block the drain Do not wipe the convertible top using filter, water may enter the vehicle. Clean alcohol, chlorine bleach, or organic 2. Remove the drain filter while solvents such as thinner, benzene, or the drain filter at least once a year. pressing the tab. gasoline. Otherwise, they may cause discoloration or stains. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Too much treatment on the convertible top can be as damaging as too little. Follow the manufacturer's directions. Do not over do it!

Note: Some leather treatment products can ruin the convertible top's gloss. Be 07040110122001 careful of the one you choose. 07040110124001 Drain Filter Drain Filter Tab Proceed as follows: 3. Remove leaves and other matter 1. Check the position of the drain filter accumulated in the drain filter. with your hand from behind the bow.

264 4. Reinstall the drain filter in the reverse INTERIORS order of the removal procedure. Caution! Seats And Fabric Parts Note: Make sure that the drain filter is securely attached to its designated position by pushing it until the tab High water temperature and high water Warning! locks. Water may enter the vehicle if the pressure car washers are available drain filter is not secured to its depending on the type of high pressure car washer device. If the car washer nozzle designated position. For this operation Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning is put too close to the vehicle or aimed at purposes. Many are potentially flammable, go to an authorized dealer. one area for an extended period of time, it and if used in closed areas they may cause could deform plastic parts or damage the Plastic Part respiratory harm. paint. Maintenance Do not keep aerosol cans in the car: they When cleaning the plastic lenses of the Do not use wax containing compounds might explode. Aerosol cans must not be lights, do not use gasoline, paraffin, (polish). Otherwise, it could result in paint exposed to a temperature exceeding rectified spirit, paint, thinner, highly damage. 122°F (50°C). When the vehicle is exposed to sunlight the internal temperature can acidic detergents, or strongly alkaline In addition, do not use an electrical or air greatly exceed this value. detergents. tool to apply wax. Otherwise, the frictional Otherwise, these chemical agents can heat generated could result in deformation discolor or damage the surfaces of plastic parts or paint damage. Caution! resulting in a significant loss in functionality. If plastic parts become inadvertently exposed to any of these Direct contact of air fresheners, insect chemical agents, flush with water repellents, suntan lotions, or hand immediately. sanitizers, to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may If plastic parts such as the bumpers cause permanent damage. Wipe away become inadvertently exposed to immediately. chemical agents or fluids such as gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery Damage caused by these type of fluid, it could cause discoloration, products may not be covered by your New staining, or paint peeling. Wipe off any Vehicle Limited Warranty. such chemical agents or fluids using a Rubbing the interior side of the soft cloth immediately. convertible top vigorously with a stiff brush or cloth may cause damage.

265 Vinyl Clean the webbing with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl Caution! with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. carpets. Follow instructions. Do not Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl bleach or dye the belts, this may cleaner. Do not wipe leather parts using alcohol, weaken them. chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry Fabric as thinner, benzene, or gasoline. the belt webbing and make sure there Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric Otherwise, it may cause discoloration or is no remaining moisture before with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. stains. retracting them. Clean it with a mild soap solution good Plastic And Coated for upholstery and carpets. Note: Remove fresh spots immediately with a Parts Scratches or nicks on the panels fabric spot cleaner. Clean interior plastic parts with a damp and metallic trim resulting from the use cloth (if possible made from microfiber), To keep the fabric looking clean and of a hard brush or cloth may not be and a solution of water and neutral, fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color repairable. will be affected, it can be stained easily, non-abrasive detergent. and its fire-resistance may be reduced. Be particularly careful when To clean oily or persistent stains, use Note: Use only recommended cleaners cleaning high gloss panels and metallic specific products free from solvents and and procedures. Others may affect trim as they can be easily scratched. designed to maintain the original appearance and fire-resistance. appearance and color of the SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE components. Interior Panels Lap / Shoulder Belt Remove any dust using a microfiber When the interior panels need to be cloth, if necessary moistened with cleaned, use soft material such as a Warning! water. The use of paper tissues is not soft cloth soaked in clean water and recommended as these may leave wrung out well and lightly wipe off dirt residues. from the surface. A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a Instrument panel precautions If a panel requires further cleaning, wipe collision and leave you with no protection. dirt off using a soft cloth soaked in mild Inspect the belt system periodically, Prevent caustic solutions such as detergent (about 5% solution) and wipe checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. perfume and cosmetic oils from off any remaining detergent using a Damaged parts must be replaced contacting the instrument panel. They cloth soaked in clean water and wrung immediately. Do not disassemble or modify will damage and discolor the instrument out well. the system. Seat belt assemblies must be panel. If these solutions get on the replaced after a collision if they have been instrument panel, wipe them off damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn immediately. webbing, etc.).

266 Note: Never use alcohol, gasoline and Remove moisture with a dry, soft cloth derivatives to clean the instrument and allow the leather to further dry in a Caution! panel lens. well-ventilated, shaded area. If the leather gets wet such as from Caution! When washing the inside of the window rain, also remove moisture and dry it as glass, use a soft cloth dampened in soon as possible. lukewarm water, gently wiping the thermal Do not use glazing agents. Glazing agents filaments. Use of glass cleaning products Note: could damage the thermal filaments. contain ingredients which may cause Because genuine leather is a natural discoloration, wrinkling, cracks and material, its surface is not uniform and peeling. Leather Parts — If it may have natural scars, scratches, Equipped and wrinkles. Instrument Panel Top To maintain the quality for as long When cleaning, it is recommended that Caution! as possible, periodical maintenance, you use a clean towel dampened in a about twice a year, is recommended. mild detergent to remove debris. Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone based cleaning products to Caution! clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. If the surface is rubbed harshly, it could result in the surface being damaged Remove dust and sand first using a leaving white scratch marks. vacuum cleaner or other means, then wipe dirt off using a soft cloth with a Window Interiors leather cleaner or a soft cloth soaked in mild soap. If the windows become covered with an oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them Wipe off the remaining cleaner or soap with glass cleaner. Follow the directions using a cloth soaked in clean water and on the container. wrung out well. Note: Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the window glass. It could damage the thermal filaments.

267 Caution!

Sand and dust on the seat surface may damage the overcoat of the genuine leather surfaces and accelerate wear. Greasy soiling on genuine leather may cause molding and stains. Rubbing hard with a stiff brush or cloth may cause damage. Do not wipe the leather using alcohol, chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such as thinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise, it may cause discoloration or stains. If the seats get wet, promptly remove moisture with a dry cloth. Remaining moisture on the surface may cause SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE deterioration such as hardening and shrinkage. Exposure to direct sunlight for long periods may cause deterioration and shrinkage. When parking the car under direct sunlight for long periods, shade the interior using sunshades. Do not leave vinyl products on the seats for long periods as they may affect the leather quality and coloring. If the cabin temperature becomes hot, the vinyl may deteriorate and adhere to the genuine leather.

268 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 270 RECOMMENDED TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE ...... 271 ENGINE...... 273 TRANSMISSION ...... 274 BRAKES ...... 275 SUSPENSIONS ...... 276 STEERING ...... 277 DIMENSIONS...... 278 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 280 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .....281 PERFORMANCE ...... 283

269 IDENTIFICATION DATA Identification Numbers Model Plate The model plate is located on the left side of door pillar.

10010104-122-001AB 10010106-121-001 Vehicle Identification Number Vehicle Emission Control Information Label Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label Tire Pressure Label (U.S.A. and Canada) The tire pressure label is located on the The motor vehicle safety standard label left side of door pillar. is located on the left side of door pillar.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 10010103121001 Model Plate Location Chassis Number/Vehicle Identification Number The Vehicle Identification Number is located below the left side (driver side) of the windshield.

10010107-121-002

10010109-121-001 Tire Pressure Label Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Engine Number Label The engine number label is located on Vehicle Emission Control the engine. Information Label (U.S.A. and Canada) The vehicle emission control information label is located under the hood. 270 RECOMMENDED Always check the tire inflation Checking Tire Pressure pressures on a regular basis according TIRE INFLATION Proceed as follows: PRESSURE to the recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in 1. When you check the air pressure, On the tire label you will find the conjunction with the information in this make sure the tires are cold - meaning recommended tire inflation pressure in Owner's Manual. Driving your vehicle they are not hot from driving even a both psi and kPa for the tires installed with under-inflated tires is dangerous. mile. as original equipment on the vehicle. Under-inflation is the most common It is very important that the inflation cause of failures in any kind of tire and 2. Remove the cap from the valve on pressure of the tires on your vehicle is may result in severe cracking, tread one tire. maintained at the recommended separation or “blowout”, with 3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the pressure. unexpected loss of vehicle control and valve. You should check the tire pressure increased risk of injury. Under-inflation regularly to insure that the proper increases sidewall flexing and rolling 4. Add air to achieve recommended air inflation pressure is maintained. resistance, resulting in heat buildup pressure. and internal damage to the tire. It 5. If you overfill the tire, release air by Note: results in unnecessary tire stress, pushing on the metal stem in the center irregular wear, loss of control and Tire pressures listed on the vehicle of the valve. Then recheck the pressure accidents. A tire can lose up to half of placard or tire information label indicate with your tire gauge. the recommended cold tire inflation its air pressure and not appear to be pressure, measured when the tires are flat. It is impossible to determine 6. Replace the valve cap. cold, after the vehicle has been parked whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking at them. 7. Visually inspect the tires to make for at least three hours. As you drive, sure there are no nails or other objects the temperature in the tire warms up, embedded that could poke a hole in the increasing the tire pressure. tire and cause an air leak. 8. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other irregularities.

271 Glossary Of Terms Original Equipment (OE) Tire Placard Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle. A label indicating the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes, recommended Vehicle Load Limit inflation pressure, and the maximum The maximum value of the combination weight the vehicle can carry. weight of occupants and cargo. Tire Identification Number (TIN) Bead Area of the Tire A number on the sidewall of each tire Area of the tire next to the rim. providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire Sidewall Area of the Tire size, and date of manufacture. Area between the bead area and the tread. Inflation Pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire. Tread Area of the Tire Area on the perimeter of the tire that kPa contacts the road when it's mounted Kilopascal, the metric unit for air on the vehicle. pressure. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS psi Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure. B-pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.

272 ENGINE Engine

1.4 Turbo Multi Air Cycle Four Number and position of cylinders 4 in line Piston bore and stroke (mm) 72.0 x 80.4 Total displacement (cm³) 1368 Compression ratio 9.8:1 Maximum power (kW) 119 Maximum power (HP) 160 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5500 Maximum torque (Nm) 250 Maximum torque (lb.-ft.) 184 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 2500 Spark plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. 91 Octane Recommended (87 Octane Acceptable) Maximum 15% Fuel Ethanol Content Note: When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate coating on the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.

Warning!

Modifications or repairs to the fuel supply system that are not carried out correctly or do not take the system’s technical specifications into account, can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

273 TRANSMISSION

Engine Traction Type Description 6-speed manual (*) / 6-speed 1.4 Turbo Multi Air RWD Manual/Automatic Automatic Transmission(**) (*) If equipped with manual transmission (**) If equipped with automatic transmission TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

274 BRAKES

Engine Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake Ventilated (floating type 11 in Solid (floating type 11 in 1.4 Turbo Multi Air Mechanical (lever type) (279.4 mm) diameter) (279.4 mm) in diameter) Note: Water, ice, and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake disks reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied.

275 SUSPENSIONS

Engine Front Rear 1.4 Turbo Multi Air Double wishbone with stabilizer bars Multilink with stabilizer bars TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

276 STEERING

Engine Turning circle curb to curb, ft (m) Type Double pinion electric power assist system 1.4 Turbo Multi Air 30.8 (9.4) (DP - EPAS) - rack and pinion

277 DIMENSIONS Dimensions Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unloaded. Trunk Volume: 4.9 cu. ft. (140 Liters) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

10000555-122-333 Vehicle Dimension Chart

ABCDEF 159.6 (4054 mm) 90.9 (2309 mm) 48.5 (1232 mm) 58.9 (1496 mm) 68.5 (1740 mm) 59.1 (1503 mm)

278 Weights Curb Weight: 2477 lbs (1124 kg) (if equipped with manual transmission) / 2516 lbs (1141 kg) (if equipped with automatic transmission).

279 FLUID CAPACITIES

Item Capacities Fuel tank 11.9 (gallons) / 45 (liters) Engine oil (without oil filter replacement) 3.3 (quarts) / 3.2 (liters) Engine oil (with oil filter replacement) 4.0 (quarts) / 3.8 (liters) Coolant (with manual transmission) 7.6 (quarts) / 7.2 (liters) Coolant (with automatic transmission) 7.5 (quarts) / 7.1 (liters) Manual transmission oil 2.2 (quarts) / 2.1 (liters) Automatic transmission fluid 7.8 (quarts) / 7.5 (liters) Rear differential oil 0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters) Limited slip differential oil 0.63 (quarts) / 0.6 (liters)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Brake fluid (& clutch fluid) 0.57 (quarts) / 0.55 (liters)

280 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Fluids And Lubricants Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration.

Lubricant Specification Replacement interval We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the Engine oil requirements of FCA Material Standard According to Scheduled Servicing Plan MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Mopar Long Life Coolant Concentrate for Coolant According to Scheduled Servicing Plan FIAT Spider Mopar Manual Transmission Long Life Gear Manual transmission oil Oil for FIAT Spider Mopar Automatic Transmission Long Life Automatic transmission fluid Fluid for FIAT Spider Mopar Long Life Hypoid Gear Oil for FIAT Rear differential oil Spider Mopar Long Life Limited Slip Additive for Limited slip differential oil FIAT Spider We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3. If Brake/clutch fluid DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. If lubricants compliant with the required specifications are not available, products that comply with the minimum required characteristics can be used for topping up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.

281 Caution!

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS authorized dealer as soon as possible. Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

282 PERFORMANCE Performance Top speed after the initial period of usage of the vehicle.

Version MPH (km/h) 1.4 Turbo Multi Air 160HP N/A

283 This page is intentionally left blank

284 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . .286 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .....286 WARRANTYINFORMATION.....288 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . .288 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . .289

285 SUGGESTIONS FOR IF YOU NEED Any communication to the OBTAINING SERVICE ASSISTANCE manufacturer's customer center should include the following information: FOR YOUR VEHICLE The manufacturer and its authorized Prepare For The dealer are vitally interested in your Owner's name and address Appointment satisfaction. We want you to be happy Owner's telephone number (home with our products and services. If you are having warranty work done, and office) Warranty service must be done by an be sure to bring the right papers with Authorized dealer name you, as well as your warranty folder. All authorized dealer. We strongly work to be performed may not be recommend that you take the vehicle to Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) an authorized dealer. They know your covered by the warranty. Discuss Vehicle delivery date and mileage additional charges with the service vehicle the best, and are most manager. Keep a maintenance log of concerned that you get prompt and FIAT Customer Center your vehicle's service history, as this high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities, P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI can often provide a clue to the current 48321–8004 problem. factory-trained technicians, special CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE tools, and the latest information to Phone: 1-888-242-6342 Prepare A List ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and FIAT Canada Customer in a timely manner. Make a written list of your vehicle's Center problems or the specific work you want This is why you should always talk to an done. If you've had an accident or work authorized dealer service manager first. P.O. Box 1621 done that is not on your maintenance Most matters can be resolved with this Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 log, let the service advisor know. process. Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French Be Reasonable With If for some reason you are still not Requests satisfied, talk to the general manager or In Mexico Contact owner of the authorized dealer. They If you list a number of items and you want to know if you need assistance. Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, must have your vehicle by the end of 1240 the day, discuss the situation with the If an authorized dealer is unable to Sante Fe C.P. 05109 resolve the concern, you may contact service advisor and list the items in Mexico, D. F. order of priority. At many authorized the manufacturer's customer center. dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle In Mexico City: 5081-7568 at a minimal daily charge. If you need a Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. 286 Puerto Rico And U.S. Service Contract We appreciate that you have made a Virgin Islands major investment when you purchased You may have purchased a service the vehicle. An authorized dealer has Customer Service Chrysler International contract for a vehicle to help protect also made a major investment in Services LLC you from the high cost of unexpected facilities, tools, and training to assure repairs after the manufacturer's New P.O. Box 191857 that you are absolutely delighted with Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The San Juan 00919-1857 the ownership experience. You will be manufacturer stands behind only the pleased with their sincere efforts to Tel.: (888) 242-6342 manufacturer's service contracts. If you resolve any warranty issues or related Fax: (787) 782-3345 purchased a manufacturer's service concerns. Customer Assistance contract, you will receive Plan For The Hearing Or Provisions and an Owner Identification Speech Impaired Card in the mail within three weeks of Warning! (TDD/TTY) the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service To assist customers who have hearing contract, call the manufacturer's Engine exhaust (internal combustion difficulties, the manufacturer has Service Contract National Customer engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or installed special TDD Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian (Telecommunication Devices for the emit, chemicals known to the State of residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / California to cause cancer and birth Deaf) equipment at its customer center. (800) 387-9983 French). defects, or other reproductive harm. In Any hearing or speech impaired The manufacturer will not stand behind addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles customer, who has access to a TDD or any service contract that is not the and certain products of component wear a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in manufacturer's service contract. It is contain, or emit, chemicals known to the the United States, can communicate not responsible for any service contract State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. with the manufacturer by dialing other than the manufacturer's service 1-800-380-CHRY. contract. If you purchased a service Canadian residents with hearing contract that is not a manufacturer's difficulties that require assistance can service contract, and you require use the special needs relay service service after the manufacturer's New offered by Bell Canada. For TTY Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for please refer to the contract documents, Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to and contact the person listed in those connect with a Bell Relay Service documents. operator.

287 WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY To contact NHTSA, you may call the INFORMATION DEFECTS Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at See the Warranty Information Booklet, In The 50 United States 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: for the terms and provisions of FCA US And Washington, D.C. 1-800-424-9153); or go to LLC and FCA Canada Inc. warranties http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: applicable to this vehicle and market. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New or cause injury or death, you should Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, immediately inform the National Washington, D.C. 20590. You can Highway Traffic Safety also obtain other information about Administration (NHTSA) in addition motor vehicle safety from to notifying FCA US LLC. http://www.safercar.gov . If NHTSA receives similar In Canada complaints, it may open an If you believe that your vehicle has CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE investigation, and if it finds that a a safety defect, you should contact safety defect exists in a group of the Customer Service Department vehicles, it may order a recall and immediately. Canadian customers remedy campaign. However, who wish to report a safety defect NHTSA cannot become involved in to the Canadian government should individual problems between you, contact Transport Canada, Motor your authorized dealer or FCA US Vehicle Defect Investigations and LLC. Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ .

288 PUBLICATION Owner's Manuals ORDER FORMS These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service To order the following manuals, you and engineering specialists to acquaint may use either the website or the you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. phone numbers listed below. Visa, Included are starting, operating, Mastercard, American Express, and emergency and maintenance Discover orders are accepted. procedures as well as specifications, Service Manuals capabilities and safety tips. These comprehensive Service Manuals Call toll free at: provide the information that students and professional technicians need in 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A Or complete working knowledge of the Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: vehicle, system, and/or components is www.techauthority.com written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

289 This page is intentionally left blank

290 INDEX Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 23,25 Chart, Tire Sizing...... 243 About Your Brakes ...... 153 Aluminium wheel maintenance . . . .263 Check Engine Light (Malfunction ABS System ...... 114 Automatic Climate Controls ...... 52 Indicator Light) ...... 111 Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) ...... 159 Automatic Dimming Mirror...... 36 Checking Levels ...... 235 Adaptive Front Lighting System Automatic Headlights...... 40 Child Restraint ...... 129 (AFS) ...... 42 Automatic Transmission ...... 156 Child Restraints Additives, Fuel ...... 177 Auxiliary (Power Outlet)...... 63 Child Restraints ...... 129 Advanced Keyless Entry System Clean Air Gasoline ...... 176 Key Left In Trunk ...... 21 B-Pillar Location ...... 246 Cleaning Locking Doors ...... 21 Battery (Maintenance)...... 238 Wheels ...... 255 Passive Entry ...... 21 Battery charging procedure ...... 239 Climate Control ...... 45 Request Switch ...... 21 Battery Recharging ...... 239 Automatic ...... 52 Unlocking Doors ...... 21 Blind Spot Monitoring...... 116 Manual ...... 48 AirBag...... 133,137 Body and underbody warranty . . . .259 Close The Hood ...... 69 Advance Front Air Bag . . . .133,137 Body lubrication ...... 239 Compact Spare Tire...... 253 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 148 Bodywork...... (Care And Maintenance) .259 Contract, Service ...... 287 Enhanced Accident Boot, Convertible Top Lowering ....70 Convertible Top ...... 70 Response ...... 148,226 Boot, Convertible Top Precautions . .73 Convertible top maintenance .....263 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . .146 Boot, Convertible Top Raising .....72 Cooling System ...... 50 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . .226 Brake System...... 153 Cupholders ...... 64 FrontAirBag...... 148 Brake/Clutch Fluid (Level Check). . .237 Customer Assistance ...... 286 Maintaining Your Air Bag Brakes ...... 153,275 System ...... 146 Data Recorder, Event ...... 146 Bright-metal maintenance ...... 262 Air Bag Maintenance ...... 146 Daytime Running Lights ...... 40 Air Conditioning ...... 50 Camera, Rear...... 170 Diagnostic System, Onboard .....110 Air Pressure Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 178 Dimensions ...... 278 Tires ...... 249 Center...... 61 Seat Storage Compartment Disabled Vehicle Towing .....224,225 Alarm Certification Label ...... 179 Driver's Seat Back Tilt ...... 32 Vehicle Security Alarm ...... 23,25 Changing A Flat Tire.....207,208,242 Driving in flooded area ...... 184 Enhanced Accident Response Fuel Filler Cap ...... 178 Driving tips ...... 181 Feature ...... 148,226 Fuel Filler Door ...... 178 Environment protection systems ....74 Fuse Block (Engine Compartment) .201 INDEX Electric power steering ...... 74 Essential Information ...... 3 Fuse Block (Interior) ...... 205 Electric Remote Mirrors ...... 37 Ethanol ...... 176 Fuses (Interior) ...... 199 Electrical Power Outlets ...... 63 Event Data Recorder ...... 146 Fuses (Underhood) ...... 199 Electronic Brake Control System Exhaust Gas Cautions ...... 178 Traction Control System ...... 114 Exterior Lights ...... 38 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . .58 Emergency...... Fuel Filler Door Release .179 Gasoline, Clean Air ...... 176 Emergency Key ...... 16 Flash-To-Pass ...... 40 Gasoline, Reformulated ...... 176 Emergency, In Case Of ...... 212 Flashers Gear Selector Positions ...... 157 Hazard Warning ...... 188 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 188 GVWR...... 179 Jacking ...... 207,208,242 Turn Signal ...... 41 Jump Starting ...... 221 Flooded Engine Starting ...... 222 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 188 Overheating ...... 223 Fluid And Lubricants ...... 281 Hazardous driving ...... 181 Towing...... 224,225 Fluid Capacities ...... 280 Head Restraints ...... 34 Emission control system ...... 74 Fog Lights...... 41 Headlight ...... 38 Emission Control System Follow Me Home ...... 41 Headlights Maintenance...... 111 Front Lights (Light Bulbs)...... 191 Adjusting...... 42 The Headlight Abroad Engine ...... 273 Front Wipers High Beam ...... 40 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 178 Wiper Operation ...... 43 Passing ...... 40 Fails To Start ...... 222 Fuel Heated Mirrors ...... 38 Additives ...... 177 Flooded, Starting ...... 222 Heavy-Duty Use Of The Vehicle Jump Starting ...... 221 Clean Air ...... 176 (Scheduled Servicing) ...... 229 Overheating ...... 223 Ethanol ...... 176 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . . .58 Starting ...... 20,222 Materials Added ...... 177 Hood Release ...... 69 Engine Compartment ...... 235 Methanol ...... 176 How To Use This Manual ...... 3 Engine Coolant (Level Check).....236 Fuel Consumption Display...... 87 Engine Oil (Level Check) ...... 236 Fuel Economy Monitor ...... 87 Identification Data ...... 270 Inside Rearview Mirror ...... 36 Loading Vehicle ...... 179 Overheating, Engine...... 223 Instrument Cluster Display Tires ...... 246 Overloading ...... 185 Information Display ...... 78,79 Locks Owner's Manual Instrument Panel...... 11 Power Door ...... 26,30 (Operator Manual) ...... 289 Interior Lights...... 62 Interiors ...... 265 Maintaining The Finish ...... 261 Paint damage touch-up ...... 262 Internal Equipment ...... 61 Maintenance Monitor ...... 84 Parking Brake...... 154 Maintenance procedures...... 239 Passing Light ...... 40 Jack Location...... 207 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Performance ...... 283 Jack Operation ...... 207,208,242 Engine) ...... 111 Periodic Checks (Scheduled Jump Starting...... 221 Manual Climate Controls...... 48 Servicing)...... 229 Heating ...... 50 Personal Settings ...... 106 KeyFob...... 14 Manual Transmission ...... 155 Personalization Features ...... 106 Emergency Key ...... 14 Manual, Service ...... 289 Placard, Tire And Loading Information...... 246 Programming Additional Key Methanol...... 176 Plastic part maintenance...... 265 Fobs ...... 23 Mirrors...... 35 Power Key-In Reminder...... 20 Automatic Dimming ...... 36 Brakes ...... 153 Electric Remote ...... 37 Lane Change And Turn Signals ....41 Door Locks ...... 26,30 Exterior Folding ...... 37 Lane Change Assist...... 42 Mirrors ...... 37 Heated ...... 38 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 123,127 Outlet...... 63 (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) Outside ...... 35 Leaving Home Light System ...... 42 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . .126 Rearview ...... 36 Life Of Tires ...... 251 Pretensioners Seat Belts ...... 128 Lights Occupant Restraints ...... 123 Protection from atmospheric Daytime Running ...... 40 Onboard Diagnostic System .....110 agents (bodywork) ...... 259 Fog ...... 41 Operating Precautions ...... 110 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 188 Outside Rearview Mirrors ...... 35,36 Radar Sensors ...... 165 Passing ...... 40 Overhead Light Radial Ply Tires ...... 250 Turn Signal ...... 41 (Bulb Replacement) ...... 198 Radio Frequency Scheduled servicing...... 228 Shift position indication...... 157 General Information ...... 19,23 Seat Belt Shoulder Belts ...... 123,127 Radio transmitter and mobile Energy Management Feature . . .129 Signals, Turn ...... 41 INDEX phones ...... 5 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 123,127 Snow Chains ...... 256 Rear Camera ...... 170 Pregnant Women ...... 126 Snow Tires ...... 253 Rear Lights (Light Bulbs) ...... 191 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 128 Spare Tire ...... 207,253 Rear Park Assist System...... 166 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 128 Spare Tires ...... 253,254 Rear View ...... 10 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 128 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . .162 Rearview Mirrors...... 36 Seat Belts ...... 123 Starting ...... 20,222 Recommended Tire Inflation Child Restraint ...... 129 Engine Fails To Start ...... 222 Pressure ...... 271 Front Seat ...... 123 Starting And Operating...... 20,222 Recorder, Event Data ...... 146 Pregnant Women ...... 126 Starting Procedures...... 20,222 Recreational Towing...... 181 Pretensioners ...... 128 Starting The Engine ...... 152 Reformulated Gasoline ...... 176 Rear Seat ...... 123 Steering ...... 277 Refueling Procedure...... 178 Seats...... 32,33 Column Lock ...... 35 Refueling The Vehicle ...... 176 Adjustment ...... 32 Tilt Column ...... 35 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 128 Heated ...... 33 Wheel, Tilt ...... 35 Replacement Tires...... 251 Seatback Release ...... 32 Storage ...... 61 Replacing A Bulb ...... 188 Tilting ...... 32 Storing the vehicle ...... 258 Replacing Exterior Light Bulbs . . . .191 Seats And Fabric Parts Sun Visor ...... 62 Replacing Fuses ...... 198 (Cleaning)...... 265 Supplemental Restraint System - Replacing Interior Light Bulbs.....198 Security Alarm AirBag...... 133,137 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 288 Security Alarm ...... 23,25 Suspensions ...... 276 Restraint, Head ...... 34 Sentry Key Symbols...... 3 Restraints, Child ...... 129 Key Programming ...... 23 Service Assistance ...... 286 Tilt Steering Column ...... 35 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 288 Service Contract ...... 287 Tire And Loading Information Safety Information, Tire ...... 242 Service Manuals ...... 289 Placard ...... 246 Saving fuel and protection of the Shift Lever Override ...... 159 Tire chains...... 183 environment ...... 181 Tire Markings ...... 242 Spare Tire ...... 207,253 Vehicle Loading ...... 179,246 Tire Rotation ...... 256 Spare Tires ...... 253,254 Vehicle modifications/alterations.....4 Tire Safety Information ...... 242 Spinning ...... 250 Vent Operation ...... 45 Tire Service Kit ...... 212 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 251 Tires...... 249,253,257 To Open Deck Lid ...... 66 Warning Flasher, Hazard ...... 188 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 251 ToOpenHood...... 69 Warranty Information ...... 288 Air Pressure ...... 249 Towing Washer Operation...... 43,44 Changing ...... 207,208,242 Disabled Vehicle ...... 224,225 Washers, Windshield ...... 43 Compact Spare ...... 253 Towing Eyes...... 224 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...... 255 Flat Changing ...... 212 Towing Trailers ...... 181 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...... 255 General Information ...... 249,253 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Wheels And Tires ...... 242 System) ...... 121 General Information ...... 253 Window And Headlight Washer Transmission ...... 274 Fluid (Level Check) ...... 238 High Speed ...... 250 Tread Wear Indicators...... 251 Window interiors (cleaning) ...... 267 Inflation Pressure ...... 249 Trunk Lid Windows Jacking ...... 207,208,242 Closing ...... 68 Driver/Passenger Window Life Of Tires ...... 251 Opening ...... 66 Controls ...... 56 Load Capacity ...... 246 Trunk Light (Bulb Replacement) . . .198 Power Windows ...... 56 Pressure Monitor System Window Lockout ...... 58 (TPMS) ...... 116 Turn Signals...... 41 Windshield wiper blades Quality Grading ...... 257 Undercoating ...... 263 (replacing) ...... 240 Radial ...... 250 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 257 Windshield Wipers ...... 43 Replacement ...... 251 Universal Garage Door Opener Windstop ...... 66 Safety ...... 242,249 (HomeLink) ...... 58 Winter driving ...... 183 Sizes ...... 243 Universal Transmitter ...... 58 Wiper blades ...... 240 Snow Tires ...... 253 Wrecker Towing ...... 224,225

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING The antenna cable should be as short as practical and FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a EQUIPMENT routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer Special design considerations are incorporated into this only fully shielded coaxial cable. available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to disregard any features and equipment described in this frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). accidents. manual that are not on this vehicle. equipment must be installed properly by trained person- nel. The following must be observed during installation. Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design normal may require special precautions. alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- The positive power connection should be made directly drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. All installations should be checked for possible interfer- drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- The negative power connection should be made to body ence between the communications equipment and the portation. factured. sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. vehicle’s electronic systems. This connection should not be fused. WARNING! Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may slower, and your judgment is impaired when you affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. vehicles so equipped. Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC 2018 18BAFIA-126-AC 124 SPIDER ©2017 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group Third Edition Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC. Printed in U.S.A.